JP6688540B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a game machine such as a ball game machine (generally referred to as “pachinko machine”) or a rotating drum type game machine (generally referred to as “pachi-slot machine”).

  Conventionally, provided with a movable body that is movable according to the operation of an operation means such as a production button, and using the production button and the movable body when performing the production based on the lottery result when the game ball passes through the starting opening. There is a game machine that executes various effects (for example, see Reference 1).

JP, 2011-245186, A

  However, in such a gaming machine, the player can mainly recognize the driving process of the movable body and the like, and is assumed for a player who has seen the driving process even if the movable body starts driving. You can't give outside surprises. As a result, the game becomes rude and tired, and there is a possibility that the interest of the game may be deteriorated despite the fact that the effect accompanied by driving the movable body can be executed. Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in amusement of the game.

In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, the present invention provides a gaming machine capable of executing a game using a game medium,
A light incident surface on which light is incident and a light emitting surface different from the light incident surface are formed so that the back portion can be visually recognized, and light incident from the light incident surface is forwarded from the light emitting surface to the gaming machine. A light guide plate that emits toward
A light source for making light incident on the light incident surface of the light guide plate;
A movable body provided behind the light guide plate and capable of changing between a pre-operation state and a post-operation state,
And a production control means for performing light emission control of the light source and drive control of the movable body,
Specific information is expressed on the light exit surface of the light guide plate by making light incident on the light entrance surface,
By the effect control means,
While changing the movable body from the pre-operation state to the post-operation state, light is incident on the light incident surface of the light guide plate from the light source to identify the light exit surface of the light guide plate. And a state in which the information is expressed, and a state in which the specific information is not expressed in the light emitting surface of the light guide plate by causing the light source to emit no light,
Depending on the state in which the specific information is displayed on the light emitting surface of the light guide plate, it is difficult to visually recognize a change from the pre-operation state of the movable body to the post-operation state,
Even when the movable body is being changed from the post-operation state to the pre-operation state, light is incident from the light source to the light incident surface of the light guide plate to identify the light exit surface of the light guide plate. And a state in which the information is expressed, and a state in which the specific information is not expressed in the light emitting surface of the light guide plate by causing the light source to emit no light,
There are a plurality of light sources in the light source, the specific information that is exposed on the light exit surface of the light guide plate is changeable by changing the light source that enters light into the light entrance surface, While changing the movable body from the pre-operation state to the post-operation state, changing the specific information displayed on the light emitting surface of the light guide plate while changing the pre-operation state of the movable body from the operation state. It is difficult to recognize the change to the rear state from the outside , and after the state is changed to the post-motion state, the movable body is in a state in which the effect by the movable body is being executed. In order to clarify the above, the light source is made to emit no light so that the specific information is not displayed on the light emitting surface of the light guide plate .

  According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of games.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and seen from behind. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of a door frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which saw the production operation unit of the plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which saw the production operation unit from the back. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production | operation production unit for every main member, and was seen from above. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembles the production operation unit for each main member and is seen from below. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the installation base unit of the production operation unit and was seen from above. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attachment base unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the touch unit of the production operation unit and was seen from above. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the touch unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the button unit of the production operation unit and was seen from above. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the button unit and was seen from the bottom. It is a top view of a dish unit. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the production | operation operation unit in the AA cross section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the production | operation operation unit in the BB cross section in FIG. (A) is a front view of the door lower right production unit of a plate unit, (b) is a right side view of the door lower right production unit. It is the perspective view which saw the door lower right production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right production unit from the back. It is CC sectional drawing in the door lower right production unit of FIG.34 (b). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door lower right production unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the lower right door production unit and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotary body internal unit of the door lower right production unit, and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary body internal unit and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the lower right door rotary unit of the lower door right effect unit facing forward, and (b) is a front view of the lower right door rotary unit facing rearward. (A) is a perspective view from the front of the dish unit with the upper bowl ball removing unit attached to the dish unit base, and (b) is from the rear with the upper bowl ball removing unit attached to the dish unit base. FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the upper dish ball removal unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper plate ball removal unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower dish ball removal unit of a dish unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower dish ball removal unit from the back. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked down at the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked down at the game board from the back. It is the front view of the game board which omits illustration of the front side of the game ball guide way unit. 51 (a) is an enlarged view of the game ball guideway unit, and FIG. 51 (b) is a cross-sectional view in the game ball guideway unit longitudinal direction. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 53 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 52. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to / from a lending device connection terminal board for gaming balls or the like that relays electrical connection between a payout control board, which constitutes a main board, and a CR unit and a frequency display board. FIG. 53 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 52. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of a peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram of a VDP built-in sound source in a display device and a sound control unit. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. 6 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 61 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board of FIG. 59 to the peripheral control board. It is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main processing in a main control board. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power failure. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special control processing. It is a flow chart showing a starting mouth winning process. It is a flow chart which shows change start processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during change. It is the flowchart which shows one example of big hit game start processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the small hit game start processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the big hit game processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the small hit game processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table structure in the random number storage means for special symbols. It is a table showing each characteristic for each type of jackpot. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern table which can be selected in a normal external disadvantage game state. It is a flow chart which shows an example of sub main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of 16ms regular processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of command analysis processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of decorative design variation start processing (Step S1210). It is the flowchart which shows one example of decision processing (step S1225a) of the stop design in 1st production mode. It is the flowchart which shows one example of decision processing (step S1225b) of the stop design in 2nd production mode. (A) is a figure explaining the extended production pattern at the time of a big hit, (b) is a figure explaining the extended production pattern at the time of a small hit, (c) is a challenge bonus production pattern at the time of a big hit. It is a figure for explaining and (d) is a figure for explaining a challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a small hit. It is a time chart which shows an example of the display production which appears in EL display unit 1400, when one of production commands "01H"-"04H" is received from the main control MPU4100a side. It is a time chart which shows an example of the display production which appears in EL display unit 1400, when one of production commands "09H"-"11H" is received from the main control MPU4100a side. (A) is a table showing the jackpot expectation and the like when in the first effect mode, separately for each effect content series, and (b) is a challenge bonus plunge expectation degree when in the second effect mode. It is a table showing each of the production content series separately. It is a time chart which shows another example about the display effect pattern matched with the effect command "01H" when in the first effect mode. It is a time chart showing another example of the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "02H" when in the first effect mode. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing each EL display substrate 1400a to 1400c of the EL display unit 1400. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram showing a process of changing the form of the display unit 1400d of the EL display unit 1400. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between an operation process of the EL display unit 1400 and a light emission time of the light guide plate. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing a state where a central portion of a display portion 1400d of the EL display unit 1400 is opened. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram, illustrating one example of an effect accompanied by a change in the display form of the EL display unit 1400. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the area division of the door frame 3. It is an explanatory view showing an example of area division of the game board 5.

  A pachinko machine 1 which is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 9 is a front view of the pachinko machine, a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from the back.

  The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) in a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 which is openably and closably supported and is openably and closably attached to the outer frame 2, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20, which are vertically separated from each other and extend horizontally, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of 20 and extend vertically are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 are longer than the left and right lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and to the left end portion of the upper frame member 10 in front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the left end side upper portion of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 are provided. The body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a square outer shape in front view and having a through hole 111 penetrating in the front and back, and a game attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100. A dish unit 200 having an upper tray 201 and a lower tray 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the left front portion of the door frame base unit 100. A unit 400, a right side unit 450 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100, and a game ball stored in the upper plate 201 that is attached to the lower right part of the front face of the door frame base unit 100 by penetrating the plate unit 200. The rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and the handle unit 500 that can be operated by the player in order to drive into the game area of the game board 5. The foul cover unit 520 which is attached to the part and receives the game ball that has been hit in the game area and discharges it to the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and the game ball of the upper plate 201 which is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. A ball feeding unit 540 for sending to the ball launching device 680, a glass unit 560 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 to close the through hole 111, and a security cover 580 for covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 560. ing.

  The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that is partially insertable into the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. It is attached to the upper and lower ends on the left side in front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are respectively rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to a front side left surface of the main body frame base 600, and a main body frame base 600. A ball launching device 680 that is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the game board 5 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and is attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base when viewed from the front. , And the door A locking unit 700 that locks between 3 and the main body frame 4, and a reverse L-shaped payout that pays out the game ball to the player side, which is attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side in front view of the main body frame base 600. A unit 800, a substrate unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600 such that the rear side of the main body frame base 600 can be opened and closed. And a back cover 980.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends leftward and rightward. A ball tank 802 that stores game balls supplied from a box-shaped island facility (not shown), and a game ball inside the ball tank 802 that is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 to the left when viewed from the front. A tank rail 803 that extends to the left and right to guide, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 when viewed from the front, and guides the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 820. A game ball that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and is guided by the ball guiding unit 820. Based on an instruction from the payout control board housed in the payout control board box 950, a payout device 830 for paying out one by one and a game ball paid out by the payout device 830 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 are guided downward. In addition, the upper full tank ball path unit 850 for discharging the game ball from either the normal discharge port or the full tank discharge port according to the storage state of the game ball on the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, and the payout unit base 801 It is attached to the lower end and guides the game ball discharged from the normal discharge port of the upper tank ball path unit 850 to the front and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3 Lower full tank ball path unit having a full tank guide path for guiding the played game ball forward and guiding it from the front end to the full tank receiving port 530 of the door frame 3. Is provided with a door 860, a.

  The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 has a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600, and a bass speaker inside the body unit base 910, which is attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 on the front view left side of the board unit base 910. The speaker unit 920, the power supply board box 930 which is mounted on the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in front view and accommodates the power supply board inside, and the speaker unit 920 which is mounted on the rear side and internally controls the interface. An interface control board box 940 containing a board, a power supply board box 930, and a payout control board box mounted across the interface control board box 940 and containing a payout control board for controlling the payout of game balls And 950.

  As shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is driven, and places the game ball emitted from the ball emitting device 680 at the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component member 1000 having a guide rail 1001 for guiding to, a flat-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, and a rear side of the game panel 1100. A main control in which a box-shaped substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower part and opened upward, and a main control substrate for controlling the game of the pachinko machine 1 which is attached to the rear side of the substrate holder 1200 are housed inside A table unit 1300 having a board box 1300 and a plurality of winning openings which are mounted in the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 and which can receive game balls hit in the game area 5a ( (Not shown), and a back unit (not shown) having an EL (Electroluminescence) display unit 1400 that is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 above the board box 1200 and is visible to the player through the game panel 1100. , Are provided.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launching device 680 causes the game to be performed with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. The ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls hit in the game area 5a are received in a winning opening (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning holes. . Since the interest of the player can be enhanced by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. 10 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, and FIG. 11 is a rear view of the door frame. 12 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front right, FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the left front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the back. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  The door frame 3 has a rectangular outer shape in a front view and is frame-shaped, a door frame base unit 100, a dish unit 200 attached to a lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a top attached to an upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100. The unit 350, the left side unit 400 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100, the right side unit 450 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower right front part of the door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 500 is attached so as to penetrate the plate unit 200.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes a foul cover unit 520 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, a ball feeding unit 540 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. A glass unit 560 that closes the through hole 111 and a security cover 580 that covers a lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 560 are provided.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is, as shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, etc., a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear direction in a vertically long rectangular shape, A cylindrical handle attaching member 120 for attaching the handle unit 500, which is attached to the front right lower corner of the front side of the door frame base 110, and a frame-like reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110. And a door frame side that is attached to both upper and lower ends on the left end side in front view of the reinforcing unit 130 and projects forward and is rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. The upper hinge member 140 and the lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side, and a glass plate rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably attaching the glass unit 560. The unit mounting member 160, and a.

  The plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is vertically arranged in rows and bulges forward to store the game balls. The upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202. And a plate-shaped plate unit base 210 mounted on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 mounted on the plate unit base 210 on the front side of the upper plate 201 and capable of displaying an image. A production operation unit 220 having a touch panel 246 and an upper dish production button 257 which can be operated by a player, a dish unit cover 260 for covering the upper dish 201 and the lower dish 202 from the front side, and a right side of the front dish 201 on the front view. The lower right door effect unit 270 having the lower right door rotary member 270A that is arranged and rotates according to the gaming state, and the lower right door effect unit 270 are covered from the front side. A transparent production unit cover 300, an upper plate ball removing unit 310 for removing the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, and a lower plate for removing the game balls stored in the lower plate 202. A lower dish ball removing unit 320, a ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine (not shown, also referred to as a CR unit) arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, An upper plate top decoration member 340, which is attached to the upper part of the plate unit base 210 and is capable of light emission decoration, is mainly provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the top unit 350 of the door frame 3 includes a unit base 360 partially attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 along the upper side, and a unit base 360 having a light-transmitting property. A front decoration member 370 having a translucent property, which is attached to the center of the left and right sides of the front surface of the 360 and bulges forward, and a top speaker which is installed in the top decoration member 370 and outputs a sound in a high range ( (Not shown), and a door frame decoration board 380 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 360 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the left side unit 400 of the door frame 3 includes a flat unit base 410 mounted along the left outer peripheral edge of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a unit. A translucent left side decoration member 420 attached to the front surface of the base 410 and having an upper end extending to the left end of the top decoration member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame on the front side of the left side decoration member 420. 3, a left speaker unit 430 having a left speaker (not shown) attached to the upper left corner of the unit 3, and a door frame attached to the rear side of the unit base 410 and having a plurality of LEDs attached to the front surface thereof. And a left decorative substrate 440.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the right side unit 450 of the door frame 3 includes a flat unit base 460 mounted along the right outer peripheral edge of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a unit. A translucent right side decoration member 470 attached to the front side of the base 460 and having an upper end extending to the right end of the top decoration member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame on the front surface of the right side decoration member 470. 3, a right speaker unit 480 having a right speaker (not shown) attached at a position which is the upper right corner of the unit 3, and a plurality of LEDs on the front face, which are attached between the unit base 460 and the right side decoration member 470. And a door frame right decoration board (not shown) to which is attached.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the handle unit 500 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to the handle body 502 attached to the handle attaching member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 and the handle body 502. A handle lever 504 that can be rotated by a player, and a handle cover 506 that is attached to the handle body 502 from the front side of the handle lever 504 and cooperates with the handle body 502 to rotatably support the handle lever 504. And are equipped with. Further, although not shown, the handle unit 500 is attached to the handle body 502 and is attached to the handle body 502 to detect a rotation angle of the handle lever 504, and is attached to the handle body 502 and can be operated by a player. A stop button and a contact detection sensor that is mounted in the handle body 502 and detects contact between the player and the handle lever 504 are provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 522 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and an open front side, and a unit main body 522. It mainly includes a flat plate-shaped lid member 524 attached to the front surface. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates forward and backward in the upper left corner of the front view, and a through ball passage that connects the normal guide path of the lower full ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper plate ball supply port 210a of the plate unit 200. 526, a full-ball receiving port 528 that is open rearward on the right side of the through-ball passage 526 when viewed from the front, and is capable of communicating with the full-tank guiding path of the lower full-ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4; A foul that receives a game ball (a foul ball) that has been opened upward on the right side of the ball receiving port 528 when viewed from the front and that has not been reached into the game area 5a despite being launched by the ball launching device 680 of the body frame 4. The ball receiving port 530 and the game ball received in the full ball receiving port 528 and the foul ball receiving port 530, which are opened forward in the lower right corner of the front view, are discharged, and the dish unit 200 is released. Includes a ball outlet 532 which communicates with the lower tray ball supply port 210c, the.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the ball feeding unit 540 of the door frame 3 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 542, which is a box-shaped unit main body 542 that extends to the left and right and is open on the rear side. A unit cover 544 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the front view of the foul cover unit 520 with the front side opened, and the upper plate of the dish unit 200 that opens to the front A ball entrance 546 into which the game balls stored in 201 enter, a ball discharge port 548 that is capable of releasing the game balls entering the ball entrance 546 and is open rearward, and a ball entrance A game ball that has entered into 546 can be discharged, and a ball discharge port 550 that is open to the front below the ball entrance 546 is provided. Further, although not shown, the ball feed unit 540 is a ball feed solenoid for releasing the game balls entered from the ball entrance 546 one by one from the ball discharge port 548, and the game ball entered from the ball entrance 546. A switching mechanism for switching between the ball discharge port 548 side and the ball discharge port 550 side.

  As shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16, the glass unit 560 of the door frame 3 is attached to the frame-shaped unit frame 562 which is larger than the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 and the front and rear sides of the unit frame 562. A pair of glass plates 564 that closes the inside of the cage unit frame 562 are provided.

  The dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 17 to 33. 17 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. 21 is a perspective view of the effect operation unit of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from above, and FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from below. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting operation base unit disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the installation base unit disassembled and viewed from below.

  Further, FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and seen from above, and FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit disassembled and seen from below. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit of the effect operation unit as seen from above and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit as seen from below. FIG. 31 is a plan view of the dish unit, FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view showing an enlarged area of the effect operation unit in the AA cross section in FIG. 31, and FIG. 33 is an effect operation in the BB cross section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a unit.

  Further, FIG. 34 (a) is a front view of the lower right door rendering unit of the dish unit, FIG. 34 (b) is a right side view of the lower right door rendering unit, and FIG. 35 is a front view of the lower right door rendering unit. FIG. 36 is a perspective view of the lower right door effect unit seen from behind. FIG. 37 is a sectional view taken along the line CC of the lower right door effect unit of FIG. 34 (b). FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the lower right door effect unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the lower right door effect unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating body internal unit of the lower right door rendering unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating body internal unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 42 (a) is a front view of the lower-right door rotating body of the lower-right-door effect unit facing forward, and FIG. 42 (b) is a front view of the lower-right door rotating body facing rearward.

  Further, FIG. 43 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front in a state where the upper dish ball removing unit of the dish unit is attached to the dish unit base, and FIG. 43 (b) is the upper dish ball removing unit attached to the dish unit base. It is the perspective view seen from back in the state. FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the upper dish ball removing unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the upper dish ball removing unit viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 46A is a perspective view of the lower dish ball punching unit of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 46B is an exploded perspective view of the lower dish ball punching unit as disassembled and seen from the front.

  The dish unit 200 bulges forward from the door frame base unit 100. This plate unit 200 is an upper plate 201 that stores a game ball that is paid out from the payout device 830 and is to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game that is arranged below the upper plate 201 and that is supplied from the upper plate 201. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing balls. The plate unit 200 is mounted on the plate-shaped plate unit base 210 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and is attached to the upper front part of the plate unit base 210, and the left side from the center in the left and right bulges forward to a large extent. An upper plate body 212 forming a lower plate body 212 forming a lower plate 202, which is attached to the center of the left and right at the lower front surface of the plate unit base 210 and bulges significantly forward. .

  Further, the dish unit 200 covers the effect operation unit 220 mounted on the front side of the upper plate body 212 and the front surface of the plate unit base 210, and covers the upper plate body 212, the lower plate body 214, and the front and lower sides of the effect operation unit. Dish unit cover 260 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210, a lower right door production unit 270 arranged on the right side of the production operation unit 220 and attached to the right front portion of the dish unit base 210, and a lower right door production unit of the door Performance unit cover 300 that covers the front side of 270 and is attached to the front of the dish unit base 210, and game balls that are attached so as to sandwich the dish unit base 210 from the front and back and are stored in the upper dish 201 of the upper dish body 212. Upper plate ball removing unit 310 for pulling the lower plate into the lower plate 202, and the lower side of the lower plate main body 214 Mounted it includes a lower tray ball vent unit 320 for discharging the game ball that is stored in the lower tray 202 downward, the.

  Further, the dish unit 200 is attached to the upper surface of the production operation unit 220, and a ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, and a dish. The upper plate top decoration member 340, which is attached to the upper part of the unit base 210 and is capable of emitting light, and the plate unit cover 260, which is attached to the front left side of the plate unit base 210 behind the plate unit cover 260, can emit light forward. The plate unit left decorative substrate 345 having a plurality of LEDs and the rear of the rendering unit cover 300 and the lower side of the door lower right rendering unit 270 are mounted on the right side of the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and face forward. The dish unit right decoration substrate 346 having a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light and the dish unit base 210 are attached to the rear side. The decorative plate 233 before the upper plate, the decorative substrate 235 after the upper plate, the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241, the vibration device 242, the touch panel 246, the effect button decorative substrate 251, the effect button pressing sensor 258, the door lower right relay substrate 281, which will be described later. The dish unit left decoration board 345, and the dish unit right decoration board 346 and the dish unit relay board 347 that relays the connection between the peripheral control board (not shown) of the game board 5 are provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the dish unit base 210 of the dish unit 200 extends to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit base 210 penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front and also has an upper dish ball supply port 210a that extends cylindrically rearward and a forward and backward direction below the upper dish ball supply port 210a. And a speaker slit 210b formed of a plurality of elongated holes extending up and down, a lower dish ball supply port 210c penetrating forward and backward in the lower center of the left-right center in a front view, and extending rearward in a tubular shape, and a lower dish. An upper plate ball feed port 210d is provided which penetrates forward and backward on the upper right side of the ball supply port 210c in a front view, extends vertically, and has an upper portion located at the right end of the upper plate body 212.

  Further, the dish unit base 210 has a through hole 210e having a quadrangular inner circumference penetrating forward and backward on the left side in a front view of the upper bowl feeding port 210d, and a receiving part projecting forward from the lower side of the through hole 210e in a plate shape. The piece 210f, the escape port 210g that penetrates in the front and rear direction on the upper right side of the upper bowl feed port 210d, and the handle mounting member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 that penetrates the front and rear in the lower right corner of the front view. A handle insertion opening 210h, a cylinder insertion opening 210i through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted and which penetrates in the vicinity of the right corner in a front view, and a right side in a front view of a cylindrical lower dish ball supply opening 210c. And a cutout portion 210j that is cut out from the rear end to the front side.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the upper plate main body 212 of the plate unit 200 is formed in a container shape in which the left side of the center of the left and right when viewed from the front largely bulges forward and is opened upward and backward. ing. The upper plate main body 212 is provided with a guide passage portion 212a which is open only to the left and the rear on the right end side in front view and through which game balls can flow. In the upper plate body 212, the bottom surface is inclined so as to lower the right end as a whole. More specifically, with the upper plate body 212 attached to the plate unit base 210, the bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is from the lower position of the upper plate ball supply port 210a to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 210d. Is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of the. Thereby, the game ball discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 210a can be received and stored in the upper plate body 212, and the received game ball can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 212a. It can be supplied to the delivery port 210d.

  Further, the upper plate body 212 is provided with a metal ground metal fitting 212b extending from the right and left center to the vicinity of the right end on the rear end side of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the earth metal fitting 212b is electrically grounded (earthed), and by contacting the game ball, static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the lower plate body 214 of the plate unit 200 has a trapezoidal plan view in which the rear end side is longer than the front end side, and is formed in a container shape in which the upper side and the rear side are open. The lower plate main body 214 has a ball-draining hole 214a that penetrates the bottom surface vertically and can be closed by the lower plate ball-draining unit 320, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the ball-draining hole 214a. is doing. The lower plate main body 214 can receive and store the game balls discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 210c of the plate unit base 210, and also downwardly move the game balls from the ball hole 214a to the plate unit 200. Can be discharged.

  As shown in FIG. 21 to FIG. 24, the effect operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the attachment base unit 220A and the attachment base unit 220A attached to the dish unit base 210 and the upper dish body 212 at the center of the left and right in front view. A touch unit 220B, a button unit 220C attached to the attachment base unit 220A on the left side of the touch unit 220B in a front view, and a plurality of cylindrical dampers 222 interposed between the touch unit 220B and the attachment base unit 220A. A unit cover 224 attached to the attachment base unit 220A so as to cover the outer peripheries of the touch unit 220B and the button unit 220C from above, and a decorative member 226 attached to the right end of the attachment base unit 220A in front view.

  The damper 222 of the effect operation unit 220 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a groove 222a is formed over the entire circumference in the axial center of the outer peripheral surface. The damper 222 in this embodiment is made of synthetic rubber. The plurality of dampers 222 can alleviate the impact when the touch unit 220B is struck and reduce the load (impact) acting on the mounting base unit 220A or the dish unit base 210 side, and the touch unit 220B will be described later. It is possible to reduce the transmission of the vibration caused by the vibrating device 242 to the mounting base unit 220A and the dish unit base 210 side.

  As shown in FIG. 23 to FIG. 26, the mounting base unit 220A of the performance operation unit 220 is a shallow box-shaped mounting base 230 that is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and has an open top, and on the upper side of the mounting base 230. A shallow box-shaped unit case 231 which is attached and has a rear end attached to the front end of the upper plate body 212 and is capable of accommodating the touch unit 220B from above, and a horizontally long upper plate attached to the front end of the unit case 231. A front lens member 232, a front plate front decorative substrate 233 arranged between the front plate front lens member 232 and the unit case 231, and provided with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and a unit cover for covering the front side of the front plate front lens member 232. And a translucent upper plate front decoration member 234 attached to 224.

  Further, the mounting base unit 220A is mounted on the rear end of the unit case 231, and has a top plate rear decoration substrate 235 having a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward, and an upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 upper side. Is placed on the unit cover 224 and is attached to the unit cover 224. The upper plate decorative member 236 is sandwiched between the unit cover 224 and the unit case 231 in front of the upper plate decorative member 236. Linear light-emitting lens member 237 capable of guiding the light of the above to emit light linearly, a cylindrical button mounting member 238 mounted to the unit cover 224 on the right side of the upper plate rear decoration member 236 in front view, and a button mounting member. And an upper dish ball removal button 239 that is slidably attached up and down by the 238.

  The mounting base 230 has a flat plate-shaped mounting side receiving portion 230a that is inclined downward from the center of the front and rear to the front side, and a mounting side receiving portion 230a that penetrates the mounting side receiving portion 230a and is separated from each other to the left and right. One through-hole 230b and a tubular receiving portion 230c that extends downward from the peripheral edge of the through-hole 230b are provided. The through hole 230b has a square inner periphery. The tubular receiving portion 230c is formed in a pyramidal tubular shape so as to narrow as it goes downward (see FIG. 33). More specifically, in the tubular receiving portion 230c, the inner peripheral wall on the front side extends substantially perpendicularly to the surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a, and the inner peripheral wall on the rear side is located below the surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a. As it goes toward, it extends so as to be directed forward. In addition, the cylindrical receiving portion 230c extends so that the inner peripheral walls on both the left and right sides are inclined such that the lower ends (tips) thereof are slightly closer to each other with respect to the vertical of the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a.

  The unit case 231 is opened upward, and is housed in a housing recess 231a capable of housing the touch unit 220B, and is spaced apart from the front and rear ends of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a in the front and rear directions, respectively, and protrudes upward in pairs in a cylindrical shape. The horizontal support pins 231b, the pair of front support pins 231c that are laterally spaced apart from the vicinity of the front end of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a and project upward in a cylindrical shape, and the housing recess 231a from the left-right center on the front and rear end sides of the bottom surface It has a central support protrusion 231d protruding upward, and two receiving protrusions 231e protruding in a pyramid shape so as to be narrowed from the lower side of the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a toward the lower side and separated left and right. .

  Further, the unit case 231 is arranged around the insertion hole 231f through which the lower portion of the button unit 220C is inserted, and the insertion hole 231f on the upper surface, which penetrates vertically in a circular shape on the left side of the accommodation recess 231a in a front view. A button unit mounting portion 231g for mounting the button unit 220C, and a linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 that extends leftward and rightward on the rear outer peripheral wall of the housing recess 231a and is recessed downward from the upper end are arranged. And a notch portion 231h.

  The accommodation recess 231a of the unit case 231 has a shape in plan view that is a combination of a quadrangle that extends to the left and right and a trapezoid that projects outward from both the left and right sides of the quadrangle. In addition, in the accommodation recess 231a, the bottom surfaces of the quadrangular portions are formed lower than the bottom surfaces of the trapezoidal portions on the left and right sides. The step difference on the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a is formed to be slightly lower than the height (axial length) of the damper 222.

  The four lateral support pins 231b project upward from the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the accommodation recess 231a, and are formed so as to be inserted into the cylindrical damper 222. Further, the lateral support pin 231b is provided with a truncated cone-shaped taper portion 231i on the upper end side, the diameter of which becomes smaller toward the upper end side (see FIG. 32). The lateral support pin 231b has the same distance from the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a to the middle of the tapered portion 231i as the length of the damper 222, and is formed longer than the damper 222 as a whole. The pair of front support pins 231c can be inserted into the cylindrical damper 222, and are formed to be slightly longer than half the length of the damper 222.

  The upper end of the central support protrusion 231d projects to the same height as the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the accommodation recess 231a. The receiving projection 231e is formed in a truncated cone shape having a quadrangular outer periphery. The two receiving projections 231e are formed at positions corresponding to the two through holes 230b of the mounting base 230. The receiving projection 231e has a front outer peripheral wall extending substantially perpendicularly to the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, and a rear outer peripheral wall sloping forward with respect to the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a. And is extending. Further, the receiving projection 231e extends so that the outer peripheral walls on both the left and right sides are inclined so that the lower ends (tips) thereof are slightly closer to each other with respect to the vertical of the surface of the housing recess 231a. The shape of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e corresponds to the shape of the inner peripheral wall of the tubular receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230. In the assembled state, the receiving protrusion 231e has a lower end inserted into the through hole 230a of the mounting base 231, and a slight gap is formed between the receiving protrusion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c.

  The front surface of the upper plate front decoration member 234 is exposed to the outside in a state where the plate unit 200 is assembled. The upper plate post-decoration substrate 235 includes a plurality of decorative LEDs 235a for making the post-upper plate decorating member 236 emit light and a plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b for making the linear light-emitting lens member 237 emit light. .

  The linear light-emitting lens member 237 is formed to be longer on the left and right than the upper plate post-decoration member 236. And a linear light emitting portion 237b in a flat plate shape which is continuous with and is fitted into the cutout portion 231h of the unit case 231. In the linear light emitting lens member 237, the linear light emitting portion 237b is fitted into the cutout portion 231h of the unit case 231, so that the front surface of the linear light emitting portion 237a forms a part of the inner peripheral wall of the housing recess 231a. Further, in the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is exposed to the outside in the state where the dish unit 200 is assembled. The linear light emitting lens member 237 can receive the light from the peripheral LED 235b at the light receiving portion 237a, and guides the light received at the light receiving portion 237a to the linear light emitting portion 237b to guide the light from the linear light emitting portion 237b. The entire top can be illuminated (linearly).

  The upper bowl ball removing button 239 is provided with a button attachment member 238 so as to be slidable up and down, and includes an extension piece 239a extending downward from the button attachment member 238. By pressing the upper plate ball removing button 239 downward, the upper plate ball removing unit 310 is operated to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 from the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202 (pull out. )be able to.

  The mounting base unit 220A can elastically support the touch unit 220B by the dampers 222 inserted in the four lateral support pins 231b and the two front support pins 231c, respectively. In addition, the outer peripheral surfaces of the two receiving projections 231e projecting downward of the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is attached, and the mounting base 230 in which the lower end of the receiving projection 231e is inserted below the unit case 231. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion. As a result, when a force (impact) such that the unit case 231 moves downward from the touch unit 220B side is applied, the force is not immediately transmitted to the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, and the unit case 231 is stored. The bottom surface of the recess 231a is bent downward to some extent, and the outer peripheral surface of the lower end of the receiving projection 231e abuts the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, so that the force is transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. That is, when the force is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, the unit case 231 bends, so that the force can be attenuated to some extent by the bending and transmitted to the mounting base 230.

  Further, the receiving protrusion 231e of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230 have an outer peripheral surface and an inner peripheral surface that are inclined with respect to the surface on which they are formed (the surface parallel to the upper surface of the touch unit 220B). Since the surface is provided, part of the force transmitted from the receiving projection 231e to the tubular receiving portion 230c acts in the direction along the bottom surface of the attachment-side receiving portion 230a provided with the tubular receiving portion 230c. To do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the force from the receiving projection 231e (unit case 231) side from being dispersed, and to prevent a large force from acting on the mounting base 230 in one direction, so that the mounting base 230 is less likely to be damaged. .

  As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-shaped lower case 240 having an open upper side, an upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 mounted in the lower case 240 from the upper side, Inside the lower case 240, a pair of vibrating devices 242 disposed on the left and right sides of the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and a pair of vibrating devices 242 and the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 are covered and attached to the lower case 240. Of the shallow box-shaped base member 243, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 which is inserted from the upper side into the base member 243 and is capable of displaying an image controlled by the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241. A frame-shaped ground metal fitting 245 made of a thin metal plate that covers the outer circumference, and a transparent touch panel that covers the ground metal fitting 245 and the upper surface of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. And 246, and a frame-shaped upper cover 247 which is attached to the lower case 240, a through covering the base member 243 of the outer periphery of the touch panel 246 from the upper side.

  In addition, the touch unit 220B extends vertically from the lower end of the lower case 240 to the upper end of the upper cover 247 at the rear end surface of the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247 in an assembled state. A waterproof sheet-like waterproof seal 248, which extends over the entire left and right sides of the rear end surface of the case 240 and the like and is attached to the rear end surface of the lower case 240, the base member 243 and the upper cover 247, is provided. ing.

  The outer shape of the lower case 240 corresponds to the inner shape of the housing recess 213a of the unit case 231, and is formed so as to be housed in the housing recess 213a. The lower case 240 has a rectangular board mounting portion 240a extending left and right, a flat plate-shaped projecting portion 240b projecting in a trapezoidal shape from each of the left and right sides of the board mounting portion 240a, and each projecting portion 240b having an outer diameter of the damper 222. And a pair of damper mounting recesses 240c which are vertically penetrated in the same inner shape and partially open to the outside in the left-right direction and are spaced apart in the front-rear direction, and protrude from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c. And a vibrating device mounting part 240e to which the vibrating device 242 is mounted, which is disposed near the board mounting part 240a between the pair of damper mounting recesses 240c in the projecting part 240b.

  The damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 is formed in a C shape in a plan view, and the damper 222 can be inserted from the side where the C shape is open. In addition, the flange portion 240d is provided substantially at the upper and lower centers of the damper mounting recess 240c and over the entire circumference of the C-shaped inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c. The flange portion 240d can be inserted into the groove 222a of the damper 222.

  The vibration device 242 includes a small vibration drive motor 242a and a weight 242b attached to the rotation shaft of the vibration drive motor 242a with its center of gravity eccentric. The vibrating device 242 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 242b by the vibrating drive motor 242a.

  The base member 243 includes a liquid crystal mounting recess 243a formed in a shallow box shape in which the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is inserted from the upper side, and extending parts 243b extending outward from both left and right sides of the liquid crystal mounting recess 243a. A threaded hole 243c is formed at the lower end of the threaded hole 243c, the threaded hole 243c penetrating vertically at a position corresponding to the damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 at the tip of the extending portion 243b, and the upper side of which has a large spot facing. And a C-chamfered taper portion 243d (see FIG. 32) whose diameter increases toward the lower end of the cage.

  The inner diameter of the lower side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 can pass through the tip end side of the taper portion 231i of the lateral support pin 231b in the unit case 231, and the base end side (lower side) of the taper portion 231i. It is formed so that it cannot pass through.

  The touch panel 246 includes a tempered glass that is resistant to impact and is hard to break, a transparent capacitive sensor sheet provided on the upper surface of the tempered glass, and a frame-shaped protective cover that covers the tempered glass and the outer periphery of the sensor sheet. ing.

  In the touch unit 220B, the damper 222 can be attached by inserting the damper 222 from the C-shaped open side into the damper attachment recesses 240c provided in pairs on the left and right sides of the lower case 240. At this time, the flange portion 240d protruding from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c is inserted into the groove 222a of the damper 222. As a result, the damper 222 in the damper mounting recess 240c is restricted from moving in the axial direction. When the damper 222 is mounted in the damper mounting recess 240c, the upper end of the damper 222 contacts the lower surface of the extending portion 243b of the base member 243, and the lower end of the damper 222 moves downward from the lower end (lower surface) of the lower case 240. Project.

  Further, in the touch unit 220B, the vibration driving motors 242a of the pair of vibration devices 242 are sandwiched between the lower case 240 and the base member 243. The pair of vibrating devices 242 can independently generate vibration.

  In addition, the touch unit 220B can visually recognize the image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 from the upper side through the touch panel 246. Then, an image such as a button is displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the player can operate the button of the image by touching the touch panel 246 like operating the button of the image.

  Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B has a water-proof seal 248 attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side, when a liquid such as a drink is spilled on the dish unit 200, the liquid does not enter the touch unit 220B. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the touch unit 220B from being damaged by the infiltration of the liquid.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the button unit 220C of the effect operation unit 220 includes a cylindrical unit main body 250 attached to the button unit attachment portion 231g of the unit case 231 of the attachment base unit 220A, and a lower portion of the unit main body 250. The effect button decoration board 251 arranged on the side and provided with LEDs on the upper surface, and the board cover 252 that covers the lower side of the effect button decoration board 251 and is attached to the lower side of the unit main body 250 are provided.

  Further, the button unit 220C is arranged between the button base 253 and the unit body 250, and has a cylindrical button base 253 that is slidably inserted into the unit body 250 from the upper side to the upper side. A biasing spring member 254, a light guide member 255 that is inserted into the button base 253 and that can guide light from the LED of the effect button decoration substrate 251 upward, and a plurality of minute members arranged above the light guide member 255. Sheet-shaped diffusing lens member 256 provided with a prism, a translucent upper plate effect button 257 that covers the upper side of the diffusing lens member 256 and is attached to the button base 253, and is attached to the upper surface of the effect button decoration substrate 251. And a production button pressing sensor 258 for detecting the movement of the button base 253 to the descending end.

  The unit main body 250 has three mounting pieces 250a extending outward from the lower end of the outer peripheral surface and attached to the button unit mounting portion 231g, and a flange-shaped shelf 250b extending inward from the lower end of the inner peripheral surface. , And a pair of through holes 250c penetrating the shelf 250b along the inner peripheral surface.

  The button base 253 includes a tubular lower tubular portion 253a inserted into the inner periphery of the shelf 250b, a conical tubular upper tubular portion 253b whose diameter increases from the upper end of the lower tubular portion 253a upward, A claw that extends downward from the upper end of the tubular portion 253b and has a lower end that can penetrate the through hole 250c of the unit body 250 and that projects outward from the lower end and that can engage (contact) with the lower surface of the unit body 250. And a pair of engaging claw portions 253c, which are radially outwardly shorter than the outer diameter of the upper end from the outer peripheral surface of the upper cylindrical portion 253b, and the lower end of which can abut the upper surface of the shelf portion 250b of the unit main body 250. A plurality of flat plate-shaped contact pieces 253d and a detection piece 253e that extends outward from the outer peripheral surfaces of the lower cylinder portion 253a and the upper cylinder portion 253b in a flat plate shape and is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258 are provided. There.

  The spring member 254 is a coil spring as illustrated. The lower end of the spring member 254 is in contact with the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit body 250, and the upper end is supported by the plurality of contact pieces 253d of the button base 253.

  The light guide member 255 extends from a lower surface of the body 255a to a lower end of the lower cylinder 253a of the button base 253, and a disc-shaped body 255a fitted on the upper cylinder 253b of the button base 253. And a plurality of cylindrical light guides 255b. The plurality of light guide portions 255b are provided so as to correspond to the LEDs of the effect button decoration substrate 251, and light from the LEDs can be guided and emitted from the entire upper surface of the main body portion 255a.

  In this button unit 220C, a button base 253, a light guide member 255, a diffusion lens member 256, and an upper plate effect button body are integrally assembled, and they can slide up and down in the unit body 250 together. it can. In these button bases 253 and the like, the upper surface of the upper plate effect button 257 projects upward from the upper end of the unit main body 250 by the biasing force of the spring member 254, and the pair of engaging claw portions 253c of the button base 253 has the unit main body. By engaging with the lower surface of 250, further upward movement is restricted, and the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are in a state of being located at the upper end.

  When the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring member 254, the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are lowered, and the detection piece 253e of the button base 253 is detected by the effect button press sensor 258, and The pressing operation of the dish effect button 257 is detected. When the button base 253 is lowered by pressing the upper plate effect button 257, the lower ends of the plurality of contact pieces 253d of the button base 253 come into contact with the upper surface of the shelf portion 250b of the unit main body 250, and further lowering is restricted. The upper plate effect button 257 and the like are positioned at the lower end.

  Further, the button unit 220C can make the upper plate effect button 257 emit light by making the LED of the effect button decoration substrate 251 emit light. The LED of the effect button decoration substrate 251 is a full-color LED, and the upper plate effect button 257 can be illuminated and decorated in various colors.

  As shown in FIG. 32, in the effect operation unit 220 of the present embodiment, in the assembled state, the lower end of the damper 222 attached to the damper attaching recess 240c of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B is lower than the lower surface of the lower case 240. Since it also projects downward, a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A and the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B. Further, the tip surfaces (upper end surfaces) of the four horizontal support pins 231b of the unit case 231 coincide with the bottom surface of the counterbore of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243, and are located above the touch unit 220B with respect to the horizontal support pins 231b. Movement is restricted by a flat washer on the head of a screw 227 screwed into the upper end of the lateral support pin 231b. Further, the tapered portion 231i formed on the upper end side of the lateral support pin 231b and the tapered portion 243d formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 are separated from each other.

  In addition, in the effect operation unit 220, as shown in FIG. 33, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted in the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 is slightly smaller than the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a on the side of the horizontal support pin 231b. It projects upwards. Further, since a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted in the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the damper 222 are A gap is also formed between the lower surface of the case 240 and the case 240. A gap is also formed between the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231d of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240. That is, the touch unit 220B is attached to the attachment base unit 220A with its lower surface floating in the air by the dampers 222 inserted into the left and right lateral support pins 231b.

  Further, the effect operation unit 220 is narrowed downward in the unit case 231 in which the touch unit 220B is mounted from the upper side in the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base unit 220A which is narrowed downward in the mounting base 230. The lower end of the round pyramid-shaped receiving projection 231e is inserted. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c and the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e. As a result, in a normal state, only the vicinity of the outer periphery of the unit case 231 is attached to the attachment base 230 with the inside of the unit case 231 (the central side of the housing recess 231a) floating in the air.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 21 and the like, in the effect operation unit 220, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 is linear (along the rear side near the game area 5a in the touch unit 220B). It is exposed in a strip). The length of the upper end of the linear light emitting unit 237b is about 2/3 of the length of the rear side of the touch unit 220B. The upper plate rear decorative member 236 is arranged on the rear side of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b exposed along the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Further, an upper plate ball removal button 239 is arranged on the right side of the upper plate rear decorative member 236 in front view. Further, a button unit 220C is arranged on the left side of the touch unit 220B when viewed from the front.

  The effect operation unit 220 can present various effects to the player according to the game state that changes by hitting a game ball in the game area 5a. For example, by displaying an image on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, the image (effect image) can be presented to the player through the transparent touch panel 246 to entertain the player.

  As an image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, an image imitating an operation button is displayed, and the touch detection by the sensor sheet 246b of the touch panel 246 can be accepted, so that the player can see the image. The operation buttons can be operated, and the effect using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed. The image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 at the time of presentation using the touch panel 246 is not limited to the operation button, and various images can be displayed.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 220, since the touch unit 220B is supported by the plurality of dampers 222 in a state of being floated from the unit case 231, the touch unit 220B is operated by operating the vibrating device 242 according to the gaming state. Can be vibrated. By vibrating the touch panel 246 (touch unit 220B) by the vibrating device 242 at the time of presentation using the touch panel 246, the vibration of the vibrating device 242 is applied to the finger or hand of the player contacting the touch panel 246. By transmitting it, the player can be surprised by the illusion that he / she is operating an actual operation button despite operating the image operation button. It is possible to prevent the player from entertaining and deteriorating the interest.

  Further, in the production operation unit 220, since the button unit 220C is provided on the left side of the touch unit 220B when viewed from the front, the player is made to press the upper plate production button 257 in accordance with the game state, and the upper plate production button 257 is operated. You can entertain the operation. More specifically, since the image operation buttons on the touch panel 246 only touch the touch panel 246, there is a dislike that they lack a sense of operation as compared to the actual operation buttons, but the upper plate effect button 257 should be actually pressed. Therefore, it is possible to comfortably entertain the operation of the upper plate production button 257 without giving an uncomfortable feeling to the operation of the upper plate production button 257, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. .

  This effect operation unit 220 is arranged in a region where the upper plate 201 is provided in the plate unit 200 that bulges forward, so that the game can be performed even during the effect using the touch unit 220B or the button unit 220C. There is a possibility that a person may hit the touch unit 220B or the like from above. On the other hand, in the effect operation unit 220, since the touch unit 220B is supported by the damper 222 in a state of being floated from the lower unit case 231, the elasticity of the damper 222 does not change even if the touch unit 220B is hit from above. The force can absorb the impact to some extent. More specifically, when the touch unit 220B is hit or a shock (load) acts from above, the left and right lateral support pins 231b are transmitted to the inserted damper 222, and the touch unit 220B descends while the damper 222 is descended. Is compressed. The damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b is compressed, so that the shock from the touch unit 220B is absorbed.

  Then, when the touch unit 220B further descends due to an impact, the lower surface of the lower case 240 abuts on the upper end of the damper 222 into which the front support pin 231c is inserted, and as the touch unit 220B descends, the front support pin 231c is moved. The supported damper 222 is compressed downward. As a result, the shock from the touch unit 220B is absorbed not only by the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b but also by the damper 222 supported by the front support pin 231c.

  When the touch unit 220B further descends due to the impact acting on the touch unit 220B, the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B comes into contact with the bottom surfaces on the left and right sides of the housing recess 231a in the unit case 231 and the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231d. As a result, the impact from the touch unit 220B directly acts on the unit case 231 from the touch unit 220B without passing through the plurality of dampers 222.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B descends, the load from the central support protrusion 231d causes the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 to bend so that its center moves downward. The impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the elastic force due to the bending of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a. By bending the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, the pair of receiving projections 231e projecting downward from the lower side of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a descend. Then, when the receiving projection 231e further descends due to the impact from the touch unit 220B, the lower end side of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e contacts the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230, and the The shock is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230.

  Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving portion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the tubular receiving portion 230c are formed in the shape of a pyramid that is narrowed downward, from the receiving portion 231e to the tubular receiving portion 230c (on the mounting base 230 side). The transmitted load is distributed and transmitted in the direction along the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 and in the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface. As described above, since the structure that absorbs the shock applied to the touch unit 220B to the mounting base 230 is arranged in multiple layers, the shock applied to the touch unit 220B is sufficiently absorbed. The touch unit 220B, the unit case 231, the mounting base 230, and the like are less likely to be damaged by the impact.

  Further, the effect operation unit 220, the linear light emitting portion of the linear light emitting lens member 237 extending along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B by the peripheral edge LED 235b of the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 according to the game state. The upper end of 237b can be made to emit light linearly. As a result, the player's interest can be attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 in the touch unit 220B, the touch effect using the touch panel 246, and the like are enjoyed, and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, depending on the gaming state, the decoration LED 235a of the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 emits light to the upper plate rear decoration member 236 arranged on the rear side of the touch unit 220B (the rear side of the linear light emitting portion 237b). Can be made. By illuminating and decorating the decorative member 236 after the upper plate, the player's interest is attracted to the effect operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B, like the light emission of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the effect presented by the effect operation unit 220 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the touch unit 220B provided with the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is mounted on the plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 and the unit case 231 of the plate unit cover 260, which will be described later. Of the touch unit 220B, and a waterproof seal 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Accordingly, in the upper plate 201, even if the water (water droplets) condensed on the surface of the upper plate body 212 or the game ball by touching the outside air flows to the lower side of the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262). It is possible to prevent dew condensation water from entering the touch unit 220B, and prevent troubles in the touch unit 220B.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 33, since the upper plate post-decoration substrate 235 for emitting and decorating the upper plate post-decoration member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201, The upper plate 201 is not exposed to water droplets that have condensed, and it is possible to prevent problems such as a short circuit and corrosion from occurring in the upper plate rear decorative substrate 235.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 to 20, the dish unit cover 260 of the dish unit 200 extends in the left-right direction, and the center of the left-right direction bulges forward, and is formed in a shell shape opened rearward. . The plate unit cover 260 has a lower plate opening 261 that is open to the front at substantially the center of the left and right and has a rear end closed by the plate unit base 210, and the top plate side (upper side) of the inner peripheral wall of the lower plate opening 261. Is formed on the left side of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 that covers the lower side of the upper plate main body 212 and the effect operation unit 220, and the lower plate opening 261 in front view, and the bass sound of the speaker unit 920 of the main body frame 4 is formed. A speaker grill 263 for transmitting sound from the speaker, a plate unit left decorative member 264 arranged above the speaker grill 263 and light-emitted by the plate unit left decorative substrate 345, and arranged on the right side of the lower plate opening 261 in front view. By forming a handle port 265 through which the rear part of the handle body 502 of the handle unit 500 passes and a bottom surface of the dish unit cover 260, A bottom plate portion 266 for covering the lower Rishitasara body 214, and a, a bottom plate opening 267 is closed by the lower tray ball vent unit 320 penetrates the bottom plate portion 266 on the upper and lower left and right of the center.

  The bottom plate opening 261 is closed by the bottom plate body 214 on the bottom plate side (lower side) of the inner peripheral wall. The speaker grill 263 and the dish unit left decorative member 264 are made of punching metal in which a plurality of holes are provided in a metal plate.

  The dish unit cover 260 has a smooth surface on the left side when viewed from the front, whereas it has a rugged surface on the right side. In addition, the right side of the front view has translucency almost entirely.

  The plate unit cover 260 is formed in a state where it can be gripped with one hand between the upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 when assembled in the plate unit 200. Thereby, when the player touches the touch unit 220B, by grasping the upper side of the lower plate opening 261, it is possible to stabilize the finger (hand or arm) to be touched, and the touch operation of the touch unit 220B. Can be done easily.

  More specifically, in the assembled state, the thickness between the front end upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper plate lower cover portion 262 is about 25 mm, and the rear end upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the upper plate lower cover portion 262 are reduced. The thickness between the lower surface and the lower surface is about 50 mm, and the front-rear distance from the front end of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 to the rear end of the touch unit 220B is about 60 mm. Further, the upper surface of the touch unit 220B is inclined about 20 degrees with respect to the horizontal. This allows the player's hand to grasp between the upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 to 42, the lower right door effect unit 270 of the dish unit 200 is arranged on the upper side of the handle unit 500 and on the right side of the effect operation unit 220, and rotates according to the game state. It is provided with a spherical lower right rotating body 270A for light emission decoration. The lower right door effect unit 270 is attached to the unit base 271 and a unit base 271 that is attached so as to close the escape port 210g on the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and rotatably supports the lower right door rotator 270A. A door lower right drive motor 272, a drive gear 273 fixed to a rotation shaft of the door lower right drive motor 272, a driven gear 274 meshed with the drive gear 273 and attached to the door lower right rotation body 270A, and a driven gear A shaft member 275 that rotatably supports the gear 274 and is attached to the unit base 271.

  Further, the door lower right effect unit 270 is attached to the opposite side of the door lower right rotating body 270A from the driven gear 274, and the rotor side bearing member 276 rotatably supported by the unit base 271 and the door lower right side. A base side bearing member 277 that rotatably supports the rotator 270A on the side opposite to the driven gear 274 in cooperation with the unit base 271, and the rotation of the door lower right rotator 270A attached to the unit base 271. Two rotation detection sensors 278 capable of detecting a position, a decorative member 279 attached to the unit base 271 on the front left side of the lower right door 270A of the door, and a rear member attached to the front side of the unit base 271. A door lower right base decorative board 280 equipped with a plurality of LEDs, and a door lower right drive motor 272 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 271, A detection sensor 278, a door lower right base decorative board 280, and a door lower right relay board 281 that relays the connection between a door lower right rotating body decorative board 291 and a peripheral control board (not shown) described later are provided. .

  The lower right door 270A of the door constitutes an outer shell, and is disposed between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286, each of which has a hemispherical shell shape, and the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. And a rotating body internal unit 290. The front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are each formed with semicircular cutouts 285a, 286a around the rotation axis. The front outer shell member 285 has a band-shaped decoration 285b that has a metallic luster and extends in a band shape in the circumferential direction on a translucent hemispherical shell-shaped surface, and a heart shape that is arranged in the center of the band decoration 285b. Heart decoration 285c. On the other hand, the rear outer shell member 286 is provided with a band decoration 286b which has a metallic luster and extends in a band shape in the circumferential direction on the surface of a translucent hemispherical shell. When the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are combined, the band decoration 285b of the front outer shell member 285 and the band decoration 286b of the rear outer shell member 286 are formed so as to be connected.

  As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the rotating body internal unit 290 is a disk-shaped lower door right rotating body decoration substrate 291 provided with a plurality of LEDs on both sides, and a center of the lower door right rotating body decoration substrate 291. The first fixed shaft member 292 and the cylindrical first fixed shaft member 292 which are attached to the right lower rotary body decoration substrate 291 and which extend perpendicularly to the surface of the door and whose front end is attached to the shaft member 275. A cylindrical shape that is attached to the opposite side of the lower right door rotating body decoration substrate 291 and extends perpendicularly to the surface of the lower right door rotating body decoration substrate 291 and has its tip attached to the unit base 271 and the base side bearing member 277. And the second fixed shaft member 293. Although illustration is omitted, a wiring cord that connects the lower right door relay board 281 and the lower right door rotary body decoration board 291 is inserted into the second fixed shaft member 293.

  Further, the rotary body internal unit 290 is arranged on both sides of the door lower right rotary body decoration substrate 291 and is attached to the insides of the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286, and is a flat plate-shaped and transparent reflector base 294. The first reflector 295, which is attached to the reflector base 294 and has an annular shape and opens outward in the axial direction, and the first reflector 295, which is attached to the reflector base 294 through the inside of the ring, has a hexagonal shape at the center. And a second reflector 296 having a through hole 296a. The first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plating layer having metallic luster on their surfaces, and can reflect the light from the lower right door rotating body decorative substrate 291. In addition, the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plurality of radially extending flat plate-shaped ribs.

  In this rotary body internal unit 290, a door lower right rotary body decoration substrate 291, a first fixed shaft member 292, and a second fixed shaft member 293, a reflector base 294, a first reflector 295, and a second reflector 296, Separated from each other for relative rotation.

  The unit base 271 is in the form of a flat plate from the annular right-hand side rotating body 270A on the rear side of the ring-shaped ring 271a and the center of the ring portion 271a on the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a to the front from a portion obliquely upper right in a front view. Of the first projecting piece 271b, the second projecting piece 271c projecting forward in a flat plate shape from a portion of the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a opposite to the first projecting piece 271b, and the second projecting piece 271c. And a bearing groove 271d into which a U-shaped recess is formed rearward from the front end and into which the tip of the second fixed shaft member 293 is inserted.

  The door lower right drive motor 272 is attached to the outer side surface (right side surface) of the first projecting piece 271b in a state where the rotation shaft penetrates. The driven gear 274 is formed to have a larger diameter than the driving gear 273. The shaft member 275 includes a mounting portion 275a mounted on the front end of the first projecting piece 271b, and a tubular shaft portion 275b projecting in a tubular shape from the mounting portion 275a. The shaft member 275 can rotatably support the driven gear 274 by the outer circumference of the tubular shaft portion 275b, and can non-rotatably support the tip of the first fixed shaft member 292 by the inner circumference of the tubular shaft portion 275b.

  The rotating body side bearing member 276 includes a bearing hole 276a into which the second fixed shaft member 293 is rotatably inserted, and a flat plate-shaped detection piece 276b extending outward. The base side bearing member 277 is attached to the front end of the second projecting piece 271c so as to close the open front end side of the U-shaped bearing groove 271d at the front end of the second projecting piece 271c in the unit base 271. The two rotation detection sensors 278 are symmetrically attached to the second protruding piece 271c with the rotation axis of the lower right door 270A in between. The two rotation detection sensors 275 include a rotation position in which the heart decoration 285c of the lower right door 270A faces forward (see FIG. 42 (a)) and a rotation position in which the heart decoration 285c faces rear (FIG. 42 (b)). And) can be detected respectively.

  The lower right door production unit 270 of the present embodiment can rotate the lower right door rotating body 270A by the lower right door driving motor 272 according to the game state, and stops so that the heart decoration 285c faces forward. Whether or not a chance is coming can be suggested to the player depending on whether or not it is possible to suppress the entertaining and deteriorating the interest of the player.

  Further, in the lower right door production unit 270, since the lower right door rotating body decoration substrate 291 inside the lower right door rotating body 270A is non-rotatably attached, the right door rotating body 270A is rotated while the lower right door rotating body 270A is rotating. When the lower rotating body decoration substrate 291 (the LED thereof) is caused to emit light, the position of the light emitted from the lower door right rotating body decoration substrate 291 moves as the door lower right rotating body 270A rotates, and the first reflector 295 and Since the direction of the light reflected and guided by the two reflectors 296 changes, even if the LED of the lower right door rotating body decoration substrate 291 does not blink, the lower right door rotating body 270A emits light as if the light was blinking. By irradiating light of various colors from the LEDs, the lower right door 270A of the door can be made to emit light in a rainbow color, which can entertain the player.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the rendering unit cover 300 of the dish unit 200 has a hemispherical transparent rotating body cover portion 301 that covers the front side of the spherical lower door right rotating body 270A in the lower right door producing unit 270. The decorative portion 302 formed on the outer periphery of the rotating body cover portion 301 and continuous with the decoration on the right side of the dish unit cover 260 in front view, and the decorative portion 302 on the lower right side of the rotating body cover portion 301, which penetrates in the front-rear direction, And a cylinder insertion port 303 through which the key cylinder 710 is inserted.

  The entire effect unit cover 300 is translucent in a container shape with an open rear. In the effect unit cover 300, the upper side of the rotating body cover section 301 is light-emitted and decorated by the lower right door base decorative substrate 280 of the lower right door effect unit 270, and the lower side of the rotating body cover section 301 is a dish unit right decorative board 346. It is decorated with light.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, the upper dish ball removing unit 310 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210 so as to cover the through hole 210e and the receiving piece 210f of the dish unit base 210 from the front side, and the rear side. A cover 311 having an opening 311a through which the extension piece 239a of the upper dish ball removal button 239 can be inserted, and a through hole 210e of the dish unit base 210 in the cover 311. A front base member 312 mounted at a position that is located at the upper left of the front view, a pressure transmission member 313 rotatably supported by the front base member 312, and rotated by pressing the upper bowl ball removing button 239, and a pressure transmission member. A first spring member 314 for urging the upper plate ball removing button 239 in the upward direction.

  Further, the upper dish ball removing unit 310 includes a rear base member 315 attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 210 so as to close the upper dish ball feed port 210d of the dish unit base 210 from the rear side, and a rear base member. 315 and the dish unit base 210, and is mounted by the rear base member 315 so as to be able to move up and down. And a second spring member 317 that biases the slider 316 upward.

  The front base member 312 extends in parallel to the front surface of the dish unit base 210, and has a flat plate-shaped base portion 312a that is attached to the cover 311, and a pair of extension portions that extend in a flat plate shape from both left and right sides of the base portion 312a. The projecting piece 312b, the shaft supporting part 312c which is recessed rearward from the front end of the extending part 312b in a U shape, and the bottom end of the front surface of the base part 312a are provided near the rear end of the first spring member 314. And a hook-shaped spring locking portion (not shown).

  The pressing force transmission member 313 has a horizontally elongated cylindrical shaft portion 313a, both ends of which are rotatably inserted into the pair of shaft supporting portions 312c of the front base member 312, and a rearward extending plate portion extending rearward from the shaft portion 313a. An upward extending piece 313c that extends upward in a flat plate shape from the vicinity of the left end in front view on the upper surface of the extending piece 313b and the rearward extending piece 313b, and the lower end of the extending piece 239c of the upper dish ball pulling button 239 can abut. A downwardly extending piece 313d extending downward from the right end in front view on the lower surface of the rearwardly extending piece 313b, and a first spring protruding downward from below the left end in front view in the shaft portion 313a. A hook-shaped spring locking portion 313e to which the front end of the member 314 is locked. The downward extension piece 313d is formed in a triangular shape that extends downward as it extends rearward, and the lower end thereof is capable of contacting the upper dish ball removing slider 316.

  The rear base member 315 extends in a flat plate shape in parallel with the rear surface of the dish unit base 210 and is provided with a base portion 315a attached to the dish unit base 210 and the front plate of the base portion 315a so as to be laterally separated from each other. The slider support portion 315b slidably supporting both left and right ends of the ball removing slider 316, and the front end is opened at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the upper dish ball feed port 210d of the dish unit base 210 at the upper end of the base portion 315a. It is provided with an upper entrance 315c which opens downward on the rear side of the base portion 315a and through which game balls can flow.

  In addition, the rear base member 315 extends downward from the rear side of the base portion 315a continuously with the upper inlet 315c, is opened rearward, and has a lower end curved rearward, and a first guide path 315d. An L-shaped second guide path 315e that extends downward from the lower side of the first guide path 315d, then extends leftward in front view, has its left end open to the left, and is open rearward in its entirety; A plate-shaped passage cover 315f that closes the rear end side of the guide path 315e that extends to the left, and the base portion 315a in the front and rear direction so that two sides are surrounded by the L-shaped second guide path 315e. An opening 315g penetrating therethrough and a spring locking portion 315h protruding forward from the front surface of the base portion 315a in a boss shape and to which the upper end of the second spring member 317 is locked are provided.

  The L-shaped second guide path 315e in the rear base member 315 is inclined such that the portion extending leftward becomes lower as it goes leftward. As shown in FIG. 43 (b), the left end of the second guide path 315e is inserted into the cutout portion 210j of the cylindrical lower plate ball supply port 210c of the plate unit base 210, and is connected to the second guide path 315e. The lower dish ball supply port 210c communicates with each other.

  The upper dish ball removing slider 316 has a flat plate shape, and a left and right ends thereof are slidably supported by slider supporting portions 315b of the rear base member 315, and a plate at the upper end of the slider base 316a from the center to the front in the front view. The transmission piece 316b, which extends through the through hole 210e of the unit base 210 to the upper side of the receiving piece 210f and can contact the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d of the pressing transmission member 313, and the slider below the transmission piece 316b. A triangular operation transmitting portion 316c that projects rearward from the rear side of the base 316a and a hook-shaped spring member that projects from the front surface of the slider base 316a and locks the lower end of the second spring member 317. And a stop 316d.

  In the upper dish ball removing unit 310, the upper entrance 315c of the rear base member 315 is opened at the lower end on the right end side of the guide passage portion 212a of the upper plate body 212 in the front view when the dish unit 200 is assembled. Thereby, the game ball in the upper plate 201 can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 540 from the upper entrance 315c through the first guide path 315d on the rear side of the base portion 315a.

  In addition, when the upper dish ball pulling-out button 239 is pressed downward, the upper plate ball punching unit 310 causes the pressing transmission member 313 to resist the urging force of the first spring member 314 by the extending piece 239a of the upper plate ball punching button 239. Then, the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d rotates about the shaft portion 313a in a direction of moving downward. When the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d moves downward with the rotation of the pressure transmitting member 313, the upper dish ball is removed by the transmitting piece 316b of the upper dish ball removing slider 316 with which the lower end of the lower extending piece 313d is in contact. The slider 316 slides downward against the biasing force of the second spring member 317.

  When the upper bowl ball removing slider 316 slides downward, the operation transmitting portion 316c operates the switching mechanism of the ball feeding unit 540 to switch the flow path in the ball feeding unit 540, and the first guide path. The 315d side is in communication with the second taxiway 315e side. Thereby, the game ball in the upper plate 201 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 210c to the lower plate 202 through the upper entrance 315c, the first guide path 315d, the ball feeding unit 540, and the second guide path 315e. The game ball in the upper plate 201 can be pulled out.

  When the downward pressing of the upper bowl ball removal button 239 is released, the upper bowl ball removal slider 316 and the upper bowl ball removal button 239 are raised by the urging force of the first spring member 314 and the second spring member 317. You can return to the original state.

  As shown in FIG. 46 and the like, the lower dish ball removing unit 320 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the lower side of the lower dish body 214 so as to close the bottom plate opening 267 of the dish unit cover 260, and is a ball of the lower dish body 214. A flat plate-shaped lower dish ball removal base 321 having an opening 321a that coincides with the hole 214a, and a flat plate-shaped slide lid 322 capable of sliding left and right on the lower dish ball removal base 321 to close the opening 321a. And a knob 323 attached to the front end of the slide lid 322 and exposed to the outside from the front surface of the dish unit cover 260, and a spring urging the slide lid 322 in a direction of closing the opening 321a by the slide lid 322. A member 324 and a holding device 325 that holds the slide lid 322 against the biasing force of the spring member 324 at a position where the opening 321a is open. It is equipped with a.

  The opening 321a of the lower dish ball removing base 321 is formed at a position closer to the right side from the center in the left and right as viewed from the front. By attaching the lower dish ball removing base 321 to the lower dish body 214, the slide lid 322 can be slidably supported from side to side between the lower dish ball removing base 321 and the lower dish body 214. The slide lid 322 includes a holding protrusion 322a held by a holding device 325 on the left end side in front view.

  The holding device 325 includes a main body 325a attached to the lower dish ball removing base 321, and a pair of holding claws 325b that can open and close from the main body 325a and can hold the holding projection 322a. When the holding device 325 inserts the holding projection 322a between the pair of open holding claws 325b and presses the holding projection 322a toward the main body 325a, the pair of holding claws 325b closes to hold the holding projection 322a and holds the pair of holding claws 322a. The claw 325b is maintained in the closed state. In this state, when the holding projection 322a is moved to the main body 325a side, the pair of holding claws 325b is opened and the holding projection 322a is released.

  In the lower dish ball removal unit 320, the slide lid 322 is provided between the opening 321a and the ball removal hole 214a of the lower dish body 214 when the knob 323 (slide lid 322) is moved to the right when viewed from the front. The game ball in the lower plate 202 is located, and the game ball can be stored in the lower plate 202 without coming out downward from the ball removing hole 214a.

  From this state, by operating the knob 323 to the left, the slide lid 322 slides to the left, and the opening 321a and the ball hole 214a communicate with each other. As a result, the game ball in the lower plate 202 can be pulled out to the lower side of the plate unit 200 through the ball removing hole 214a and the opening 321a, and the game ball in the lower plate 202 can be pulled out. At this time, since the holding projections 322a of the slide lid 322 are held by the pair of holding claws 325b of the holding device 325, the slide lid 322 remains open even when the operation of the knob 323 is stopped, and the lower plate 202 You can continue to pull out the game ball inside.

  To close the slide lid 322, the knob 323 is slightly operated to the left to open the pair of holding claws 325b to release the holding projection 322a, and the slide lid 322 slides to the right due to the biasing force of the spring member 324. Then, the ball hole 214a is closed. In this way, by operating the picking portion 323 of the lower plate ball removing unit 320, it is possible to store the game balls in the lower plate 202 or remove the game balls stored in the lower plate 202.

  As shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, the ball lending operation unit 330 of the dish unit 200 is a translucent unit case 331 attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit 220 near the right end in front view, and a unit. A ball lending button 332 that is exposed on the upper surface of the case 331 and that can be operated by the player, and a return button 333 that is exposed on the upper surface of the unit case 331 behind the ball lending button 332 and that can be operated by the player. A display section 334 that is visible from the player side through the upper surface of the unit case 331 behind the return button 333 is provided.

  The ball lending operation unit 330 is a dish unit in which a predetermined number of game balls are pushed when a ball lending button 332 is pushed after inserting a cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to lend (pay out) to the upper plate 201 of 200, and when the return button 333 is pressed, the balance of the cash inserted and the prepaid card are returned after subtracting the remaining amount of the loan. Further, the display unit 334 displays cash or the number of prepaid cards left in the ball lending machine, an error code when the ball lending machine fails, or the like.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the upper plate top decoration member 340 of the plate unit 200 is a light-transmitting upper plate top lens attached to the center of the upper end of the plate unit base 210 in the left-right center and extending in the left and right bands. 340a, and an upper plate top decorative substrate 340b mounted on the lower side of the upper plate top lens 340a and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on its upper surface.

  The upper plate top decoration member 340 can cause the upper plate top lens 340a to emit light in a band shape by causing the LEDs of the upper plate top decoration substrate 340b to emit light. Since this upper plate top decoration member 340 is arranged on the rear side of the effect operation unit 220, similarly to the light emitting decoration such as the upper plate rear decoration member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper plate top decoration member 340 is provided. By illuminating and decorating 340, the player's interest can be attracted to the effect operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B, and the effect presented by the effect operation unit 220 can be enjoyed and a decrease in interest can be suppressed. be able to.

  The dish unit 200 of the present embodiment, the touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 having the upper dish 201 for storing the game balls on the lower side of the game region 5a, the game ball in the game region 5a. When an image is displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 according to the game state that changes by hitting, a strip shape is formed along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 near the game area 5a. Since the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper plate rear decoration member 236, the upper plate top decoration member 340, etc. can be made to emit light, even if the player's line of sight is concentrated in the game area 5a, the line of sight (field of view) The light of the linear light emitting lens member 237 entering from the outside of the player can be noticed, and the line of sight (interest) of the player can be attracted to the linear light emitting lens member 237 etc., that is, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 side. Can. Therefore, in the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like is caused to emit light when presenting an effect such as an image in accordance with the game state, so that the player can use the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. It is possible to make the presentation of the presentation noticeable, and it is possible to entertain the presentation by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the plate unit 200 is provided with the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 capable of displaying an image according to the game state, when the image indicating the arrival of an opportunity is displayed, the plate unit 200 is arranged outside the game area 5a. Since the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 that is displayed indicates the arrival of a chance, the player plays the game in the game area 5a and the effect on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 outside the game area 5a. Both can be cared for. Therefore, by paying attention to the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a (the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244), a tight game with a sense of speed can be enjoyed, and the interest of the player is reduced. It is possible to prevent the player from moving to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 by causing the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like to emit light when displaying an image that suggests the arrival of a chance on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. It is possible to make the player pay attention, and to surely recognize the arrival of the opportunity to entertain the player. In this case, depending on the player, both the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a may cause the player to be unable to concentrate on either side, which may reduce the interest. Since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light in accordance with the arrival, it is possible to concentrate in the game area 5a until the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light, and entertain the game in the game area 5a. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the effect on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 when the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light, and it is possible to make the game clearer and less tiring.

  Further, since the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is provided in the plate unit 200 that bulges toward the player side below the game area 5a, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is arranged at a position close to the player. Become. This makes it easier for the player located in front of the pachinko machine 1 to hide the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and makes it difficult for the player to be able to see the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 next to or behind it. The effect presented by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed only by the player. Therefore, while enjoying the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and deteriorating by being watched by another player, and at the same time, the upper plate liquid crystal display device can be reduced. Since the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light when the effect is displayed by the 244, it is possible to make it difficult to overlook the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and entertain the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are made to emit light in a band shape, the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be made more conspicuous as compared with the case of emitting light in a dot shape, and the player Even if the consciousness of the above is concentrated in the game area 5a, the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily noticed, and the entertainment by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the touch panel 246, and the like can be entertained. It is possible to suppress the decrease. Further, since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light in a band shape, a light-emitting mode different from that of other light-emitting decorations and the like can be obtained, and it is possible to reduce erroneous recognition as light-emission of light-emitting decorations and the like. The light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be surely noticed.

  Further, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are arranged at a rear side position near the game area 5a on the outer peripheral edge of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, when the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light, The light from the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily made visible to the player, and the light emission from the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be noticed to enjoy the effect of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

  Moreover, the upper surface of the plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 and the like is provided with the effect operation unit 220 having the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and the like, and the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is driven into the game area 5a. Since the player turns his or her line of sight to check the amount of game balls to be inserted at a certain frequency, when the line of sight is turned to the upper plate 201, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light emitting lens member 237, etc. It is easy to enter the field of view, and it becomes easy to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237. Further, since the player turns his or her line of sight to the upper plate 201 with a certain frequency, it is easy to direct the line of sight from within the game area 5a to the upper plate 201 (upper plate liquid crystal display device 244). Therefore, when the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like is noticed, it is possible to immediately shift the line of sight to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and entertain the effect presented by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, thereby deteriorating the interest. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, when the production operation unit 220 is arranged on the lower side of the game area 5a and the light from the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like is irradiated to the player from the lower side, it is arranged on the upper side of the game area 5a. Compared with the above, it is possible to make it easier for the player to enter the eyes of the player and to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 etc. It is possible to entertain the effect by the operation unit 220 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the effect operation unit 220 (upper plate liquid crystal display device 244) is arranged at a position corresponding to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, the center of the player's line of sight is located at any position in the game area 5a. However, the light from the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily noticed, and the player can be surely focused on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect by the effect operation unit 220 can be enjoyed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the effect operation unit 220 is provided with the touch panel 246, it is possible to perform not only the effect by the image but also the effect of causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, and it is possible to entertain the player with various effects. By causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, the player can participate in the effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from actively entertaining the effect and deteriorating the interest.

  Further, the linear light emitting lens member 237 (the linear light emitting portion 237b) arranged along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B moves the game ball in the upper plate 201 to the ball feeding unit 540 (ball launching device 680). Along with the guide passage portion 212a for feeding, an upper dish ball removing button 239 for operating the upper dish ball removing unit 310 is arranged between the guide passage portion 212a and the guide passage portion 212a. That is, the linear light emitting lens member 237 is provided in the vicinity of the place where the player confirms the game ball necessary for the game, and the linear light emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position the player cares about even during the game. Therefore, the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 can be noticed, attracting the interest of the player to the touch unit 220B, and the effect by the touch unit 220B (effect image by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, touch panel 246). It is possible to make it easier to notice the timing of touch operation, etc.).

  Further, the touch unit 220B provided with the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is mounted on the upper plate lower cover portion 262 of the plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 of the mounting base unit 220A and the unit case 231. Since the waterproof seal 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B while being arranged at a higher position than the touch unit 220B, the upper plate body 212 and the surface of the game ball on the surface of the upper plate body 201 are exposed to the outside air. Even if the condensed water (water droplets) flows under the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262), it is possible to prevent the condensed water from entering the touch unit 220B, and thus the touch unit 220B. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems in.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 33, since the upper plate post-decoration substrate 235 for emitting and decorating the upper plate post-decoration member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201, The upper plate 201 is not exposed to water droplets that have condensed, and it is possible to prevent problems such as a short circuit and corrosion from occurring in the upper plate rear decorative substrate 235.

  Furthermore, when the touch unit 220B including the touch panel 246 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is vibrated by the vibrating device 242 in the effect operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200, a plurality (two) of touch units 220B are provided. Since the damper 222 is attached to the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A in a floating state, the vibration of the touch unit 220B (vibrating device 242) is absorbed and attenuated by the damper 222 and is transmitted to the mounting base unit 220A. This means that the vibration of the mounting base unit 220A can be reduced. Therefore, when the touch device 220B is vibrated by the vibration device 242 when the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B is touch-operated, only the touch unit 220B vibrates, so that the touch panel of the touch unit 220B is presented to the player. The operation feeling of 246 can be sufficiently given, and it is possible to prevent the player from delighting the touch operation of the touch panel 246 and deteriorating the interest.

  Moreover, since the touch unit 220B can be vibrated by the vibrating device 242, in addition to the operation feeling of the touch panel 246 to the player, the vibration of the touch unit 220B may surprise the player or suggest the timing of operating the touch panel 246. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the operation effect by the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the touch unit 220B is supported by the plurality of dampers 222 from the lower side, even if the touch unit 220B is hit or strongly pressed from the upper side and a shock or a load is applied to the touch unit 220B, the damper 222 is used. Since it is possible to absorb the impact and the like, it is possible to reduce the damage to the touch unit 220B, the mounting base unit 220A and the like due to the impact and the like, and the game is interrupted due to the damage of the touch unit 220B and the like. Thus, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being lowered.

  Further, since the touch panel 246 is used as the operation unit of the touch unit 220B, the touch panel 246 is touched for a longer time when the player operates it than when the button is pressed. When the vibration unit 242 vibrates the touch unit 220B when touching the 246, the vibration can be reliably transmitted to the player's finger (hand). Therefore, the player's finger can vibrate to make the player feel that he or she is operating the touch panel 246, so that a sufficient operation feeling can be given and the player can enjoy the operation of the touch panel 246. It is possible to prevent the interest from decreasing.

  Further, by changing the image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, the type of touch operation (button) can be easily changed, and it becomes possible to deal with various effects. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to reduce the interest of the player due to various effects. Further, since the touch unit 220B is provided with the touch panel 246, compared with the conventional push button, touch, tap (single tap, double tap), drag, flick, pinch (pinch out, pinch in), swipe, touch and touch. Various operations such as hold can be performed. As a result, more various operation effects can be performed, and it is possible to prevent the player from being entertained and from having less interest.

  Further, the touch unit 220B is attached to the attachment base unit 220A (unit case 231) so as not to move upward and to move downward, and the touch unit 220B can be moved by the elastic force (biasing force) of the plurality of dampers 222. Is pressed against the upper moving end, the touch unit 220B can be made difficult to move during the operation of the touch panel 246, and the touch panel 246 can be easily operated accurately. Further, since the touch unit 220B becomes difficult to move, it is possible to make the player think that the touch unit 220B does not move, and the touch unit 220B, which was thought not to move, is vibrated according to the game state. By vibrating by the device 242, the player can be surprised, and it is possible to suppress entertaining the player and deteriorating the interest.

  Further, since the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the plurality of vibrating devices 242 separated from each other, for example, by driving the vibrating device 242 at a position close to the part operated by the player on the touch panel 246, the vibrating device 242 is made strong. Vibration can be transmitted. Therefore, when the player operates a position different from the position to be operated on the touch panel 246, the vibration transmitted to the player is different, so that the player is informed of the wrong operation. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to perform a correct operation, and it is possible to prevent the operation effect using the touch panel 246 from being enjoyed and prevent the interest from being lowered.

  Further, since a plurality of vibration devices 242 separated from each other are provided, a resonance phenomenon is generated at an arbitrary position of the touch panel 246 by appropriately controlling the frequency and intensity of vibration of each vibration device 242. You can Therefore, by controlling the respective vibrating devices 242 so that the resonance phenomenon occurs at an arbitrary position operated by the player, it is possible to give a further operation feeling or to greatly surprise the player, It is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B is hit or strongly pressed from above and a shock or load is applied to the touch unit 220B, the left and right ends of the touch unit 220B are attached to the unit case 231 with the damper 222 interposed therebetween. Therefore, the damper 222 and the bending of the touch unit 220B can absorb (attenuate) an impact or the like from the upper side to some extent and transmit the impact to the unit case 231 side. Further, on the unit case 231 side, since the outer edge of the unit case 231 is attached to the lower mounting base 230, an impact or load from the touch unit 220B side via the unit case 231 is applied to the mounting base 230. Can be widely dispersed and transmitted. At this time, the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e protruding downward from the lower surface of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c into which the receiving projection 231e is inserted at the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230. Since the gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall and the inner peripheral wall, the receiving projection 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c come into contact with each other after the unit case 231 is bent downward due to the impact or load from the touch unit 220B. The shock or the like is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, and the shock or the like is further attenuated by the bending of the unit case 231 and is transmitted to the mounting base 230. Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the tubular receiving portion 230c are narrowed downward, when the receiving projection 231e and the tubular receiving portion 230c contact each other, the receiving projection 231e (unit case 231) is transmitted in an oblique direction to the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, and the impact and load from the side of the mounting base 230 are perpendicular to the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 and along the bottom surface As a result, the force in the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface (downward direction) that causes the mounting base 230 to bend becomes smaller and is transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is struck or strongly pressed from above, the impact and the like can be effectively attenuated by the plurality of dampers 222, the unit case 231, and the mounting base 230, and the touch unit 220B and It is possible to prevent the mounting base unit 220A from being damaged.

  According to the pachinko machine 1, since the touch panel 246 and the upper plate effect button 257 are provided on the upper surface of the plate unit cover 260 of the plate unit 200 that bulges forward under the game region 5a, the game is played in the game region 5a. The player is presented with an effect (operation effect) using the touch panel 246 and the upper plate effect button 257 according to the game state that changes by hitting a ball, and the player is in touch with the touch panel 246 and the upper plate effect button 257 during the effect. By operating, the player can be actively participated in the production, and it is possible to suppress the entertaining of the player and the decrease in interest. Then, the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper side of the lower plate opening 261 (upper plate lower covering part 262) in the plate unit cover 260 provided with the touch panel 246 are within a range of 15 mm to 50 mm that can be grasped by the player's hand. Since the thickness is set, when the player operates the touch panel 246, the player can operate the touch panel 246 while grasping between the touch panel 246 and the upper plate lower covering portion 262, and operates the touch panel 246 accurately. be able to.

  More specifically, since the thickness between the upper surface of the touch panel 246 and the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 is set within the range of 15 mm to 50 mm that can be grasped by hand, for example, a finger excluding the thumb is used. When the thumb is positioned above the touch panel 246 with the lower plate contacting the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262, the touch panel 246 is positioned within the moving range of the thumb, and the touch panel 246 can be operated with the thumb. Is possible. In this state, since the fingers excluding the thumb are in contact with the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262, it is possible to stabilize the thumb, and the thumb touches a desired position on the touch panel 246 or touches the touch panel 246. The finger can be moved in a desired direction, the operability of the touch panel 246 can be improved, and the touch panel 246 can be operated accurately. Further, when the thumb is brought into contact with the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262, the touch panel 246 can be operated by the other fingers, and the same effect as the above can be obtained. Therefore, since the touch panel 246 is easy to operate, it is possible to easily operate the touch panel 246 accurately when performing an effect using the touch panel 246, and entertaining the player by the effect produced by operating the touch panel 246. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

  Further, the touch panel 246 is provided within a range of 60 mm rearward from the front end of the plate unit cover 260, and is operated when the touch panel 246 and the upper plate lower covering portion 262 are gripped from the front end side to operate the touch panel 246. Since the touch panel 246 is arranged in a range within which the finger can reach, it is possible to operate the touch panel 246 in a state in which the finger is stable, and it is possible to entertain the effect using the touch panel 246 and prevent the player's interest from decreasing. can do.

  Furthermore, since the upper surface of the touch panel 246 is inclined so as to be higher from the front side toward the rear side, the surface of the touch panel 246 faces the player side, and the touch panel 246 is easy to see, and the player operates the touch panel 246. The property can be improved, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably exhibited.

  In addition, since the upper surface of the touch panel 246 becomes higher toward the rear side, the thickness between the touch panel 246 and the upper plate lower covering portion 262 becomes thicker toward the rear side, so that the plate unit 200 moves toward the rear side. The strength and rigidity of Therefore, even if the touch panel 246 is struck or strongly pressed from the upper side, the touch panel 246, the dish unit cover 260, etc. can be made hard to break, and the game is interrupted due to the damage of the touch panel 246, etc. Can be reduced.

  In addition, since the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 that is visible from the upper side through the touch panel 246 is provided, when the player operates the touch panel 246, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 serves the purpose of operating the touch panel 246. By displaying the corresponding image, the player can operate the touch panel 246 according to the content of the displayed image without knowing the operation method of the touch panel 246, and the operability of the touch panel 246 can be improved.

  Further, since the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is provided, by displaying the effect image according to the game state, it is possible to entertain the player with the effect image as well as the operation effect of the touch panel 246. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game and to reduce the interest in the game.

  Furthermore, since the touch panel 246 is arranged in the center of the left and right, the touch panel 246 is easy to see, and the touch panel 246 is operated at the same distance from both sides of the player's left and right hands, so that the player can operate the touch panel 246 with the hand that is easy to use. The operability of the touch panel 246 can be improved by operating the touch panel 246 with an easy-to-use hand. Therefore, when an effect using the touch panel 246 is performed, the touch panel 246 can be immediately visually recognized and operated, and it is possible to quickly respond to the operation effect, thereby suppressing a decrease in the entertaining and entertaining of the player. can do.

  Further, the player has an upper plate effect button 257 that can be operated, and in the operation effect presented according to the game state, in addition to the touch operation on the touch panel 246, the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed. Therefore, it is possible to present a variety of operation effects to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and reduce the interest in the game.

  Further, since a part (guide passage portion 212a) of the upper plate 201 (upper plate body 212) that stores the game balls along the rear side of the touch panel 246 is open upward, for example, the guide passage of the upper plate 201. By locking a finger other than the thumb to the portion 212a and operating the touch panel 246 with the thumb, the thumb can be stabilized by the finger locked to the guide passage portion 212a, and the operability of the touch panel 246 is improved. The same operation and effect as described above can be obtained, and the touch panel 246 is operated by grasping between the touch panel 246 and the upper plate lower cover portion 262 or by locking the finger in the guide passage portion 212a. Since the fingers can be stabilized and the operability can be improved, it is possible to select the way of placing the hand to stabilize the fingers according to the player's habits and preferences, and more diverse players It becomes possible corresponding, may be easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine for a game.

  Subsequently, a configuration example of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 49. 47 is a front view of the game board 5, FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the game board 5 viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the game board 5 viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 has an outer rail 6002 and an inner rail 6003, and a frame-shaped front component member 6001 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which a game ball is driven, and a front component member. A game panel 1100 arranged to close the game area 5a on the rear side of 6001, a function display unit 6040 arranged below the front component member 6001 on the left side of the outlet 6006 outside the game area 5a, and a game. An attacker unit 2000 arranged on the right side in the area 5a on the right side in the left side and above the outlet 6006 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and on the front surface of the game panel 1100 arranged in the right area in the game area 5a and extending up and down. Supported by the game ball guide path unit 6010, and is supported by the game panel 1100, which is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 5a. A frame-shaped center accessory 2300, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, and a rear side of the back unit 3000 through the game panel 1100 and the center accessory (frame-shaped ornament) 2300 An EL display unit 1400 is provided mainly as an effect display unit that is visibly attached from the player side and can display a predetermined effect image. In addition, although details will be described later, in this example, an EL display unit 1400 of a self-luminous display which itself emits light is provided as effect display means. Unlike a liquid crystal device, an EL device does not require a light source such as a backlight, and thus has an advantage that the display unit can be thin and lightweight.

  The attacker unit 2000 is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1100 after being inserted from the front side into an opening formed in the lower right side of the game panel 1100. This attacker unit 2000 has a plurality of inlets into which the game balls driven into the game area 5a can be received. Specifically, the first starting opening 2001 is provided substantially at the center in the left-right direction and a special lottery result is obtained, and the rectangular large winning opening 2003 is provided on the right side of the first starting opening 2001 and extends greatly in the left-right direction. A second winning opening including a general winning opening 2004 arranged on the left side of the special winning opening 2003 and a right side of the first starting opening 2001, and a second starting opening for obtaining a special lottery result like the first starting opening. And a unit 2005. The second starting opening unit 2005 exists almost directly above the special winning opening 2003.

  The second starting opening unit 2005 has an ordinary gate 2005a in which a predetermined ordinary lottery result is drawn by the passage of a game ball, a second starting opening 2005c, and a second starting opening in accordance with the ordinary lottery result of the ordinary gate. A movable piece 2005b that opens and closes, and a game ball discharge route 2005d that discharges the game ball 2006a that cannot go to the second start opening 2005c toward the special winning opening because the movable piece 2005b is closed after passing through the normal gate 2005a. , The movable piece 2005b is opened after passing through the gate 2005a, so that the game ball guide route 2005e capable of guiding the game ball to the second starting opening 2005c is integrated. The start end of the second starting opening unit 2005 communicates with the end of the game ball taxiway unit 6010 described above, and when the game ball is hit right and enters the game ball taxiway unit 6010, the inside of the game ball taxiway unit 6010 To reach the second starting opening unit 2005. Next, the game ball passes through the gate 2005a of the second starting opening unit and reaches the movable piece 2005b. If the movable piece 2005b is open, it passes through the game ball guiding route 2005e and enters the second starting opening 2005c. On the other hand, if the movable piece 2005b is closed, the ball passes through the game ball discharge route 2005c and drops toward the special winning opening 2003. Opening and closing of the movable piece 2005b is executed by a solenoid.

  The upper sides of the first starting opening 2001 and the general winning opening 2004 are open so that game balls can be accepted at all times. The special winning opening 2003 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing member 2006 capable of closing the opening. The opening / closing member 2006 has a lower side rotatably supported, and in a substantially vertical state, closes the special winning opening 2003 to make it impossible to receive a game ball, and when the upper side is rotated to incline forward, The special winning opening 2003 is opened so that game balls can be accepted. The opening / closing member 2006 is in a state where the special winning opening 2003 is closed in a normal game state, and is performed by accepting a game ball into the first starting opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2005c (starting winning). According to the result of the special lottery (big hit lottery) (when the result of the special lottery is "big hit" or "small hit"), it is opened and closed by driving the attacker solenoid. However, as will be described later, when the result of the special lottery is "big hit (special hit)", the opening / closing member 2006 according to the present embodiment receives the game ball to the effective gate (described later) after the condition device is activated. On the condition that there has been, it can be opened and closed by driving the attacker solenoid. The effective gate is a special gate for activating the continuous object operating device after the condition device operates. The effective gate is prepared so that the pachinko machine 1 has a function of delaying the timing at which the accessory continuous operation device operates when a big hit is won.

  Next, details of the game ball guiding path unit 6000 will be described. The game ball guide path unit 6000 is made of a resin part product formed in the form of a hollow tube, and is attached to the game panel 1100 vertically on the right side of the game area 5a as described above. FIG. 50 shows the internal structure of the hollow tube by omitting the illustration of the portion on the front surface side of the game ball guideway unit 6010. 51A is an enlarged view of the game ball guideway unit 6010 of FIG. 50, and FIG. 51B is a cross-sectional view of the game ball guideway unit 6010 in the longitudinal direction.

  The starting end 6010a of the game ball guide path unit 6010 is configured to be opened at a substantially uppermost position on the right side of the game area, is hit right, is bounced back by the reflector 6010b, and tries to flow down the right side of the game area. All of the balls are supplied into the game ball guideway unit 6010 from the opening end 6010a. A front half region of a predetermined width following the starting end 6010a of the game ball guideway unit 6010 is formed of a substantially orthogonal straight portion 6010c and a bent portion 6010d having a curved shape. An effect gate 6011 is formed at the end of the straight portion 6010c and the beginning of the bent portion 6010d. When the game ball passes through the production gate 6011, the passing information of the game ball is supplied to the peripheral control board (or the main control board), and the peripheral control board is triggered by the passage of the game ball through the production gate 6011 to right-hand the game ball. In the valid game state, predetermined effect information of the effect device including the EL display unit 1400 is formed. The game ball that has passed through the production gate 6011 is guided to the straight line portion 6010e after passing through the bending portion 6010d while reciprocating in the left-right direction. The bending portion 6010d moderates the falling speed of the game ball by bending the progress of the game ball.

  The linear portion 6010e following the bent portion 6010d of the game ball guideway unit is formed in a linear shape having a relatively long width and descending substantially vertically. As shown in FIG. 51 (b), the front side 6010f of the game ball guiding path unit in the straight line portion 6010e is provided with a plurality of convex bodies 6010h having a hemispherical cross section that project toward the rear side 6010g. A convex body 6010h is provided so as to project from the rear surface portion toward the front surface portion. Since the convex body on the front side 6010f and the convex body on the rear side 6010g are formed in a zigzag shape, the pachinko balls 6010i flowing down in the straight portion 6010e are formed into a plurality of convex bodies arranged in a zigzag shape. Since the balls come in contact with each other in sequence and bend forward and backward, the falling speed of the game ball is moderated. The height in the front-rear direction of the convex body 6010h is set within a range that does not impair the progress of the game ball passing through the game ball guide path unit. In addition, in order to adjust the falling speed of the game ball, the width of a part of the convex body in the traveling direction of the game ball may be increased as indicated by reference numeral 6010j. The straight portion 6010e is formed in a straight shape without bending like the bending portion 6010d in order to avoid a human head-type movable accessory.

  A bulging portion 6010k following the straight portion 6010e is formed in the lower area of the game area of the game ball guideway unit 6010. An inner tube 6010m is formed inside the bulging portion 6010k, and the inner tube 6010m communicates with the above-described second starting port unit 2005. The above-mentioned effective gate 6010n is provided at the start end of the inner tube 6010m, and the game ball that advances while falling in the straight portion 6010e goes to the inner tube 6010m as it is and after passing through the effective gate 6010n, the second starting opening Reach unit 2005. The falling speed of the game ball passing through the game ball guiding path unit 6000 is moderated particularly during the process of passing through the bent portion 6010d and the straight portion 6010e. Therefore, compared with the case where the game ball falls freely without slowing its speed, it is possible to gain time until the game ball passes through the effect gate 6011 and passes through the effective gate 6010n. Therefore, since the peripheral control board can have a spare time for the effect on the EL display unit 1400, the effective effect can be provided to the player. The details of this will be described later. The normal gate 2005a, the effect gate 6011, and the effective gate 6010n are provided with a gate switch (gate sensor) that detects passage of a game ball.

  The center accessory 2300 is inserted into the game panel 1100 from the front side into an opening formed large so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 1100, and then fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1100. It is formed in a frame shape with a size occupying most of 5a. In addition, a logo movable accessory 6200 imitating a logo is provided on the upper part of the center accessory 2300 so as to be capable of reciprocally tilting counterclockwise toward the center of the game board centering on the right side in a front view. On the right side of 2300, a zombie movable accessory 6201 imitating the head of a person (zombie) is provided so as to be linearly movable from the right side of the game panel 1100 toward the center in a front view. The peripheral control board controls the movable mode of the movable accessory according to the game state.

  Further, the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2300 is closed by the light guide plates (the front light guide plate 2301 and the rear light guide plate 2302). The light guide plates (the front light guide plate 2301 and the rear light guide plate 2302) are arranged so as to be substantially parallel to the EL display unit 1400, and a plurality of high-brightness LEDs are arranged in a row above and below each light guide plate. The mounted LED boards are arranged respectively. The light guide plates (the front light guide plate 2301 and the rear light guide plate 2302) have their surfaces, for example, by reflecting the light incident from the end surfaces such as the upper and lower surfaces by the minute unevenness formed on the back surface and diffusing the light. It is a type of panel that emits uniform light from the side.

  In the front light guide plate 2301 arranged on the player side among the plurality of light guide plates, a large number of reflecting portions formed of minute irregularities imitating a predetermined pattern (see FIG. 94) are provided on the back side (back surface) of the front light guide plate 2301. The high-luminance LEDs mounted on the LED boards provided on the upper and lower sides of the front light guide plate 2301 that have been processed and processed emit light, and the light incident from the end face is reflected by the reflecting portion, thereby giving the predetermined pattern. (See FIG. 94) is displayed (exposed) on the front surface side of the front light guide plate 2301 as a light emitting pattern. Further, in the rear light guide plate 2302 arranged on the EL display unit 1400 side, a large number of reflecting portions formed by minute unevenness imitating a different pattern (not shown) different from the pattern displayed on the front light guide plate 2301 are rear-guided. It is processed and formed on the back side (rear side) of the light plate 2302, and emits high-intensity LEDs mounted on the LED boards provided on the upper and lower sides of the rear light guide plate 2302 to emit light incident from the end face. It is configured such that the different pattern is displayed (exposed) as a light emitting pattern on the front surface side of the rear light guide plate 2302 by being reflected by.

  The front light guide plate 2301 and the rear light guide plate 2302 of the present example are substantially transparent in a state where the light from the LED is not incident on the end face, and the LEDs corresponding to the front light guide plate 2301, When both of the LEDs corresponding to the rear light guide plate 2302 are turned off and light is not incident on the end surface of each light guide plate, the rear side of the front light guide plate 2301 and the rear light guide plate 2302 (that is, the EL display unit 1400 is arranged). Visibility is clear. As described above, the front light guide plate 2301 and the rear light guide plate 2302 are provided with a large number of reflecting portions formed of minute irregularities, but these irregularities are also rearward when light is not incident. It has sufficient transparency that does not impair visibility. Regarding the front light guide plate 2301 and the rear light guide plate 2302, when only the LED corresponding to the front light guide plate 2301 is turned on, or only the LED corresponding to the rear light guide plate 2302 is turned on in the course of the game, etc. There may be a case where both the LED corresponding to the front light guide plate 2301 and the LED corresponding to the rear light guide plate 2302 are turned on, and a case where both the LED corresponding to the front light guide plate 2301 and the LED corresponding to the rear light guide plate 2302 are turned off. Controlled by.

  The predetermined pattern represented by the minute irregularities formed on the front light guide plate 2301 of this example is a "vertical stripe pattern 1400 m simulating noise" as shown in FIG. When the light is incident on the end surface of the light plate 2301, the transmissivity of the vertical stripe pattern 1400m is impeded, and the transmissivity is maintained only in other portions. Further, another pattern represented by the minute unevenness formed on the rear light guide plate 2302 is not shown in the figure but is a “pattern imitating a predetermined character”, and the light from the LED is incident on the end surface of the front light guide plate 2301. In this state, the transparency of this character pattern portion is hindered, and the transparency is maintained only in the other portions. In this example, the vertical stripe pattern 1400m of the front light guide plate 2301 and the character pattern of the rear light guide plate 2302 are provided such that there are both overlapping portions and non-overlapping portions in the front light guiding plate 2301. When both the corresponding LED and the LED corresponding to the rear light guide plate 2302 are turned on and both the vertical stripe pattern 1400m of the front light guide plate 2301 and the character pattern of the rear light guide plate 2302 are displayed, it corresponds to the front light guide plate 2301. One of the LED and the LED corresponding to the rear light guide plate 2302 is turned on to display a larger area (EL display unit 1400) than when either the vertical stripe pattern 1400m of the front light guide plate 2301 or the character pattern of the rear light guide plate 2302 is displayed. (Although it may be substantially the entire surface), the EL display unit 1400 is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize it.

  As described above, in this example, the light guide plates (the front light guide plate 2301 and the rear light guide plate 2302) are arranged in front of the EL display unit 1400 to display the pattern. In the normal state, both the LED corresponding to the front light guide plate 2301 and the LED corresponding to the rear light guide plate 2302 are turned off to let the player pay attention to the EL display unit 1400 and to advance the game. Therefore, in front of the EL display unit 1400. When a pattern is displayed on the light guide plate (front light guide plate 2301, rear light guide plate 2302), the player is surprised and the event is immediately noticed, and the light guide plate (front light guide plate 2301, rear The attention to the light guide plate 2302) can be increased.

  Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 57. 52 is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board, FIG. 53 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 52, and FIG. 54 is a payout control board, a CR unit, and a frequency forming the main board. FIG. 55 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to / from a lending device connection terminal board for gaming balls or the like that relays electrical connection with a display board, FIG. FIG. 57 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 57 is a block diagram of the vicinity of the VDP with a built-in sound source in the display device and the sound control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the control structure of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly composed of a main control board 4100, a payout control board 4110, and a peripheral control board 4140, and is responsible for various controls. First, the main control board will be described, and then the payout control board, the power supply board, and the peripheral control board will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the main control board 4100 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power was turned on and the game operation is performed. A main control MPU 4100a, which is a microprocessor having a ROM for storing various control programs such as a main control program for controlling, various commands, and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and detection signals from various detection switches are input. A main control input circuit 4100b, a main control output circuit 4100c for outputting various signals to an external board, and a main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d for driving various solenoids for a movable accessory, and the like. A power failure monitoring circuit 4100e that monitors signs of voltage power failure or momentary power failure.

  The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built-in.

  The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 4100a. This once-added ID code is stored in the nonvolatile RAM and cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can retrieve the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

  The main control input circuit 4100b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input with the detection signals from the various detection switches to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 4100b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the main control input circuit 4100b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset, which will be described later, so that the various signals based on the information are changed. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 4100c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate etc. are input to the various input terminals. Main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function, which has a reset function for forcibly resetting the stored information, and a main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function, which has no reset terminal and has no reset function It consists of and. The main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. In other words, the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by being reset by a main control system reset which will be described later. Is configured as a circuit in which no signal based on is output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 4100cb without the reset function is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit 4100cb without the reset function outputs the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to the external board or the like by not being reset by the main control system reset described later, and thus the information is It is configured as a circuit in which the base signal is output from its various output terminals.

  A starting opening switch 3022 (which generically refers to a first starting opening switch and a second starting opening switch) for detecting a game ball entered in each of the first starting opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2005c, and a general winning opening. The detection signal from the general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting the game ball that entered the 2004 ball and the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b. Has been done. In addition, a normal gate 2005a, a gate switch 2352 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the effective gate 6010n (collectively each switch), a count switch 2110 for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening 2003, and , The detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 3024 attached to the back unit 3000 for detecting fraud using a magnet is mainly transmitted via the panel relay terminal plate 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 4100b. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the control MPU 4100a.

  The main control MPU 4100a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca based on the detection signal from each of these switches, thereby the main control output circuit with reset function. 4100ca outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and outputs a drive signal from the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d to the starting port solenoid (movable piece 2005b drive solenoid) 2105 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay terminal plate 4161. By outputting or outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function, the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function outputs the panel relay terminal board 4161 and the function display board 119. Through the first special symbol display 1185, the second special symbol display 1186, the first special symbol memory display 1184, the second special symbol memory display 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol memory display 1188, It outputs a drive signal to the game status display 1183 and the round display 1190.

  In addition, the main control MPU 4100a outputs various information regarding the game (game information) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with the reset function, so that the payout control is performed from the main control output circuit 4100ca with the reset function. By outputting various information (game information) to the board 4110 and outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function, the main control output with reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the circuit 4100ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e.

  In the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the starting port switch 3022, the gate switch 2352, and the count switch 2110, whereas the general winning port switch 3020 is used. , A contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting port 2001 and the second starting port 2005c and also passes through the gate frequently, so that the starting port switch 3022 and the gate switch 2352 also detect the game ball frequently. Occurs in. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the starting port switch 3022 and the gate switch 2352. In addition, when the big hit game state which is advantageous to the player occurs, the special winning opening 2003 is opened and the game ball is frequently entered, so that the count switch 2110 also frequently detects the game ball. Therefore, the count switch 2110 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, the general winning opening 2004 in which the game balls do not enter frequently does not occur frequently by the general winning opening switch 3020. Therefore, the general winning opening switch 3020 uses a mechanical switch that has a shorter life than the proximity switch.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands relating to payout from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function as serial data, thereby controlling payout from the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the board 4110 as serial data. When the payout control board 4110 normally receives various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, the payout control board 4110 outputs a signal to that effect (payment main ACK signal) to the main control board 4100. This signal (payment main ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110 as serial data at the main control input circuit 4100b, so that the main control input circuit 4100b inputs the predetermined serial input port. Various commands are received as serial data at the terminal. When the various commands from the payout control board 4110 are normally received as serial data, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output with a reset function. The signal is output to the circuit 4100ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca to the payout control board 4110.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands relating to the control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb without the reset function. , Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function to the peripheral control board 4140.

  Here, the main serial transmission port for transmitting various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 4140 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 4100a is mainly configured by a main control CPU core 4100aa. In addition to the main control built-in RAM, a main control serial transmission port 4100ae, which is one of various main control serial I / O ports, etc., connects the bus 4100ah. It is connected to the circuit via. The main serial transmission port 4100ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 as main serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 4100ea, a transmission buffer register 4100aeb, a serial management unit 4100aec, and the like. When the main control CPU core 4100aa sets the command in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and outputs the transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec, the serial management unit 4100aec transmits the command set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb from the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 4100ea and started to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 as main-circulation serial data. In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 4100aeb is 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 4100aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 4140 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec.

  The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. It has a BC0. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. Various kinds of information stored in the main control built-in RAM are operation signals (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 860a when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110, which will be described later, is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. Is output from the payout control board 4110 and is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b. At this time, the main control MPU 4100a completely erases it from the main control internal RAM. It is supposed to be (cleared). The operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 860a is also input to the peripheral control board 4140.

  As shown in FIG. 53, a payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of gaming balls, etc., displays a payout control unit 4120 for performing various controls related to payout, an operation switch 860a having various functions, and a state of the pachinko machine 1. Error LED indicator 860b for The operation switch 860a that also has a function as a RAM clear switch is a RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) based on a detection signal output by being operated. The RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in (.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the payout control unit 4120, which performs various controls related to payout, controls the power-on process executed at power-on, and pays out game media executed after a predetermined time has elapsed after power-on. Detecting from a payout control MPU 4120a, which is a microprocessor having a ROM storing various control programs including a payout control program controlling operations and various commands, and a RAM temporarily storing data, and various detection switches related to payout. A payout control input circuit 4120b to which a signal is input, a payout control output circuit 4120c for outputting various signals to an external board, a payout motor drive circuit 4120d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744, and a CR. CR unit input / output circuit for exchanging various signals with the unit 6 Is provided with a 4120e, a. The payout control MPU 4120a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built-in.

  Under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a, the payout control program is a serial system in which various information related to games (game information) from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to payout are sent as payer serial data transmission signals via the payout control input circuit 4120b. Receive serial data with. In addition, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game ball, or operates the operation switch 860a as an error canceling unit. Create a 16-bit (2-byte) error cancel navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancel command) based on the signal (detection signal), and send these error occurrence command and error cancel navigation command respectively to the payer serial data The signal is output as serial data of the serial method to the receiving port of the main control board 4100 via the payout control input circuit 4120b (command transmitting means). In addition, this payout control program executes payout control after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed to start payout control. When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated by the operation of the operation switch 860a, and the output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

  Further, this payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When a detection signal (main frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the main frame opening switch 619, a main frame opening command (first main frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, this payout control program sends a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. In addition to outputting, when a detection signal (main body frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, a main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) is output.

  The payout control input circuit 4120b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information in which the detection signals from the various detection switches are input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 4120b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the payout control input circuit 4120b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the payout control system reset described later, and thus various signals based on the information are changed. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The payout control output circuit 4120c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. Resetting function-equipped payout control output circuit 4120ca having a reset function for forcibly resetting the generated information and reset function-less payout control output circuit 4120cb having no reset terminal and having no reset function It consists of and. The payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. That is, in the payout control output circuit 4120ca with the reset function, the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset by a payout control system reset to be described later, and thus the information is output. Is configured as a circuit in which no signal based on is output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function outputs information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like because it is not reset by the payout control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the base signal is output from its various output terminals.

  First, a detection signal from a ball break switch 750 that detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage of the prize ball device and a counting switch 751 that detects a game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage of the prize ball device is first a prize ball device. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the award ball case substrate and the payout control input circuit 4120b. The detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 for detecting the detection slit formed on the rotation detection board of the prize ball device is first the rotation angle switch substrate 753 of the prize ball device, the substrate in the prize ball case, and the payout control input. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the circuit 4120b.

  Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 that detects the opening of the door frame with respect to the main frame and the main frame opening switch 619 that detects the opening of the main frame with respect to the outer frame are controlled by the payout control input circuit 4120b. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the MPU 4120a.

  Further, the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is first input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the handle relay terminal plate 192, the power supply board 851, and the payout control input circuit 4120b.

  The payout control MPU 4120a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 via the payout control input circuit 4120b at the input terminal of the serial input port thereof in the serial data system, and the operation signal (detection signal of the operation switch 860a (detection). Signal) is output to the main control board 4100 via the payout control input circuit 4120b. When the payout control MPU 4120a completes the normal reception of various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, a signal (payment main ACK signal) to that effect is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control output with a reset function. By outputting to the circuit 4120ca, the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to the main control board 4100.

  Further, the payout control MPU 4120a sends various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the reset functionless payout control output circuit 4120cb, thereby performing the reset functionless payout control. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 4120cb to the main control board 4100. When the various commands from the payout control board 4110 are normally received as serial data, the main control board 4100 outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 4110. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control input circuit 4120b.

  Further, the payout control MPU 4120a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function, so that the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function. The drive signal is output to the payout motor drive circuit, and the drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit to the payout motor through the prize ball case substrate, and the state of the pachinko machine 1 is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a drive signal for displaying on the error LED display 860b to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function, a drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function to the error LED display 860b. .

  The error LED display 860b is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 860b include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 4100 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "out of ball" (specifically, out of ball). Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, the player is informed that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the prize ball device 740), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means "ball ball" (specifically At the entrance of the distribution space that communicates with the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, the payout rotating body and the game ball engage with each other near the entrance, and the payout rotating body becomes difficult to rotate. Number) When “3” is displayed, the fact that “counting switch error” has occurred (specifically, there is a problem in the counting switch 751 based on the detection signal from the counting switch 751) is notified, and the number “ When "5" is displayed, it is a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When it is, it is informed that it is "full" (specifically, it is full in the game balls stored based on the detection signal from the full tank switch 550), and the number "7" is displayed. When it is, "CR is not connected" is notified (the electric connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the number "9" is displayed. In stock (with prize balls stock (unpaid coin)) "in the effect that (specifically, yet that the ball number of game balls not payout has reached a predetermined number spheres) are informed.

  In addition, the payout control MPU 4120a outputs the number of balls actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function, thereby outputting the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function. It outputs the number of balls actually paid out to the external terminal board 784 through a resistor (not shown).

  Further, the payout control board 4110 outputs various kinds of information (game information) about the game from the main control board 4100 to the external terminal board via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board is provided with a plurality of photo couplers (not shown) (infrared LED and photo IC are built-in), and a game hall (hall) through the plurality of photo couplers. The number of balls of a game ball and various kinds of information (game information, content of error relating to payout operation of game ball, or the fact that there was an error) are respectively transmitted to the hall computer installed in. The external terminal board and the hall computer are electrically insulated from each other by a plurality of photo couplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board of the pachinko machine 1 to cause the hall computer to operate. It does not malfunction or break down, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the main control board 4100 that progresses the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 4110 that controls the payout and the like. Is being applied to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are, first, the frequency display plate 365, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the terminal for connecting the lending device such as the game ball. It is adapted to be input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of balls of the game ball to be lent out according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 in a serial manner, and this signal is the CR unit. The payout control MPU 4120a is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port via the input / output circuit 4120e. Further, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card in accordance with the number of balls of the rented gaming ball, and at the same time, outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the remaining number display 365c. The lending device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365 are output, and this signal is input to the remaining frequency display 365c. In addition, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the remaining number display 365c is configured such that the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 is input via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. There is.

  The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4120a can store various kinds of information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. Various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is such that when the operation switch 860a is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, the operation signal is a predetermined signal of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control input circuit 4120b. The payout control MPU 4120a, which is input to the input terminal of the input port, determines it as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is supposed to be completely erased. This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function, and is also output from the payout control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function to the main control board 4100.

  Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 4120 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365 will be described with reference to FIG. 54. As shown in FIG. 54, the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 4110, and also the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. The electrical connection between the boards is also relayed (to be exact, the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880. , The CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay The terminal board 880 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). Between the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, between the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout control substrate 4110, between the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay The board with the terminal board 880, and the board with the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by respective wirings (harnesses). In addition, AC24V to be described later from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal plate 869 for gaming balls and the like. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL (DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as "+ 12V") in this embodiment) from the supplied AC 24V by a built-in voltage creating circuit (not shown) and the ground LG. While supplying to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, it is supplied to the frequency display plate 365 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. .

  A switch 365a and a return switch 365b are mounted on the frequency display plate 365, and a residual frequency display 365c that is a segment display is also mounted.

  The ball lending switch 365a and the return switch 365b are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 361 is pressed, the ball lending switch 365a turns on (turns on) the ball lending switch 365a, and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending switch 365a is transmitted to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game. It is adapted to be input to the CR unit 6 via a ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When the return button 362 is pressed, the return switch 365b turns on (turns on) the return switch 365b, and the return operation signal RES from the return switch 365b is connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection. Input is made to the CR unit 6 via the terminal plate 869.

  The residual number display 365c is one in which three segment displays are arranged side by side in a row. Of these three-digit segment displays, one-digit segment display is sequentially driven, that is, three-digit by a so-called dynamic lighting method. The segment display of is controlled to light. By such lighting control, the remaining number display 365c displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 and displays an error of the CR unit 6. The residual frequency display 365c displays the digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating the 1-digit segment display out of the 3-digit segment display and the designated 1-digit segment display. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be lit and displayed are from the CR unit 6 to the rental ball connection device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board. When input through 880, the one-digit segment display sequentially emits light according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G. The contents by the light emission of can be visually confirmed through the remaining lending display portion 363.

  A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display plate 365 adjacent to the remaining frequency display 365c. In the CR unit lamp 365d, the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending enable signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC24V supplied from the power supply board 851 by the built-in voltage creating circuit, and when the ball lending switch 365a and the return switch 365b are in a valid ball lending enabled state. Controls the logic of the ball lending enable signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be visually confirmed through the remaining lending display portion 363. In addition, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the remaining number display 365c through the current limiting resistors mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869.

  In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending switch 365a is input from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. Then, BRDY, which is a ball rental request signal, is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU4120a) through the game ball or similar lending device connection terminal board 869. Then, the CR unit 6 issues one payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of lent balls (25 balls in this embodiment, which corresponds to 100 yen in the amount) in one payout operation. The BRQ is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input is EXS, which is a signal for informing that one payout operation has started or ended, and a game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Through the, the PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 or telling that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible or impossible, is connected to the rental device connection terminal board for game balls, etc. It outputs to CR unit 6 via 869. Note that, for example, when the ball rental button 361 is pressed, a game ball for 200 yen is paid out, and when the hall clerk or the like sets the CR unit 6 in advance, one payout operation is performed. It is supposed to be performed twice consecutively, and when 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen will be paid out continuously, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

  In the CR unit 6, when the return button 362 is pressed, the return operation signal RES from the return switch 365b is input from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball and other lending device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. In the returned prepaid card, the remaining amount after the amount corresponding to the number of gaming balls paid out as a result of pressing the ball lending button 361 is stored is stored.

  Next, the power supply board 851 will be briefly described. The power supply board 851 includes a power supply switch 852 that can be electrically connected to and disconnected from 24 V AC (24 V AC) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and a power supply control unit 855 that generates various power supplies. And a firing control unit that controls firing by a firing solenoid of the hitting ball firing device and control of ball forwarding by a ball feeding solenoid.

  The power supply control unit 855 improves the power factor of the synchronous rectification circuit 855a that rectifies the AC 24V (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility by operating the power switch 852, and the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 855a. A power factor correction circuit 855b, a smoothing circuit 855c that smoothes the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 855b, and various direct currents that are supplied from the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 855c to various substrates. And a power supply generation circuit 855d that generates a power supply.

  A firing control unit 857 that performs firing control by a firing solenoid and ball delivery control by ball delivery is mainly configured by a launch control circuit 857a. The firing control circuit 857a detects an operation signal from the potentiometer 512 that electrically adjusts the strength (firing strength) at which the game ball is shot toward the game area 5a, and a touch switch 516 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching. And a detection signal from a firing stop switch 518 for detecting whether to forcibly stop the launch (launch) of the game ball according to the player's will, via the handle relay terminal board 192. It has been entered. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to the launch control circuit 857a, a CR connection signal indicating that effect is input via the payout control board 4110. .

  The firing control circuit 857a controls the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the potentiometer 512, and outputs the adjusted drive current to the launch solenoid 654.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the peripheral control board 4140 controls the peripheral control section 4150 which performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 4100, and the drawing control of the EL display unit 1400 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. A display device and a sound control for controlling the contact state of the touch panel 246 together with the speaker that is housed in the speaker unit 920 provided in the main body frame and the sound that flows from the speaker provided in the door frame. A section 4160, a real-time clock (hereinafter, referred to as “RTC”) control section 4165 that holds calendar information that specifies the date, and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second, and a speaker unit provided in the body frame. Rotate the knob for the volume of music and sound effects that flow from the speaker housed in the 920 and the speaker installed in the door frame. It has a, and volume adjustment volume to be adjusted by work.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the peripheral control unit 4150 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor and the power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. From the peripheral control ROM 4150b that stores various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and controls the production operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source of the display device and the sound control unit 4160 described later. Information that continues every time the V blank signal is input (for example, schedule data that defines a screen to be drawn on the EL display unit 1400 and various light emitting modes such as LEDs). Manage prescribed schedule data, etc. Peripheral control RAM 4150c for storing information for storing information for various purposes), and various information that continues over the day (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the jackpot gaming state and information for managing special effect flags) ) For storing the peripheral control SRAM 4150d, and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 4150e (hereinafter, referred to as "peripheral control external WDT 4150e") for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 4150a is operating normally. I have it. In addition, the peripheral control unit 4150 controls the production operation by receiving the passing information of the game ball by the switch of the production gate 6011 and the input information of the operation of the production operation means such as the production button 257.

  The peripheral control RAM 4150c can hold the stored contents only for a time such that an instantaneous power failure occurs and the power is immediately restored, and the peripheral power RAM 4150c is in a state where the power is cut off for a long time (when a long power cut occurs. ), The peripheral control SRAM 4150d is supplied with backup power from a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as “SRAM electrolytic capacitor”) provided on the power supply board. The stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. When the gaming board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1 by providing the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM on the power supply board, the backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 4150d, so the peripheral control SRAM 4150d retains the stored contents. You can't do it and lose its contents.

  The peripheral control external WDT 4150e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control, and when this timer is up, it is reset by hardware. That is, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a does not output the clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period (until the timer expires), the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period, it can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, and therefore is not reset.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. When receiving various commands from the main control board 4100, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. For outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs and the like provided in the, and a lighting signal to a high-brightness LED provided in each light guide plate (front light guide plate 2301, rear light guide plate 2302). The game board side light emission data is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I / O port to the lamp drive board 4170 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), and a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is supplied. Of the game board side motor drive data for outputting the drive signal to the electric drive source of the peripheral control output circuit from the motor drive board serial I / O port Door side motor drive data for transmitting to the motor drive board 4180 or outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor provided on the door frame. Signals sent from the O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board through the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board, and the peripheral door relay terminal board, and lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs and the like provided on each decorative board of the door frame , The door side light emission data for outputting the blinking signal or the gradation lighting signal from the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port through the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board, and the peripheral door relay terminal board Or send it to the frame decoration drive amplifier board.

  Various commands from the main control board 4100 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, the detection signal from the sensor sheet 246b for detecting the touch of the touch panel 246 and the detection signal from the effect button pressing sensor 258 for detecting the operation of the upper plate effect button 257, which are provided in the effect operation unit 220. Is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board, and the serialized operation unit detection data is output from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board and the frame peripheral relay terminal board. , And is input to the operation unit detection serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the peripheral control input circuit.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors) for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies (movable accessory) provided on the game board 5, and further the gate switch of the production gate 6011. The detection signal from the press switch such as the effect button or the production switch is serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180 or the like, and the serialized detection data is the game board side serial. It is input from the transmission circuit to the motor drive board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the peripheral control input circuit. The peripheral control MPU 4150a is configured to exchange various data between the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the motor drive board serial I / O port.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter, referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and its own system runs out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e together. Is diagnosed.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 56, the peripheral control MPU 4150a has a peripheral control CPU core 4150aa as a center, a peripheral control internal RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 4150ac, a peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and various peripheral control serial I. / O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 4150ak, and the like.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads / writes various data from / to the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac via the internal bus 4150ah, while at the same time, the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 4150ag and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak are read / written via the internal bus 4150ah, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and peripheral bus 4150ai.

  Further, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads various data into the peripheral control ROM 4150b via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h, while the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d are read. Then, various data is read and written via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d, the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, and the peripheral control various parallel I. The DMA / O port 4150ag and the input / output device such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak are dedicated controllers that independently perform data transfer without going through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. ~ DMA3 has four channels.

  Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, various peripheral control built-in serial I / O ports 4150ae built in the peripheral control MPU4150a, and a peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af. , Peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, and other input / output devices for independent data transfer without the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. Further, while reading and writing to the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab via the internal bus 4150ah, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, and peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150. g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 4150Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and peripheral bus 4150Ai, reading and writing.

  Further, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and various peripheral control serial I / O incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Between the O port 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak and other input / output devices without passing through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, In order to independently perform data transfer, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and the external bus 4150h are provided to the storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Then, while reading and writing, the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak Reading and writing is performed via the control bus controller 4150ad and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  The peripheral control bus controller 4150ad controls the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral bus 4150ai, and the external bus 4150h, the central processing unit of the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, the peripheral control internal RAM 4150ab, the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as SRAM 4150d and various input / output devices such as peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak It is a dedicated controller for exchanging various data between the two.

  Peripheral control Various serial I / O ports 4150ae include lamp drive board serial I / O ports, motor drive board serial I / O ports, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O ports, frame decoration drive amplifier board LEDs Serial I / O port, a frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor serial I / O port, a main control substrate serial I / O port, and an operation unit information acquisition serial I / O port.

  The peripheral control watchdog timer (WDT with peripheral control) 4150af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU4150a is running out of control. It has become. That is, when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa resets the WDT4150af with built-in peripheral control when it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer within a certain period (until the timer expires). Will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a certain period of time, the timer count can be restarted, so that it is not reset.

  Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 4150ag outputs various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, and a game. Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and the serial signals are serialized. The movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the motor control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU4150a is output, or the upper decoration of the door frame 3 It outputs the lighting signal of the LED mounted on the upper decorative substrate of the unit. This LED is a high-intensity white LED, and is a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big hit game state has been confirmed. In this embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag are electrically directly connected, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures for the lighting control of the LED, which has a significant meaning in the game. The LED lighting control is executed in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and the other LEDs except this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit steady process described below. It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter is electrically connected to the volume adjusting volume, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob of the volume adjusting volume, and the resistance value is divided by the resistance value at the rotating position of the knob. The compressed voltage is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into a value of 0 to 1023 in 1024 steps. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 levels is divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 toward the board volume 6. By controlling the display device and the sound control unit 4160 (VDP4160a with a built-in sound source described later) so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, the speaker and the door frame housed in the speaker unit 920 provided in the main body frame 4 are controlled. Music and sound effects can be played from the provided speaker. In this way, by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion, music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker housed in the speaker unit 920 provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk in the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1, content related to game performance, etc. Sound (for example, to present the screen displayed on the EL display unit 1400 as a more powerful one, or to notify that there is a high possibility that the game state is advantageous to the player). Also flows from the speaker housed in the speaker unit 920 provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame 3, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. The program controls the display device and the sound control unit 4160 (the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source, which will be described later) from the mute to the maximum volume by a program. So that the can be an integer. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the board volume divided into seven stages described above, and it is possible to smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, for example, even when a store clerk in the hall or the like rotates the knob of the volume adjusting volume to set the volume to a low level, the speaker and the door frame housed in the speaker unit 920 provided in the main body frame can be installed in the speaker and the door frame. Although the effect sound such as the music and the sound effect that flows from the provided speaker is reduced, the volume is high when the pachinko machine 1 is malfunctioning or the player is cheating (the maximum volume in the present embodiment). The notification sound set to () can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming less likely to notice a malfunction or a player's cheating by the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume that is set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so that it does not interfere with the music or the sound effect, while the advertisement sound is generated. Announce that it is highly possible to increase the volume of sound played to increase the volume of the music and sound effects, to produce a more powerful screen on the EL display unit 1400, and to shift to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. You can also do it.

  The peripheral control ROM 4150b stores in advance various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 4150, the display device and sound control unit 4160, the RTC control unit 4165, various data, various control data, and various schedule data. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the EL display unit 1400 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating various LED light emission modes, music, sound effects, etc. There is a sound generation schedule data for generating, and an electric drive source schedule data for generating a driving mode of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the EL display unit 1400 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by time-sequentially arraying light emission data that defines the light emission modes of various LEDs. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the display device and the sound control unit 4160, which will be described later, and the built-in sound source. Among the plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the VDP 4160a, a track number for instructing which track the sound data such as music and sound effect is to be incorporated is defined. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  Various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and executed, and may be copied to various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later at the time of power-on. Some of them are read and executed. In addition, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, or when power is turned on in various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later. In some cases, the copied one is read out.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a is a backup that stores, for exclusive use, the information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A management target work area 4150ca, a backup first area 4150cb and a backup second area 4150cc for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in this backup management target work area 4150ca, and a peripheral control ROM 4150b. Various control program copy area 4150cd for exclusively storing the copied various control programs and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b Various control data copy area 4150ce that stores the copied data exclusively, and backup non-management target that stores only the information that is not the backup target among various information updated by executing the various control programs A work area 4150cf is provided.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-managed work area 4150cf and cleared to zero. For the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a power-on command from the main control board 4100 starts the RAM clear effect and each state effect. When it is to instruct (for example, to instruct the start of the effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 52 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on), it is cleared to zero. .

  The backup management target work area 4150ca is performance information that is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a V blank signal is input from the display device and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160, which will be described later. Bank0 (1fr), which stores (1fr) as a backup target, and performance information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt described later occurs. And Bank0 (1 ms) for exclusive use as a backup target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms) will be briefly described. "Bank" is a minimum management unit that represents the size of a storage area for storing various types of information, and is "Bank". The subsequent "0" means that it is a storage area that is normally used for storing various information that is updated by executing various control programs. That is, "Bank0" means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150cb to a backup second area 4150cc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as “Bank0”. It means having a size. As will be described later, “(1fr)” means that when the sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs drawing data for one screen (for one frame) to the EL display unit 1400 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Is output to the peripheral control MPU4150a, which indicates that it is in a state in which the peripheral control can be accepted. Therefore, each time the V blank signal is input, in other words, the peripheral control is performed for each frame (1 frame). From the place where the part regular processing is executed, they are respectively added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" (effect information (1fr) and effect backup information (1fr) described later. ) Is also used with the same meaning.) “(1 ms)” will be described later. In addition, since the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated, it is respectively added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4". (The same meaning is used for effect information (1 ms) and effect backup information (1 ms) described later).

  In Bank 0 (1fr), the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, the reception command storage area 4150cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and the schedule data storage area 4150cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 5, light guide plates (front light guide plate 2301, rear light guide plate 2302). ) Is a storage area in which game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal to a high-intensity LED is set, and in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. , A storage area in which door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is set, and a reception command The storage area 4150cac is a storage area in which various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are received and various received commands are set. The information acquisition storage area 4150cad is a storage area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a described later) is set, and the schedule data storage area 4150cae includes a main control board 4100 (main control board). This is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set based on the command received from the MPU 4100a). In the schedule data storage area 4150cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 4150b to the various control data copy areas 4150ce are read and set, and in other cases, various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. There are also things that are set.

  Bank0 (1 ms) is provided with a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, an operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, and the like. Has been. Door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. A storage area to be set, and a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid that operates various movable bodies provided on the game board 5. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is a storage area to be set, and in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, various types provided on the game board based on detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5. It is a storage area in which various kinds of information obtained such as the original position and the movable position of the movable body are set, and an operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai Is various information obtained by touching the touch panel 246 and operating the upper plate effect button 257 based on detection signals from various detection sensors provided in the operation unit (for example, from various detection sensors provided in the effect operation unit). Is a storage area in which touch history information of the touch panel 246, which is created based on the detection signal of, and operation history information of the upper plate effect button 257.

  It should be noted that the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab of Bank0 (1fr) and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf of Bank0 (1ms). The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

  The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa is set to the game board side light emission data SL-DAT in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa when the peripheral control unit steady process described later is executed. When the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. Each time the processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. Peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, for example, when the game board side emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa in the peripheral control section regular processing this time, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa.

  When the peripheral controller steady processing is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is located in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, and the door side light emission data STL. -When DAT is set and the next routine processing of the peripheral control unit is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. Every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. It Peripheral control unit steady process is executed, for example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second region of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage region 4150cab in this peripheral control unit regular process, When the peripheral control unit steady process is executed last time, the process is advanced based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. Has become.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf is provided with a door in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. -DAT is set, and every time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is set in the first and second areas of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT are alternately set. The peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process of this time, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. When it is set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed last time is set. The processing is carried out based on this.

  When the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag sets the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. When the next peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. Every time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag Sometimes, when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed last time, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. It is like this.

  Next, the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc that exclusively store the copied copy of the effect information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, will be described. In the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, two pairs each having two banks as one pair are managed as one page. Performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as performance backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the performance information (1 ms) which is the content which is copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac and is stored in Bank0 (1ms) which is a storage area normally used. As the production backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control DMA controller 41 is placed in the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc each time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied to the high speed by 0ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks forming the page match.

  Specifically, the backup first area 4150cb has two pairs of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), which are managed as one page. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and that is stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is the storage area that is normally used, is stored in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the data to Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) at high speed, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  Further, in the backup second area 4150cc, two pairs of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) and one pair of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and that is stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is the storage area that is normally used, is stored in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the data to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) at high speed, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 4150cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms). The backup second area 4150cc is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 4150cc has two pairs of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, respectively.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame) as effect backup information (1fr). Every time the regular processing is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and are also stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is a storage area normally used. The production information (1 ms) is, as production backup information (1 ms), a backup first area 4150cb and a backup second area 4150cc each time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. Peripheral control to Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 4150Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 4150Ac are common. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr) and the effect information (1ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

  The peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a backup management target work area 4150da that exclusively stores the backup target among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 4150db and a backup second area 4150dc for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da are provided. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d include a power-on command from the main control board 4100 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including a power failure due to a momentary power failure or a power failure) and a RAM clear effect start and each of the commands. When instructing the start of state effect (for example, instructing the start of effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 52 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on) However, it is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described above are cleared to zero. Further, when the touch panel 246 or the upper plate production button 257 of the production operation unit 220 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the EL display unit 1400. Has become. By operating the touch panel 246 and the upper plate effect button 257 of the effect operation unit 220 according to the screen of this setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d (for example, a history of occurrence of a jackpot gaming state, etc.). While the contents can be cleared, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. In this respect also, the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d are completely different.

  The backup management target work area 4150da is production information (SRAM) that is various information that continues across days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the jackpot gaming state and special production flags). Information (for example, information) is exclusively stored as a backup target and is configured from Bank 0 (SRAM). Here, the name of Bank0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, "Bank" is the minimum management unit that represents the size of the storage area for storing various types of information, and is "Bank". The subsequent "0" means that it is a storage area that is normally used for storing various information that is updated by executing various control programs. That is, "Bank0" means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150db to a backup second area 4150dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. "(SRAM)" is a backup target of various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and thus "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3". , And “Bank4” (also used for production information (SRAM) and production backup information (SRAM) described later with the same meaning).

  Next, the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc that exclusively store the copied copy of the production information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da, will be described. The backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc are managed with two banks as one pair and one pair as one page. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks forming the page match.

  Specifically, the backup first area 4150db has Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

  The backup second area 4150dc has Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair, and one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 4150db is an area that manages one pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one page, and the backup second area 4150db. 4150dc is an area for managing one pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc.

  A display device that controls the drawing of the EL display unit 1400 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and controls the sound contained in the speaker unit 920 provided in the main body frame and the sound that flows from the speaker provided in the door frame such as sound effects. As shown in FIG. 55, the sound control unit 4160 has a built-in sound source (hereinafter, referred to as “built-in sound source”) for controlling sound such as music and sound effects, and the EL display unit 1400 and the upper part. In addition to a VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4160a with a built-in sound source for controlling the drawing of the plate liquid crystal display device 244, various character data of the screen displayed on the EL display unit 1400 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, music and sound effects Display device and sound control ROM 4160b for storing various sound data such as An audio data transmission IC 4160c for transmitting a sound effect or the like as audio data toward the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194. The display device and the sound control ROM 4160b display, for example, ring image data used to display a ring-shaped display object (annular display object) as sprite data used to display a screen or an image described later, and an operation menu background image described later. Operation menu background image data used for display, selection display object image data used for displaying at least one selection display object described later, volume adjustment background image data used for displaying a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described below, and volume adjustment icon described below In addition to the volume setting icon image data used for the display of the body frame back image data and the service mode screen of the body frame back image used for displaying the body frame back image in which the positions of the respective parts on the back surface of the body frame 4 are visible to the player. Used to display service mode screen image data used for display, break timer setting screen Diverticulum timer setting screen image data, and, during breaks screen image data used for displaying the break in the screen is stored. The display device and sound control ROM 4160b also stores suggestion display object image data used for displaying the suggestion display object for prompting the user to operate the upper plate effect button 257 (operation unit) of the operation unit.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. 4150cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control RAM 4150c. After the data is extracted from the control data copy area 4150ce and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the schedule data is triggered by the input of a V blank signal described later. The next screen data following the first screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c according to the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 4150cae, and the sound source is built-in. Output to VDP4160a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, outputs the screen data arranged in time series to the screen generation schedule data every time the V blank signal is input. Then, the first screen data is output to the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source one by one.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs the sound command data at the beginning of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. The extracted sound command data is set to 4150 cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is set to the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control ROM 4150b. The schedule data recording is triggered by the input of the V blank signal after the data is extracted from the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. According to the sound generation schedule data set in the area 4150cae, the next sound command data following the first sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c to generate the sound source. Output to the built-in VDP 4160a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data as the V blank signal according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. Each time, the sound command data at the head is output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a one by one.

  When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a in addition to the above-described internal sound source, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, based on the input screen data, as shown in FIG. For extracting the board side character data and the upper plate side character data to create sprite data to generate drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the EL display unit 1400 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. A VRAM is also built-in (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM"). Among the drawing data generated in the built-in VRAM, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs the image data for the EL display unit 1400 from the channel CH1 to the EL display unit 1400, and the image data for the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 from the channel CH2. By outputting to the plate liquid crystal display device 244, the EL display unit 1400 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 are synchronized. Further, the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source receives a detection signal according to the contact state of the touch surface of the touch panel 246, and when the detection signal is received, outputs it to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, so that the effect control program is applied to the touch surface of the touch panel 246. The contact state of can be grasped. In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the EL display unit 1400 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives this input. Character data is extracted from the display device and the sound control ROM 4160b based on the screen data to generate sprite data, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the EL display unit 1400 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is generated. Of the drawing data generated in the built-in VRAM, the image data for the EL display unit 1400 is output from the channel CH1 to the EL display unit 1400, and the image data for the upper liquid crystal display device 244 is output from the channel CH2. Liquid crystal display device 2 And outputs it to the 4. That is, the "screen data for one screen (one frame)" means that the drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the EL display unit 1400 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is generated on the built-in VRAM. Is the data for.

  Further, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the EL display unit 1400 from the channel CH1 and image data for the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 from the channel CH2 to the upper plate liquid crystal display device. When output to 244, the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the EL display unit 1400 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is set to about 30 fps per second, so that the interval at which the V blank signal is output is about. It is 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 4150a is configured to execute a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later, when the V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat depending on the size of the EL device of the EL display unit 1400 and the size of the liquid crystal device of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. Also, in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 in which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change to some extent.

  The VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source adopts a frame buffer method. The "frame buffer method" means that drawing data for one screen (one frame) drawn on the screens of the EL display unit 1400 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM), and this frame buffer is used. In this system, drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in (built-in VRAM) is output to the EL display unit 1400 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

  When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a based on a command from the main control board 4100, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a is stored in the display device and the sound control ROM 4160b as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as music and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, the sound data such as music and sound effects are embedded in the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. The output channels are set to serialize music and sound effects flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker unit 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 3 and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. .

  It should be noted that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the sound source built-in VDP4160a have sound effects such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the misconduct to the pachinko machine 1 Subvolume value to be included. Specifically, for the effect sound, the above-described substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 4140a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by moving to the setting mode described later by operating the touch panel 246 of the effect operation unit 220 or the upper effect button 257.

  In addition, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and a plurality of output channels in the internal sound source of the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source have a plurality of master volume values in the sound source with a built-in VDP4160a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of this combined effect sound is calculated. Actually, it is amplified to a master volume value that is a volume that flows from a speaker housed in the speaker unit 920 provided in the main body frame and a speaker provided in the door frame 3, and the amplified effect sound is serialized as audio data. The data is transmitted to the data transmission IC 4160c.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a fixed value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to the speaker unit 920 provided in the main body frame. The volume of the speaker and the speaker installed in the door frame are set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, as a sub-volume value for adjusting the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the plurality of tracks and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used. The set volume adjusting volume 4140a is combined with the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob, and the combined volume of the effect sound is actually stored in the speaker unit 920 provided in the main body frame. Is amplified to a master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker and the speaker provided on the door frame, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. Adjust the sound data of the informative sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the informative sound incorporated in the track to be used. The maximum volume that is completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a set as the sub-volume value is combined, and the combined volume of the notification sound is actually The speaker unit 920 provided in the speaker unit 920 and the speaker provided in the door frame are amplified to a master volume value that is a volume that flows, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

  Here, when the effect sound is flowing from the speaker accommodated in the speaker unit 920 provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame, the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 are detected in the hall. To briefly explain the control of sending the notification sound to notify the store clerk, first, forcibly set the sub-volume value of the track in which the effect sound is incorporated to mute, and the sound data of the track in which this effect sound is incorporated. And the sub-volume value set to the mute, the sound data of the track in which the notification sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are synthesized, and the synthesized effect sound The volume and the volume of the notification sound are actually the volumes flowing from the speaker accommodated in the speaker unit 920 provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame. Amplified to star volume value, and outputs the amplified effect sound and alarm sound in the audio data transmission IC4160c as audio data serialization.

  That is, in reality, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows from the speaker housed in the speaker unit 920 provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, it does not flow from the speaker accommodated in the speaker unit 920 provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame, but the effect sound is in accordance with the above-described sound generation schedule data. Is in progress. In the present embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the speaker accommodated in the speaker unit 920 provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). The volume of the effect sound that has been proceeding according to the sound generation schedule data that has been compulsorily set to mute is adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a as the sub-volume value. It is set again (at this time, when the touch panel 246 of the operation unit or the upper plate effect button 257 is operated to shift to the setting mode and is adjusted, the sub volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set. ), So that it can be heard from the speaker accommodated in the speaker unit 920 provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame. Going on.

  In this way, when the effect sound is flowing from the speaker accommodated in the speaker unit 920 provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame, the pachinko machine 1 may be deficient or misconducted to the pachinko machine 1. When a notification sound is played to notify the store clerk or the like, although the volume of the effect sound is muted and the notification sound is played from the speaker housed in the speaker unit 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame, Since the muffled effect sound progresses according to the sound generation schedule data, the notification sound is passed from the speaker accommodated in the speaker unit 920 provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame after a predetermined period has elapsed. When it stops flowing, the effect sound does not start to flow again from where the notification sound started to flow, but a predetermined period has elapsed since the notification sound started to flow. So that the start flowing again from where it proceeds according to schedule data for generating sound to the point.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the display device and sound control ROM 4160b includes game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the EL display unit 1400, and an upper plate for drawing in the display area of the upper liquid crystal display device 244. The side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

  When the serialized audio data from the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 4160c transmits the right audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of a differential method in which the right signal is a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left side audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board as serial data of a differential method using a plus signal and a minus signal. As a result, music, sound effects, etc. adapted to various effects are stereo-reproduced from the speaker housed in the speaker unit 920 provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame.

  The audio data transmission IC 4160c outputs audio data as serial data of the left and right differential systems between the boards from the peripheral control board 4140 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, a plus signal of the left audio data, Even when the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component carried on the positive signal and the noise component carried on the negative signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board into one left audio data, Since the noise components are canceled by canceling each other, it is possible to take noise countermeasures.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds calendar information that specifies the date and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is mainly composed of the RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter, referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa"). The RTC 4165a is adapted to be supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is adopted in this embodiment) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko machine 1) without being supplied with power from the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko machine 1). Thereby, the RTC 4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a and sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described above. The effect based on the EL display unit 1400 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 can be unfolded. As such an effect, for example, a screen of a Christmas tree or a reindeer is unfolded on the EL display unit 1400 and the plate liquid crystal display device 244 on December 25, or a screen for performing a New Year countdown on New Year's Eve. The EL display unit 1400 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 may be unfolded. The calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  In addition to the calendar information, the time information, and the brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores the calendar information, the time information, and the brightness setting information as the information of the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date information is also stored.

  Various information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date / time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa is set on the manufacturing line of the gaming machine manufacturer. In the manufacturing line, various tests such as a display test of the EL display unit 1400 are performed. Is set to the manufacturing date and time.

  As described above, the volume control volume is obtained by rotating the knob to adjust the volume of music, sound effects, and the like that flow from the speaker housed in the speaker unit 920 provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame. It can be adjusted. As described above, the resistance value of the volume adjusting volume is made variable by rotating the knob portion, and the peripherally controlled A / D converter 4150ak electrically connected to the volume control knob rotates the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of 1024 steps is divided into 7 and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 toward the board volume 6. The speaker accommodated in the speaker unit 920 provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame by controlling the display device and the sound control unit 4160 (VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source) so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6. Music and sound effects are played from.

  In this way, by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion, music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker housed in the speaker unit 920 provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame. In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk of the hall of occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity on the pachinko machine 1, and a game effect. The contents related to the above are notified (for example, the screen displayed on the EL display unit 1400 is rendered as a more powerful one, or there is a high possibility that the game state is advantageous to the player). A notification sound for this also flows from the speaker accommodated in the speaker unit 920 provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame, but the notification sound and the notification sound are totally dependent on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. It controls the display device and the sound control unit 4160 (VDP4160a with a built-in sound source) by a program to control the volume from mute to the maximum volume. So that the it can be adjusted.

  The volume adjusted by this program is different from the board volume divided into seven stages described above, and it is possible to smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, for example, even when a store clerk in the hall or the like rotates the knob of the volume adjusting volume to set the volume to a low level, the speaker and the door frame housed in the speaker unit 920 provided in the main body frame can be installed in the speaker and the door frame. Although the effect sound such as the music and the sound effect that flows from the provided speaker is reduced, the volume is high when the pachinko machine 1 is malfunctioning or the player is cheating (the maximum volume in the present embodiment). The notification sound set to () can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming less likely to notice a malfunction or a player's cheating by the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current board volume that is set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so that it does not interfere with music or sound effects, while The volume of the sound is increased to add music and sound effects, and the screen unfolded by the EL display unit 1400 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is rendered more powerful, or a game state advantageous for the player is entered. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility that

  In the present embodiment, the volume of music and sound effects are adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume, and in addition, the touch panel 246 of the operation unit and the upper plate effect button 257 are provided. By operating, you can switch to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the touch panel 246 or the upper plate effect button 257 of the operation unit is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the EL display unit 1400, and the customer waiting state is also displayed. When the touch panel 246 of the operation unit or the upper plate effect button 257 is operated during the period when the demonstration is performed by the EL display unit 1400, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the EL display unit 1400. It has become. By operating the touch panel 246 or the upper plate effect button 257 of the operation unit according to the screen of this setting mode, the volume of music or sound effect can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume adjusting volume from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is The board volume value can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the touch panel 246 of the operation unit or the upper plate effect button 257. The adjusted sound volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music and sound effect is included in a plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. However, the volume of the above-mentioned notification sound and notification sound is not reflected in the adjustment.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume, and the touch panel 246 or the upper plate effect button 257 of the operation unit is operated. There are two methods: a case where the volume of music or a sound effect is adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value. Since the volume control volume 4140a is mounted on the peripheral control board 4140, it is necessary to keep the main body frame open from the outer frame. Then, the store clerk can rotate the knob of the volume control knob. However, with the volume adjusted by the clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and may not hear the music or the sound effect, or the player may feel the music or sound effect to be loud and noisy. Therefore, within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the touch panel 246 of the operation unit or the upper plate effect button 257 is operated, or the EL display unit 1400 is in a waiting state and a demonstration is performed by the EL display unit 1400. In, when the touch panel 246 of the operation unit or the upper plate effect button 257 is operated, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the EL display unit 1400, and the touch panel 246 of the operation unit or the touch panel 246 of the operation unit is displayed according to the screen of the setting mode. By operating the upper plate effect button 257, the volume of music or sound effect can be adjusted to a desired volume. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the music or sound effect to a desired volume. Therefore, if the clerk in the hall feels the volume is low and it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect, the touch panel of the operation unit is used. 246 or the upper plate effect button 257 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired level. If the volume of the music is adjusted by the clerk in the hall and the music or sound effect is noisy, the touch panel 246 of the operation unit or The upper plate effect button 257 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is not playing a game for a predetermined period of time, waiting for customers, and repeatedly demonstrating by the EL display unit 1400 (for example, 10 times), The volume adjusted by the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing a game is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume is adjusted by the clerk in the hall, that is, the volume is adjusted by the clerk in the hall by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume. As a result, if the player who was seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and was playing a game felt the volume adjusted to be low and could not hear the music or the sound effect, the player was seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 this time. A player who plays a game can operate the touch panel 246 of the operation unit and the plate production button 257 to increase the volume to a desired volume, and the game that was previously performed by sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 is being played. When the person feels the adjusted volume to be loud and the music or the sound effect is noisy, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays a game operates the touch panel 246 or the upper plate production button 257 of the operation unit this time. Then, the volume can be reduced to a desired level.

  Next, various input / output signals input / output from the input / output terminals of various input / output ports of the payout control MPU 4120a will be described.

  The RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 4120a, receives the serial data from the main control board 4100 as the main pay serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 4120b. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, the serial data to be sent to the main control board 4100 is sent to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function as a payer serial data transmission signal. The payout control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function transmits a payer serial data transmission signal to the main control board 4100.

  To each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a, the above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, payout blackout notice signal, door open signal, full signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection) In addition to the input of signals 1 etc.), for example, the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 4100 for notifying the normal reception completion of the above-mentioned payment main serial data reception signal is sent via the payout control input circuit 4120b. For example, the detection signals from the out-of-ball switch 750, the counting switch 751, the rotation angle switch 752, and the like shown in FIG. 53 are input via the payout control input circuit 4120b.

  On the other hand, from each output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal are output to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function to output the EXS signal from the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 4120e, or the above-mentioned voltage switching signal is output to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function to output the voltage switching signal from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function to the voltage switching circuit 4120da. Output or output the payout motor drive signal to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function, and output the payout motor drive signal from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function to the payout motor 744 via the payout motor drive circuit 4120d. In addition to the above, for example, the payer ACK signal for notifying the normal reception completion of the main pay serial data reception signal described above is output to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function and paid out from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function. The main ACK signal is output to the main control board 4100, or the drive signal of the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. 53 is output to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to output the drive signal from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function. Is output to the error LED display device 860b.

  Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61. 58 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 59 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 59 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 59, and FIG. 61 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, the prize ball command, which is a command relating to payout, transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board will be described, and subsequently, various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described and received by the main control board. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

  When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives detection signals from the various winning switches such as the general winning opening switch 3020 starting opening switch 3022 and the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. Based on this, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicating with the pachinko machine 1 to drive the payout motor of the pachinko machine 1 (prize ball device 740) to pay out the game balls as a rental ball, which is a storage dish. When the device is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a “CR machine”), as shown in FIG. 58A, the main control board 4100 transmits the payout control board 4110. As the prize ball command, commands 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared. In the command 10H, one prize ball is designated, and in the command 11H, two prize balls are designated. The command 1EH specifies 15 prize balls, and the payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor to pay out the game balls by the specified number of prize balls.

In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 and the ball lending machine are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall) and the pachinko machine 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as “general 58B, the command balls 20H to 2EH are prepared as the prize ball commands to be transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110. One is designated, two prize balls are designated by the command 21H, ..., And 15 prize balls are designated by the command 2EH. The payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 to pay out game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

  As shown in FIG. 58C, a command 30H is prepared as a command common to CR machines and general machines, and self-check is designated in this command 30H. By transmitting the command 30H and checking whether the ACK signal is input, the transmitting side transmits the command 30H when the ACK signal to be output as the confirmation of the command reception is not input from the receiving side for a predetermined period after transmitting the command. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 4110 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

  Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), And a mode showing a variation of the effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  As shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, the various commands include special figure 1 synchronization effect related, special figure 2 synchronization effect related, jackpot related, power-on, general figure synchronization effect related, ordinary electric figure effect related, notification display, status It is divided into display and other.

  The special figure 1 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the starting port switch 3022 shown in FIG. 52, and its division is, as shown in FIG. 59, the first of the function display substrate 1191 shown in FIG. Concerning one special symbol display device 1185, it is composed of commands named special figure 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronization effect end, and fluctuation state designation. To these various commands, “A * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It is indicated in advance and is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 1 entrainment effect start command is for instructing the start of special figure entrainment effect in the effect pattern specified by the mode, and the special symbol 1 specifying command is for specifying a deviant, a specific big hit, or a non-specific big hit. The special figure 1 entrainment effect end command is for instructing the end of the special figure 1 entrainment effect, and the fluctuation state designation command is for instructing the probability and the time saving state.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 1 tuning effect start command is sent at the start of special symbol 1 fluctuation, the special symbol 1 designation command is sent immediately after the start of special figure 1 tuning effect, and the special figure 1 tuning The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information designation. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

  Special figure 2 synchronization effect-related, is based on the detection signal from the switch of the second starting port, in that section, as shown in FIG. 59, the second special symbol of the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. 52. The display 1186 is composed of commands with the names of special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end. To these various commands, “B * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode is assigned (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It is indicated in advance and is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 2 entrainment effect start command is for instructing the special figure entrainment effect start in the effect pattern specified by the mode, and the special symbol 2 specifying command is for specifying the deviating, specific big hit, non-specific big hit. The special figure 2 entrainment effect end is an instruction to end the special figure 2 entrainment effect.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command is sent at the time of starting the special symbol 2 variation, the special symbol 2 designation command is sent immediately after the start of the special figure 2 tuning effect, and the special figure 2 tuning The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). Incidentally, these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 59, the jackpot-related category includes jackpot opening, jackpot opening 1 Nth display, jackpot opening 1 closed display, jackpot opening 1 count display, jackpot ending, jackpot symbol display, jackpot opening , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending command. To these various commands, “C * H” is assigned as the status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It is indicated in advance and is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The big hit opening command is an instruction to start the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening Nth display command starts during the big winning opening 1 opening of the 1st to 16th rounds (the big winning opening 2003's Nth round). The special winning opening 1 closing display command indicates the opening of the special winning opening 1 between the rounds (the opening or closing of the special winning opening 2003 between the rounds). The special winning opening 1 count display command indicates that 0 to 10 counts have been counted (the number of game balls entered in the special winning opening 2003, detected by the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 52). The big hit ending command is for instructing the big hit ending start, and the big hit symbol display command is the big hit symbol information. It is an indication of the display.

  The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is for starting the small hit opening (during the opening or opening of the special winning opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 during the small hit). The small hit count display command is for the small hit medium big prize opening winning effect (when the game ball that entered the big winning opening 2003 during the small hit is detected by the count switch 2110). The small hit ending command is an instruction to start the small hit ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the start of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command is the big winning opening 1 opening of the 1st to 16th rounds (the big hit of the attacker unit 2000). The prize-winning hole 2003 is opened at the time of opening the Nth round), and the special winning opening 1 closing display command is sent when the special winning opening 1 is closed (the big winning opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 is closed), and the big winning is given. The mouth 1 count display command is used when the special winning opening 1 is opened and when the count to the special winning opening 1 is changed (when the special winning opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 is opened, and the game ball entering the big winning opening 2003 is a count switch). 2110), the jackpot ending command is sent when the jackpot ending starts. Sent, jackpot symbol display command is sent at the time of the special winning opening open (at the time of the opening of the special winning opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2000).

  The small hit opening command is transmitted when the small hit opening is started, and the small hit open display command is transmitted when the small hit is opened (when the special winning opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 is opened during the small hit). The hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning the small hit medium to large winning opening (when the game ball that entered the big winning opening 2003 is detected by the count switch 2110 during the small hit), and the small hit ending command is It is sent when the small hit ending starts. Incidentally, these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 59, the category of turning on the power is composed of various commands having the name of turning on the power. In this power-on command, "D * H" is assigned as the status, and "** H" ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It is indicated in advance and is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The power-on command is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, start of the effect when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated at the time of power-on shown in FIG. 53). Is something to instruct).

  As the transmission timing of the power-on command, it is transmitted at times other than RAM clear when the main control board power is turned on and RAM clear. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, at the time of recovery from a power failure or momentary power failure, and when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated, the main control side power-on processing described later is performed. The power-on command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

  The general figure tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 52, and the division is, as shown in FIG. 59, the general figure tuning relating to the ordinary pattern display device of the function display board. It is composed of commands named production start, general pattern designation, general figure synchronization production end, and fluctuation state designation. To these various commands, “E * H” is assigned as the status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It is indicated in advance and is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The universal figure synchronization effect start command is for instructing to start the universal figure synchronization effect in the effect pattern specified by the mode, and the universal symbol specification command is for specifying a falling edge, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronization effect end command is for instructing the end of the normal figure synchronization effect, and the variation state designation command is for instructing the probability and the time saving state.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the universal figure synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of the start of the normal symbol 1 variation, the universal symbol specification command is transmitted immediately after the start of the universal figure synchronization effect, and the universal figure synchronization effect end command is , Ordinary symbol variation time elapses (ordinary symbol confirmation), the state change command at the time of variation is transmitted immediately after the universal symbol winning information designation. Incidentally, these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

  The normal electric role effect-related relates to the movable piece 2005b which is opened / closed by driving the starting opening solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. 52, and its division is, as shown in FIG. It is composed of a command called display and ending per ordinary drawing. A status of “F * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It is indicated in advance and is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The universal command opening command is for instructing the opening of the universal map, and the universal battery open display command is for instructing to start during the universal battery open state (the movable piece is opened by driving the starting port solenoid). The ending command per universal figure is an instruction to start ending per universal figure.

  As for the timing of sending these various commands, the opening command per universal drawing is transmitted at the start of opening per universal drawing, and the universal power open display command is transmitted when universal power is opened (when the movable piece is opened by driving the starting port solenoid). ), The ending command per universal figure is transmitted at the start of ending per universal figure. Incidentally, these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 60, the notification display category is made up of commands such as winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. A status of “6 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The winning abnormality display command is issued when the player wins the big winning opening other than during the big hit (condition device is operating) (even when it is not a big hit, a game ball enters the big winning opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 and hits the game ball. When the count switch 2110 detects), the start of the prize abnormality notification is instructed, and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electrical connection in a path between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. When there is an abnormality, it is for instructing to start the connection abnormality notification, and the disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display command is, for example, disconnection of electrical connection between the main control board 4100, the starting port switch 3022, the count switch 2110, and the like.・ Instructs the start of disconnection / short circuit abnormality display when a short circuit occurs. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is shown in Fig. 52. It is an indication of the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection switch 3024.

  The door opening command is a state in which the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 4110. In this case, the door opening notification is instructed, and the door frame closing command is a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. To instruct the end of the door opening notification. On the other hand, the main body frame opening command opens the main body frame to the outer frame based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 which is input through the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. In this state, the body frame opening notification is instructed, and the body frame closing command is such that the body frame is closed to the outer frame based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619. In the case of the state, the end of the body frame opening notification is instructed.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the prize abnormality display command is transmitted when a prize is won in the special winning opening other than during the big hit (condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality display command is sent from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110. Is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 4110 at the time of sending a command to When the abnormality of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is detected, the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted. Further, the door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is in the opened state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The frame closing command is transmitted when the door closing is detected (when the door frame is closed with respect to the main body frame based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The body frame opening command is transmitted when the body frame opening is detected (when the body frame is opened to the outer frame based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619), and the body frame closing is performed. The command is transmitted when the closing of the main body frame is detected (when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619). Incidentally, these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 60, the status display section is made up of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to error occurrence command), error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to error cancellation command) and frame status 2 command. There is. A status of “7 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It is indicated in advance and is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands each having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 4110, and a detailed description thereof will be given later. . When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. 60, “7 * H” is set. The status is set as well as the received command is directly set as the mode. That is, when the main control MPU 4100a receives the frame status 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame status 2 command from the payout control board 4110, it adds the additional information “7 * H” to the received commands. Is formatted into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame status 1 command is sent when the power is restored, when the frame status is changed, and when the error clear navigation is used. The error clear navigation command is sent when the error clear navigation is used. The frame status 2 command is when the power is restored. , And when the frame status changes. The shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 60, the test-related section is made up of various commands named test. This test command is assigned a status of "8 * H" and a mode of "** H" ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. , Which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 4140 (for example, the peripheral control section 4150, the display device and sound control section 4160, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and Various boards such as the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 are inspected).

  As the transmission timing of the test command, the RAM is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on and when it is other than RAM clear. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, when a power failure or momentary power failure is restored, and when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated, the main control side power-on processing described later is performed. The test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

  In the other categories, as shown in FIG. 60, starting mouth winning, fluctuation shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 storage, special symbol 2 storage, normal symbol storage, special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect, and It is composed of a command called special symbol 2 memory prefetch effect. A status of "9 * H" and a mode of "** H" ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It is indicated in advance and is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The starting mouth winning command is for instructing to start the starting mouth winning effect, and when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2005c based on the detection signal from the starting opening switch 3022. The start of production is respectively instructed, and the fluctuation reduction operation end designation command is for instructing the state transition from the fluctuation reduction operation state to the fluctuation reduction non-operation state, and the high probability end designation command is The state transition from the probability state to the low probability state is instructed, and the special symbol 1 memory command is 0 to 4 special symbols 1 reserved (the game ball enters the first starting opening 2001 to display the function display board). It conveys the number of balls that have not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display (the number of reserves), and the special symbol 2 storage command is a special symbol 2 hold 0 to 4 (second start). A game ball enters the mouth 2005c, and the number of balls not yet used for variable display of special symbols (reserved number) is conveyed by the second special symbol display on the function display board. Normally, the symbol memory command is , 0 to 4 normal symbols reserved (the number of balls (reserved number) not yet used for variable display of normal symbols on the normal symbol indicator on the function display board after the game balls have passed through the normal gate 2005a) That is, the special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command is prefetched and based on the special symbol 1 hold before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display board. It is for instructing the pre-reading effect start to notify the advance notice of the display result by the first special symbol display device, and the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command is special in the second special symbol display device of the special symbol 2 hold function display board. Before being used in the variable display of the handle, it is an indication of the prefetch effect initiation of notifying the advance notice of the display result of the second special symbol indicator based on the special symbol 2 pending read ahead.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting opening winning command is the starting opening winning a prize (when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2001 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch, or the second starting). When the game ball enters the second starting port 2005c based on the detection signal from the mouth switch), mainly the sound is output from the speaker accommodated in the speaker unit 920 provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame. The fluctuation reduction operation end designation command is sent to notify that effect, and is sent at the end of the suspension period (after the lapse of the discontinuance suspension period) after the fluctuation has been fixed after the prescribed number of fluctuation reductions has been exhausted. Is transmitted at the end of the stop period (after the elapse of the discontinuation stop period) after the fluctuation is confirmed, which has digested the high probability number in the case of “high probability N times”, and the special symbol 1 storage command is the special symbol 1 When the number of dynamic holding balls changes (in the state where there is a holding number that is not yet used for variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display of the function display board with the game balls entering the first starting port 2001, When the game ball enters the second starting port 2005c and the number of holdings increases, or when the number of holdings decreases from the number of holdings by using the variable display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display) The special symbol 2 memory command is transmitted, when the special symbol 2 operation holding ball number changes (the game ball enters the second starting port 2005c and the variable display of the special symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display device of the function display board. In the state where there is a number of reserves that have not been used yet, when the game ball enters the second starting port 2005c and the number of reserves increases, and the number of reserves changes the display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display device. Used when the number of holdings has decreased) Transmitted, the normal symbol storage command, when the number of normal symbols 1 actuation hold ball changes (usually the game sphere passes through the gate 2005a, the normal symbol display on the function display board is not used yet for the variable display of the normal symbol. In the state where there is a number, when the game ball passes through the gate part further and the number of holdings increases, or when the number of holdings decreases from the number of holdings used for the variable display of the normal symbol display normal symbol) The special symbol 1 memory prefetch effect command is transmitted, when the special symbol 1 operation holding ball number increases (when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2001 and the holding number increases), the special symbol 2 memory The prefetch effect command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 operation holding ball number increases (when the game ball enters the second starting opening 2005c and the holding number increases). Incidentally, these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

  By the way, as described above, the start opening winning command is used to notify the user by voice mainly from the speaker housed in the speaker unit 920 provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame at the time of starting opening winning. Although transmitted, how the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 55 uses the start opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is used not only to notify by voice from a speaker housed in the speaker unit 920 provided in the main body frame and a speaker provided in the door frame but also to monitor the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. It is designed to do. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 4140 simply receives the start opening winning command, and a voice is output from the speaker accommodated in the speaker unit 920 provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame. Some specifications do not notify.

  Next, various commands from the payout control board 4110 received by the main control board 4100 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 4110 is made up of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2; frame state 1, error release navigation, and The priority order is set in the order of the frame state 2.

  The frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command) has a ball out, full tank, stock of 50 or more, abnormal connection and CR not connected. Bit 0 (B0, "B") when ball is out. Represents a bit), the value 1 is set in a full tank, the value 1 is set in the bit 1 (B1), the value 1 is set in the bit 2 (B2) in 50 or more stocks, and the connection error occurs. The value 1 is set in the bit 3 (B3), and the value 1 is set in the bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. A value 1 is set in B5, a value 0 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7 in bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command.

  The error clear navigation command (corresponding to the error clear command) has a ball ball, a counting switch error, and a retry error. In the ball ball, bit 2 (B2) is set to the value 1; The value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) in the case of a retry error. Here, the "counting switch error" indicates whether or not the malfunction of the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. 53 has occurred. The “retry error” indicates that the payout of game balls that are not consistent due to the retry operation is repeated. In bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command, B0 has a value 0, B1 has a value 0, B5 has a value 0, and B6 has a value 1. The value 0 is set in B7.

  For the frame state 2 command, the inside of the ball is prepared, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during the inside of the ball. In bit 1 (B1) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command, B1 has a value of 0, B2 has a value of 0, B3 has a value of 0, B4 has a value of 0, B5 has a value of 1, B6 has a value of 1, and The value 0 is set in B7.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted at the time of power restoration, when the frame state is changed, and at the time of error cancellation navigation, and the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted at the time of error cancellation navigation and the frame status 2 command. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame status changes. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

  Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 74. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing in the main control board. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a power failure occurs. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interrupt processing. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of the special control process. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the starting mouth winning process. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of the changing process.

  Further, FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit game start processing. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an example of a small hit game start process. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit game process. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game process. The timer interrupt process is executed by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in this embodiment). FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram showing a table configuration in the special symbol random number storage means.

  In the main processing, as shown in FIG. 62, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU 4100a executes power-on processing (step S1). In this power-on process, it is determined whether the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is normal (is the set value at the time of power failure), and if it is normal. If the backup data is abnormal, the RAM is cleared and the device settings around the CPU are set (normal initial settings). , Interrupt timing, etc.).

  When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored in the RAM as backup data. If the RAM clear switch for instructing to clear the backup data stored in the RAM is turned on in the power-on process, the RAM is cleared and normal initialization is performed. Further, in the power-on process, if backup data is not stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a), the RAM is cleared and normal initialization is performed.

  Further, in the power-on process, a process of setting a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 is activated to the peripheral control board 4140 to a transmittable state when the normal initialization is executed is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control board 4140 that the main control board 4100 has started. In addition, even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (for example, when the power is turned off) when the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed, the backup data is stored in the RAM, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is restored. When the supply is started, the power-on process is executed.

  When this power-on process ends, the main control MPU 4100a starts a loop process that repeatedly executes each process for games. At the start of this loop processing, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is detected (step S2). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply board. That is, since a plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate at different power supply voltages, respectively, after converting the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 into a predetermined power supply voltage on the power supply board, Supply to the device. Then, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board to the main control board 4100 is stopped. Sent. Then, when the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 detects the power failure advance notice signal in step S2, the power failure occurrence process is executed (step S4).

  This power failure occurrence process is performed when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board after the power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery), the operation of the gaming machine is in the state before the power failure. This is a process of storing the state at the time of power failure as backup data in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) to start from. Although the processing contents will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power failure occurrence processing is not an interrupt processing but a branch processing executed immediately after the start of the loop according to the presence or absence of the power failure warning signal detection. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

  By the way, when the power failure notice signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, a random number update process 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step S3). The random number updated in the random number update process 2 will be described later.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63, the power failure occurrence process is a process executed when a power failure advance notice signal is detected in the main process. The main control MPU 4100a first makes an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S4a). Then, the checksum of the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM before the power failure is retained when the power is restored.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a sets, in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM, a stipulated value indicating that the processing at the time of power failure occurred (step S4c). After the above processing is completed, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits access to the RAM (step S4d) and enters an infinite loop to prepare for the stop of power supply. In addition, in this process, when the power failure occurrence process is started due to the power supply voltage becoming unstable due to a power failure for a very short time (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power failure”), Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, the above process may not be able to return from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main control MPU 4100a of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset unless the watchdog timer is updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is regularly updated while the processing is normally performed, but the processing is started when the power is cut off and is not updated. As a result, even if the power-off occurrence process is started due to the momentary power failure and the infinite loop is entered, the main control MPU 4100a is activated in the same process as when the power is turned on, after the predetermined period has elapsed.

  Next, in the timer interrupt process, the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 during the execution of the main process, and as shown in FIG. The control MPU 4100a executes the process of saving the registers (step S10), and then executes the processes of steps S11 to S18. In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring the detection signals of the above-mentioned switches (gate switch, starting opening sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number update process 1 of step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the random number update process 1 is different from the random number updated in the random number update process 2 described above. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the random number updating process 2 may be updated in the random number updating process 1. In the payout operation process of step S13, a payout command for instructing the payout of gaming balls is set to the payout control board 4110 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

  Further, in the normal control process of step S14, the normal symbol is changed based on the progress state of the game, and the normal electric accessory (movable piece 2005b) is controlled to change the opening / closing state of the second starting opening 2005c. To execute. In the special control process of step S15, the first special symbol (first identification symbol) and the second special symbol (second identification symbol) are variably displayed on the special symbol display devices 641 and 642 based on the progress state of the game, The special electric accessory (that is, the opening / closing member 2006 that opens and closes the special winning opening 2003 by the attacker solenoid) is controlled to execute a process of changing the open / closed state of the special winning opening 2003.

  In the output data setting process of the subsequent step S16, a process of outputting a state signal indicating a game state to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a management computer), a drive signal is output to a special figure starting memory display (not shown). Processing, and so on. In the command transmission process of step S17, a process of transmitting an effect command to the peripheral control board 4140 is executed. Further, in the command transmission process, a process of transmitting the power-on command set in the power-on process (step S1) when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started to the peripheral control board 4140 is also performed. When the processes of steps S11 to S17 are executed, the register restoration process (step S18) is executed, and the process ends.

  Here, various random numbers updated by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 in the random number update process 1 (step S12) and the random number update process 2 (step S3) described above will be described. In this embodiment, as various random numbers used in the game, a big hit determination random number used in the judgment of whether or not to generate a big hit game state (also called big hit judgment, big hit lottery), a big hit game state in the big hit judgment When it is determined to generate a special symbol stop symbol (a symbol associated with the type of jackpot (probability variation jackpot, number of rounds, etc.)), the jackpot random number for jackpot symbol, jackpot lottery Reach determination random number, special symbol display 641, used for determination (reach determination) as to whether or not to perform high-expectation production such as reach production when it is determined that it is neither big hit nor small hit (miss) Random display pattern random numbers (variation time randomness) used to determine the variation display pattern (variation time, etc.) of the special symbol displayed in 642. ) Average per determining random number used for determining whether to control the movable piece in an open state to open and close the second start hole 2005c (usually lottery per determination), and the like. In addition, the reach indicates a state in which the left and right decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the EL display unit 1400 have the same left and right decorative symbols stopped and the middle decorative symbol is not yet stopped, The reach effect indicates an effect executed during the reach of the decorative pattern.

  Further, as will be described later, the random number for jackpot determination according to this embodiment is also used to determine whether or not a specific condition, which is performed when it is determined that a jackpot is lost (miss). To be done. In addition, the random number for the jackpot design is the type of jackpot that is performed when it is determined that the jackpot has been won. It is also used for the determination regarding the type of jackpot in which the opening mode of 2003 is determined.

  Among these random numbers, in the random number update process 1, a big hit determination random number related to the occurrence of a big hit game state, a big hit symbol random number, and a normal symbol hit determination random number related to whether to control the movable piece 2005b in the open state. Update. That is, the random number used for determining whether the big hit game state occurs and whether or not the movable piece 2005b is controlled to the open state is updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing so, the probability (probability of determining that a big hit game state is generated, probability of determining that the movable piece is controlled to be in the open state) for each random number can be made constant, and the player Can be prevented from becoming a disadvantageous state. On the other hand, in the random number update process 2, the jackpot gaming state is generated, and the reach determination random number not related to the ordinary lottery and the variable display pattern random number are updated.

  Next, the special control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of the special control process.

  In this special control process, first, a first / second starting mouth winning process (step S110) is performed. In the first / second starting opening winning process, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won in the first starting opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2005c. After the first / second starting mouth winning process (step S110) is performed, a process corresponding to the state of the process flag is selectively selected from among a plurality of processes shown in the figure (steps S120 to S230). Will be done.

  More specifically, when the first / second starting mouth winning process (step S110) is completed, it is first determined whether the process flag is 0 (step S120), and if the process flag is 0 ( If YES in step S120), the fluctuation start process (step S130) is executed. In this variation start process (step S130), after the setting for starting the variable display of the special symbol based on the result of the big hit lottery, the process flag is updated to "1".

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 (NO in step S120), it is determined whether the processing flag is 1 (step S140). As a result, if the process flag is 1 (YES in step S140), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator (either the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator) In, the processing flag is updated to "2" after the variation time from the start of variable display of the special symbol (identification symbol) to the stop display is determined).

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140), it is determined whether the processing flag is 2 (step S170). As a result, if the process flag is 2 (YES in step S170), the changing process (step S180) is executed. In this changing process, the changing time set in the changing pattern setting process (step S150) is monitored by the timer, and the special symbol in the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device is based on the time-out. Stop the variable display. After that, when it is determined in the variation start process (step S130) that the big hit is won, the process selection flag is updated to "3". On the other hand, when it is determined that a specific condition is satisfied although the big hit is lost, the process selection flag is updated to "4" when it is determined that the specific condition is met (the small hit is won). However, when the jackpot is lost and the specific condition is not satisfied (pure loss), the process selection flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the process starts again from the fluctuation start process (step S130).

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S170), it is determined whether the processing flag is 3 (step S190). As a result, if the processing flag is 3 (YES in step S190), the big hit game start processing (step S200) is executed. In this jackpot game start processing, the type of jackpot is determined, and after the opening mode (the number of rounds, the opening time, the number of winning restrictions on game balls, etc.) at the jackpot 2003 according to the type is set, the processing flag is set. Updated to "5". On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S190 (NO in step S190), the process proceeds to step S210.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S190), it is determined whether the processing flag is 4 (step S210). As a result, if the process flag is 4 (YES in step S210), the small hit game start process (step S220) is executed. In this small hit game start processing, after the opening mode (the number of times of opening and the opening time for controlling the opening operation of the opening / closing member 2006, etc.) in the special winning opening 2003 corresponding to the small hit is set, the processing flag is set to "6". Will be updated.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 4 (NO in step S210), it is determined whether the processing flag is 5 (step S230). As a result, if the processing flag is 5 (YES in step S230), the big hit game process (step S240) is executed. In this big hit game process, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2006 is controlled based on the opening mode of the special winning opening 2003 set in the big hit game starting process (step S200). In addition, when the big hit game ends, the processing flag is updated to "0" after the determination as to whether to activate the probability varying function or the time saving function. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the process starts again from the fluctuation start process (step S130).

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 5 (NO in step S230), the processing flag is 6 and the small hit game processing (step S250) is executed. In this small hit game process (step S250), the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2006 is controlled based on the opening mode of the special winning opening 2003 set in the small hit game start process (step S220). In addition, when the small hitting game processing ends, the processing flag is updated to "0", that is, in this case, in the next interrupt processing, the fluctuation start processing (step S130) is performed again.

  In this way, the special control process is performed when any of the processes of step S130, step S150, step S180, step S200, step S220, step S240, and step S250 is selectively executed based on the state of the process flag. Is ended.

  Next, the first / second starting opening winning process (the process of step S110) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing an example of the first / second starting mouth winning process.

  In the first / second starting opening winning process (step S110), roughly, there is a process of determining whether or not a game ball has been won in the first starting opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2005c, and the winning. On condition that it is determined that there is, a process related to updating the pending state of the corresponding special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is performed.

  Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the detection signal is output from the second starting opening sensor. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the second starting opening sensor (switch), it is determined that the game ball is won in the second starting opening 2005c (YES in step S201), Next, the process of step S202 is performed. In the process of step S202, various random numbers for the second jackpot lottery are obtained (a jackpot determination random number, a jackpot symbol random number, etc.), and a second hold is provided in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU4100a). It is determined whether or not the value of the number counter is less than 4, which is the upper limit value. As a result, if the second hold number counter is less than 4, the second start hold storage process (step S203) and the hold history update process (step S204) are sequentially performed.

  That is, in this case, the main control MPU4100a, first, as a second start pending storage process (step S203), various data obtained by winning the game ball in the second start opening 2005c (random number for jackpot determination, jackpot symbol) Random numbers, etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with the types of special symbols and the order of reservation. Next, as the hold history update process (step S204), 1 is added to the counter value of the second hold number counter provided in the RAM.

  In the process of step 203, a winning notification command indicating that there is a winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2005c (more accurately, the type of the special symbol, the holding order, etc.) is set, and The set prize notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the command transmission process (step S17) described above. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to promptly update the EL display unit 1400 and the like when performing the hold display on the second starting opening 2005c side through the control of the peripheral control board 4140.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S201 that the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor is not output, or in the process of step S202, the value of the second holding number counter becomes the upper limit value. If it is determined that, the next step S205 is to determine whether or not the detection signal is output from the first starting opening sensor. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the first starting opening sensor, it is determined that the game ball is won in the first starting opening 2001 (YES in step S205), and then The process of step S206 is performed. In the process of step S206, various random numbers for the first jackpot lottery (random numbers for jackpot determination, jackpot symbols, etc.) are acquired, and the value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is the upper limit. It is determined whether or not the value is less than 4. As a result, if the first hold number counter is less than 4, the first start hold storage process (step S207) and the hold history update process (step S208) are sequentially performed.

  That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first, as the first start pending storage process (step S207), various data acquired by the game ball winning the first start opening 2001 (random number for jackpot determination, jackpot symbol random number) Etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with the types of special symbols and the order of reservation. Next, as the holding history update processing (step S208), 1 is added to the counter value of the first holding number counter provided in the RAM.

  Even in the process of step 207, a winning notification command indicating that there is a winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 2001 (more accurately, the type of the special symbol, the holding order, etc.) is set, and The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the command transmission process (step S17) described above. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to update the EL display unit 1400 and the like promptly even in the case of performing the hold display on the first starting opening 2001 side through the control by the peripheral control board 4140.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S205 that there is no winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 2001, or in the process of step S206, the counter value of the first holding number counter becomes the upper limit value. When it is determined that the number has reached 4, the first and second starting opening winning processing is ended at this point.

  In this embodiment, after the winning process for the second starting port 2005c (steps S201 to S204) is executed, the winning process for the first starting port 2001 (steps S205 to S208) is executed. There is. However, instead of this, a mode in which the winning process to the second starting port 2005c is performed after the winning process to the first starting port 2001 may be performed.

  In addition, the main control MPU 4100a may execute a leading determination process based on the acquired various random numbers, and may send a command indicating the result of the leading determination process to the peripheral control board 4140 as a winning notification command. The preceding determination process is performed prior to the lottery using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 (for example, the jackpot lottery, the probability variation lottery, the small hit lottery, and the determination of the variable display pattern, which will be described later). This is a process for determining. The leading determination process is performed using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 and the leading determination table. The precedence determination table is the same table as the table used for the lottery using the random number. In the precedence determination process, by comparing the random number with the precedence determination table, a lottery result when the lottery using the random number is performed (whether or not the big hit or the small hit, the kind of the big hit, the variation display pattern, etc.) ) Is determined (the determination performed in advance of the lottery is also referred to as “prefetch determination”). The peripheral control board 4140 may realize an effect that reflects the received winning notification command (advance determination result) before the lottery using the random number is performed (such an effect is "prefetching". It is also called "directing").

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the content of the advance determination table is the same as the content of the table used for the lottery. However, at least a part of the content of the advance determination table may be different from the content of the table used for the lottery.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits a winning notification command indicating the result of the preceding determination process only when the game state satisfies a specific condition, and when the game state does not satisfy the specific condition, the main determination MPU4100a You may transmit the winning notification command which does not show a result. For example, when the variable display due to the winning in the first starting opening 2001 is not started immediately after the winning and is suspended, the main control MPU 4100a sends a winning notification command indicating the result of the preceding determination process regarding the winning. You may send it. Here, in the big hit game state and the time saving game state, the main control MPU 4100a does not transmit the prize notification command indicating the result of the preceding determination process, but transmits the prize notification command indicating the result of the preceding determination process. You may. The specific conditions regarding the second starting port 2005c may be the same.

  In the fluctuation start process (step S130) executed when the process flag is “0”, the main control MPU 4100a first sets the values of the two reserved number counters corresponding to the special symbol displays 641 and 642 (first starting memory). It is determined whether both the number and the second starting memory number are "0" (step S301). Here, with the value in the two pending number counters corresponding to the special symbol display 641,642, the storage area for the first starting memory and the second starting memory (special symbol random number storage means 4515, 4532 (see FIG. 74) ), The number of the random number values stored in each of the two numbers is stored in the step S301. When it is determined that none of the starting conditions are satisfied, and the process flag is updated to "1" as the process of step S318, the fluctuation start process ends.

  On the other hand, if neither the first starting memory number nor the second starting memory number is "0" (NO in step S301), to update the order of executing the jackpot lottery that is held, for special symbols Shift processing in the random number storage means 4515, 4532 is performed (steps S302 to S310).

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 is provided with four storage areas (storage area [1] 4515a to storage area [4] 4515d), These storage areas are respectively associated with the values of the first starting storage number (“1” to “4”). As shown in FIG. 74 (b), the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 is also provided with four storage areas (storage area [1] 4532a to storage area [4] 4532d), The storage areas are respectively associated with the values of the second starting storage number (“1” to “4”). Each of the storage areas 4515a to 4515d and 4532a to 4532d stores a big hit determination random number storage area 4580 in which big hit determination random numbers are stored, a big hit design random number, a reach determination random number, a variation display pattern random number, and the like. And a big hit symbol random number storage area 4581 are provided respectively.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a appropriately operates the random numbers stored in the storage means 4515, 4532 as a shift process (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area when the special symbol changes. However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the big hit is won by the lottery process on the first special symbol side, and when the big hit is won by the lottery process on the second special symbol side Although there is no difference in the expected value of the profit given to the player (number of award balls that can be obtained, etc.), in the lottery process on the first special symbol side, it is a hit (small hit) without operating the condition device. While there are cases where you may be won, in the lottery process on the second special symbol side, the probability of winning the small hit is "0%", so only the lottery process on the second special symbol side is executed. As long as it is done, the small hit game state is not generated.

  In this respect, in the shift process in the random number storage area (steps S302 to S310), the execution of the lottery for the first special symbol is always postponed, and the hit (small hit) without the operation of the condition device is not won. The random numbers stored in the storage means 4515 and 4532 are operated so that all the lottery (lottery of the second special symbol) based on the winning of the second starting opening 2005c is completed first. As a result, only the game (lottery on the second special symbol side) under which the above-mentioned small hit is not won will be sequentially performed until the number of holdings on the second special symbol side is interrupted and becomes "0". Will be able to. In addition, as will be described later, in the gaming state in which the so-called time saving function operates, the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol, which is the first digested side, is not interrupted so that the pending state of the lottery (variation) is not interrupted. Since the control is performed so that the frequency of changing the game balls into the state where the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 2005c, which is the execution trigger, is increased, only the second special symbol side lottery (variation) is continuously executed. This makes it difficult for the player to notice that a small hit is mounted on the pachinko machine 1.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 74, in the shift process (step S302 to step S310) in the random number storage area, first, as the process of step S302, the second special symbol that is the side that is preferentially consumed. Whether or not the value of the holding number counter (second starting memory number) corresponding to the display device 642 is "0", that is, the random number is stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532. Determine if not. As a result, when it is determined that the random number is stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 (NO in step S302), the second from the storage area [1] 4532a. A random number related to the special symbol is read and acquired (step S303). That is, as will be described later, the random numbers thus read out (random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for jackpot symbols, random numbers for reach determination, random display pattern random numbers) are, of course, processes related to lottery for jackpots, as well as fluctuation patterns of special symbols (variation (Time, stop display mode, etc.), processing for setting the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing member 2006, processing for setting the game state, etc. The second starting game that is triggered by the winning of the ball can be progressed.

  Then, the main control MPU4100a, in order to update the digestion order involved in the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side, each of the n-th (n is a natural number of 2 or more) storage area (storage area [2] 4532b to storage area) [4] The various random numbers stored in 4532d) are respectively shifted to the (n-1) th storage area (storage area [1] 4532a to storage area [3] 4532c) (step S304). As a result, at least the storage area [4] 4532d becomes free, and new start information (holding) for the second special symbol can be stored in this storage area [4] 4532d.

Then, after this, the main control MPU4100a sets the special symbol variation flag to "1" so that the game on the second special symbol side (second starting game) is shown to be in a state of being advanced (step S305). ). Furthermore, in order to update the number of reservations involved in the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side, the number of reservations counter corresponding to the second special symbol is decremented by "1" (step S306). Further, at this time, the drive control for lighting the lamp is performed so that the number of holdings for the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side updated in this way is also reflected in the lighting mode of the second special symbol memory display 644. Be seen. The special symbol variation flag set to "1" is reset when the processing flag is updated to "0" after the variation start process ends.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 74, in the process of step S302, when it is determined that the random number is not stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532, (YES in step S302), the random number relating to the first special symbol is read out from the storage area [1] 4515a of the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 and is acquired (step S307). That is, as will be described later, the random numbers thus read out are not only processing related to the jackpot lottery but also processing related to the setting of the variation pattern of the special symbol, processing related to the setting of the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing member 2006, and the setting of the game state. By being subjected to the processing according to, etc., the first starting game triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 2001 can be progressed.

  Then, the main control MPU4100a, in order to update the digestion order of the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side, each n-th (n is a natural number of 2 or more) storage area (storage area [2] 4515b to storage area) [4] Various random numbers stored in 4515d) are respectively shifted to the (n-1) th storage area (storage area [1] 4515a to storage area [3] 4515c) (step S308). As a result, at least the storage area [4] 4515d becomes vacant, and new start information (holding) for the first special symbol can be stored in this storage area [4] 4515d.

  Then, after this, the main control MPU4100a, the game on the first special symbol side (first starting game) is set so that the special symbol variation flag is set to "2" so that it is in a state of being advanced (step S309). ). Furthermore, in order to update the number of reservations related to the first special symbol side lottery (variation), the number of reservations counter corresponding to the first special symbol is decremented by "1" (step S310). At this time, the drive control for lighting the lamp 643 so that the number of holdings for the lottery (variation) on the side of the first special symbol thus updated is also reflected in the lighting mode of the first special symbol memory display 643. Is done. The special symbol variation flag set to "2" in this way is also reset after the variation start process is completed, for example, when the process flag is updated to "0".

  After that, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is operating, that is, whether or not the probability variation state has a high probability (step S312), and if it is not the probability variation state (NO in step S312), the probability variation is not activated. The big hit determination table, that is, the table in which the probability of being a big hit is set to be low is selected. Select a table that is set high. In this example, the probability of being a big hit is set to 1/400 when the probability fluctuation is not activated (that is, the normal time), and the probability of being a big hit is 10 when the probability fluctuation is activated (that is, the high probability). It is set to / 400.

  In the processing of step S313 or step S314, after any table is selected, based on the table, the jackpot determination random number relating to any of the special symbols acquired in the processing of step S303 or step S307 is a big hit. It is determined whether or not it is a random number (big hit value) corresponding to (step S315 (big hit lottery)). Then, in the case of a big hit value (YES in step S315), the type of big hit is determined based on the big hit symbol random number relating to any of the special symbols, which is also acquired in the process of step S303 or step S307. (Step S316). After that, the flag corresponding to the type of big hit is turned on (set) (step S317), and the process proceeds to step S318.

  On the other hand, when the obtained random number is a loss that is not the big hit value (NO in step S315), it is determined whether or not the random number is a random number (small hit value) corresponding to the small hit (step S319). If it is the small hit value (YES in step S319), the small hit flag is set to "ON" (step S320), assuming that the predetermined specific condition is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S318. However, if it is not the small hit value (NO in step S319), it is determined that the predetermined specific condition is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S318 without passing through step S320. In step S318, the process flag is updated to "1", and the fluctuation start process ends. In this example, the probability of a small hit is set to 3/400 regardless of the gaming state.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, regardless of whether the lottery is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, a random number for the big hit symbol is generated in a random number range of 0 to 99, for example. Numerical values are prepared, and in the processing of step S303 or step S307, one of these random number values is acquired as the value of the big hit symbol random number. Then, the obtained random number value is provided to the process of determining the type of the big hit in the process of step S316. For example, if the random number value is 0 to 52, the big hit A is determined. If it is 53 to 57, it is judged to be a big hit B, if it is 58 to 63, it is judged to be a big hit C, if it is 64 to 81, it is judged to be a big hit D, and if it is 82 to 99, it is judged to be a big hit E. .

  According to such a determination method, as shown in FIG. 75, the probability of determining that the type of big hit (hit accompanying the operation of the condition device) is “big hit A” is “53%”, and the type of big hit is The probability of being judged as "big hit B" is "5%", the probability that the kind of big hit is judged as "big hit C" is "6%", and the kind of big hit is "big hit D", "big hit" The probabilities of being judged as “E” are “18%”, respectively.

  Here, when the "big hit A" is won, regardless of the gaming state at the time of being hit, after the big hit game corresponding to the winning of the big hit A is performed, the probability variation function and the time saving function (open) Both of the extended functions) are activated and controlled to a positive variation external advantageous gaming state. In the big hit game corresponding to the winning of the big hit A, opening / closing of the opening / closing member 2006 is performed as a long open hit game which is repeated many times (16 times in this embodiment) in a long-time opening / closing pattern. The long-time opening / closing pattern means that a predetermined long time (for example, 26 seconds to 33 seconds) elapses after the opening / closing member 2006 is changed from the closed state to the open state, or a predetermined large number (for example, 10 pieces). The game ball of No. 3 wins the special winning opening 2003, and if any of the conditions is satisfied, the opening / closing member 2006 is returned to the closed state. In this long-time opening / closing pattern, the time for which the opening / closing member 2006 is in the open state is longer than the time for which the opening / closing member 2006 is in the open state in the short time opening / closing pattern described below. That is, in the long-distance-per-play game, a large amount of award balls (about 1750 in this embodiment) can be substantially acquired by the player as a privilege.

  On the other hand, even if "big hit B" is won, regardless of the gaming state when the big hit B is hit, after the big hit game corresponding to the win of the big hit B is played, the probability variation function and the time saving function ( Both the opening extension function) are activated and controlled to a positive variation external advantageous gaming state. However, in the big hit game corresponding to the winning of the big hit B, the opening and closing of the opening / closing member 2006 is performed as a medium open hit game which is repeated a few times (9 times in this embodiment) in a long-time opening / closing pattern. . That is, in the game per medium opening, a medium amount of prize balls (about 1000 pieces in the present embodiment) can be substantially acquired by the player as a privilege.

  On the other hand, when the "big hit C" is won, the big hit game corresponding to the winning of the big hit C is provided only when the game state at the time of being selected is the "external advantageous playing state in which the time saving function operates". After being performed, the probability variation function and the time saving function (open extension function) are both controlled to a positive variation external advantageous gaming state in which they operate. However, when the gaming state at the time of the corresponding selection is not the "external advantageous gaming state in which the time saving function operates", after the big hit game corresponding to the winning of the big hit C, the probability variation function and the time saving function (open extension) Function), and is controlled to a high-probability game state (probability variation external disadvantage game state) in which only the probability variation function operates. In the big hit game corresponding to the win of the big hit C, the opening and closing of the opening / closing member 2006 is performed as the above-mentioned middle open hit game in which the opening / closing member 2006 is repeated a few times (9 times in this embodiment) in a long-time opening / closing pattern.

  On the other hand, when the "big hit D" is won, regardless of the gaming state at the time of the corresponding win, after the big hit game corresponding to the winning of the big hit D is performed, the probability variation function and the time saving function (open) Of the extended function), only the probability variation function is controlled to a high-probability game state (probability variation external disadvantage game state). In the big hit game corresponding to the win of the big hit D, the opening / closing of the opening / closing member 2006 is repeated as a medium open hit game which is repeated a few times in the long-time opening / closing pattern (9 times in this embodiment).

  On the other hand, when "big hit E" is won, regardless of the gaming state when the big hit E is hit, after the big hit game corresponding to the win of the big hit E is played, the probability variation function and the time saving function (open extension) It is controlled to the normal game state (normal external disadvantage game state) in which neither of the functions) operates. In the big hit game corresponding to the winning of the big hit E, the opening and closing of the opening and closing member 2006 is performed as the above-mentioned middle open hit game which is repeated a few times (in this embodiment, nine times) in a long-time opening and closing pattern.

  By the way, when such a big hit A to E (a hit involving the operation of the condition device) is selected as a small hit (a hit without the operation of the condition device), the opening / closing member 2006 is opened / closed for a short time. Only a small opening per game (small hit game) that is repeated a few times in the pattern (two times in the present embodiment) is performed, and the same game as before the small opening per game (small hit game) is performed. There is no difference in the game state afterwards. The small time opening / closing pattern means that a predetermined small time (for example, 3 seconds to 6 seconds) has passed after the opening / closing member 2006 is changed from the closed state to the open state, or a predetermined small number (for example, 2) of games. This is a pattern in which the opening / closing member 2006 is returned to the closed state when any condition of winning the ball at the special winning opening 2003 is satisfied. That is, in the small opening game (small hit game), the opening and closing member 2006 operates because only a small amount of prize balls (about 40 to 50 balls in this embodiment) can be practically acquired by the player as a privilege. However, it can be said that attention should be paid to the handling (positioning) in the game design in that the interest of the game may deteriorate.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine according to this embodiment, "big hit A" to "big hit E" are prepared as types of hits (big hits) accompanied by the operation of the condition device. Therefore, the process of step S317 will be described in more detail. When the type of the big hit is "big hit A", the big hit flag A is turned on (set), and when it is "big hit B", the big hit flag B is turned on (set). ), The big hit flag C is turned on (set) when it is "big hit C", the big hit flag D is turned on (set) when it is "big hit D", and the big hit flag E is turned on when it is "big hit E". It will be in the ON state (set).

  Next, the variation pattern setting process in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is set based on the result of the big hit lottery (step S315) and the like will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process.

  As shown in FIG. 68, in the variation pattern setting process (step S150) executed when the process flag is “1”, the main control MPU 4100a first sets the jackpot flag to “ON” as the process of step S401. Or not. As a result, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is “ON” (YES in step S401), the jackpot variation pattern table setting process described below is performed so that the variation pattern when the jackpot is won is set. Perform (step S402).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S401 that the big hit flag is not "ON", then it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is "ON" as the process of step S403. As a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is "ON" (YES in step S403), the small hit is won because it is a loss but the specific condition is satisfied. In order to set the fluctuation pattern at this time, a small hitting fluctuation pattern table setting process described later is performed (step S404).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S403 that the small hit flag is not “ON”, next, as a process of step S405, a high-expected effect (eg, reach effect) with a high expectation of winning the big hit. Decide whether to do. In the process of step S405, for example, when the reach determination random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 67) has a predetermined hit value, it is determined that the high expectation effect is performed, and the acquired reach is obtained. When the random number for determination is not the predetermined winning value, it is determined that the high-anticipated effect is not performed. Then, as a result, if it is determined that the high-expectation effect should be performed (YES in step S405), the high-expectation loss variation pattern table setting process described below is performed so that the variation pattern for performing the high-expectation effect is set. Perform (step S406).

  Regarding the number of predetermined winning values prepared for the random number for reach determination, the normal external disadvantage game state (probability change function, time saving function are both inactive), normal external advantageous game state (only time saving function is active) , The probability variation external disadvantageous gaming state (only the probability variation function operates), and the probability variation external advantageous gaming state (both the probability variation function and the time saving function operate) may be different for each game state. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the normal external disadvantage game state, the probability that it is determined that the high expectation performance should be performed based on the reach determination random number being a predetermined hit value is It is "1/12", but in the normal external advantageous game state or the probability variation external advantageous game state, the expectation at the time of reach is further improved (or efficient hold digestion is performed). Alternatively, it may be determined that the high-estimation performance should be performed with a lower probability. On the contrary, in the probability change external disadvantage game state, it is determined that the high expectation performance should be performed with a higher probability so that the possibility of being a big hit can be noticed more frequently. Good.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S405, if it is determined that the high-expectation effect with a high expectation of winning the big hit should not be performed (NO in step S405), the variation pattern of the deviation when the high-expectation effect is not performed. In order to set (normal loss variation pattern), low-expected loss variation pattern table setting processing is performed (step S407).

  Here, the table set in the low expected loss variation pattern table setting process is prepared in such a manner as to be associated with each of a plurality of game states, and for example, in the normal game state, the number of holdings is a predetermined value. When the above is the case, the shortening fluctuation is performed.

  However, in the gaming state in which the time saving function operates, the variation time is set so that the number held for the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side where the chance of winning a small hit is "0" is hard to break off. It is set. More specifically, when the number held on the side of the second special symbol is less than or equal to a predetermined value, the shortening variation is not adopted despite the gaming state in which the time saving function operates, and the shortening variation is adopted in the normal gaming state. Only the fluctuation time having a length equal to or longer than the fluctuation time when not played (variation time longer than the shortened fluctuation in the normal gaming state) is selected. Also, for the fluctuation time of the first special symbol side, regardless of the number of holdings, the shortened fluctuation is not adopted, and only the fluctuation time having a length equal to or longer than the fluctuation time when the shortened fluctuation is not adopted in the normal gaming state Is to be selected. As a result, when in the gaming state in which the time saving function operates, it is possible to suppress the holding of the first special symbol side that can win the small hit, and thus the small hit to the pachinko machine 1 concerned. It becomes possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that it is installed.

  Then, as will be described later, as shown in FIG. 68, when the selection table relating to the variation pattern is set in any of the processes of step S402, step S404, step S406, and step S407, the main control MPU 4100a Next, as the process of step S410, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the set selection table. Next, as the process of step S411, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol thus determined is set as an effect command, and the winning information is determined based on the states of the big hit flag (step S317) and the small hit flag (step S320). Set a command (a win or a win, or a command indicating the winning type including a small win).

  Furthermore, the value of the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is set to ON (step S413). When this special figure LED operation flag is set to ON, based on the value of the special symbol variation flag set in the process of step S305 or step S309, the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display The variable display of the lighting pattern of the plurality of LEDs as a container is started. Then, after that, the processing flag is updated to "2" (step S414), and the fluctuation pattern setting processing ends.

  By the way, the variation pattern set by the variation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 64 as an effect command set in the process of step S411. . Thereby, in the EL display unit 1400, the result of the big hit lottery is shown through the control described later by the peripheral control board 4140 side based on the variation pattern shown by the effect command and the information shown by the winning information command. The display effect will be performed.

  However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (small hit) without the operation of the condition device, the display effect in the EL display unit 1400 is set as described above. Without ending within the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern, extended to the period after the stop of the fluctuation display related to the lighting pattern of the plurality of LEDs as the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device (production time After being extended), it may be executed so as to indicate that the winning (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device has been lost (extended effect pattern of FIG. 84 (b)). That is, in this case, after the special symbol is stopped, when the small open hit game is executed, the display effect that incites the winning of the prize ball does not appear, and it is relatively early after it is shown that the big hit is lost. It becomes possible to shift to the next change (holding of special symbols), and it is possible to preferably avoid a time delay that may have some expectation as an effect until the opening / closing member 2006 operates. Become.

  Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in contrast to the above-described display effect (extended loss effect) at the time of a small hit, which indicates that the jackpot is lost after the special symbol is stopped, A display effect (extended jackpot effect) that shows that the jackpot is won after the symbol is stopped is also prepared. That is, when the result of the big hit lottery is a win accompanied by the operation of the condition device (big hit), the display effect in the EL display unit 1400 is not ended within the change time of the set change pattern, and the first special After being extended to the period after the stop of the variable display related to the lighting pattern of the plurality of LEDs as the symbol display device or the second special symbol display device, the win (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device was won. The extension effect pattern of FIG. 84 (b) can be executed as shown in FIG.

  That is, in this case, the above-mentioned display effect at the time of small hit is positioned as a mere loss effect (high expected loss variation pattern) that appears when the big hit is lost. As a result, it becomes difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a hit (small hit) that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and thus the opening / closing member 2006 operates according to the winning of the small hit. Can be suppressed.

  However, as the function display unit of the pachinko machine 1, instead of the 7-segment LED, eight LED groups which do not form a specific symbol may be adopted. In this example, the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device configured by 7-segment LED, each configured by eight LED groups. Further, the first special symbol memory display and the second special symbol memory display, each constituted by four LED groups, and the normal symbol memory display is constituted by two LEDs.

  In addition to being able to achieve the same effect as the above with this functional display unit, the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device are configured by eight LED groups without any symbols. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player, as compared with the case of using the 7-segment LED having the meaning of the numeral symbols. Therefore, it is difficult to understand what is displayed on the function display unit, so it is possible to prevent the display of the function display unit from becoming distracting during the game, making it difficult to concentrate on the game. The game can be made more entertaining by devoting it to the production image and the like.

When such a function display unit is adopted, regarding the lighting mode (when the special symbol is stopped) of the plurality of LEDs (the special symbol) when the small hit is won, the plural LEDs (the special symbol) when the big hit is won It is desirable to control so as to appear as modes similar to each other, such as a difference only from whether or not one LED is lit from the lighting mode of (pattern) (when the special pattern is stopped). That is, in this case, when the display effect in the EL display unit 1400 is extended to the period after the stop of the special symbol, the result is immediate even if the same symbol (a plurality of LEDs) is viewed (at least after the effect extension. It will be difficult to understand until a short time elapses before the winning is clearly indicated). Therefore, it is possible to concentrate on the same extended display effect (extended effect), and it is possible to extend the special symbol (plural LEDs) to the period after the special symbol is stopped due to the diminished interest in the special symbol. Even a displayed display effect can be made difficult for the player to recognize. As a result, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a small hit due to the peculiarity when the extension effect appears, and accordingly, depending on the winning of the small hit. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the operation of the opening / closing member 2006.

  Next, the variation pattern determination process at the time of a big hit will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a list diagram showing an example of the large hit variation pattern table T1 in the normal time, the small hit variation pattern table T2 in the normal time, and the high expected loss variation pattern table T3 in the normal time. In addition, ○ in the win / loss column of FIG. 76 means a big hit, △ means satisfaction of a specific condition at the time of loss (small hit), and × means failure of the specific condition at the time of loss (pure loss). means.

  As described above, if it is determined that the big hit flag is ON in the process of step S401 (see FIG. 68), the main control MPU 4100a is won as a big hit as the process of step S402 (see FIG. 68). The big hit variation pattern table setting process is performed so that the variation pattern when the jackpot is set is set.

  In this jackpot fluctuation pattern table setting process, first, the normal external disadvantage game state (probability change function, neither time saving function is inactive), normal external advantageous game state (only time saving function operates), probability variation external disadvantage game state (only probability changing function) Operation), and the probability change external advantageous game state (probability change function, both the time saving function is operated) to determine which is in the game state. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a different jackpot variation pattern table (not shown in the figure) is prepared for each gaming state, and a normal external disadvantage gaming state (probability variation function, time saving function is non-existent). When it is determined that it is in the "operation", the normal big hit variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 76 is selected regardless of the kind of big hit.

  Then, as described above, when the normal big hit variation pattern table T1 is selected in this way, the main control MPU 4100a obtains the processing in step S303 (see FIG. 67) while referring to the selected table T1. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number (step S410). In addition, the stop (lighting) mode of the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device (LED) is also determined here.

  Here, assuming that values of “0” to “99” can be obtained as the variable display pattern random number of the special symbol, the values of “0” to “99” in the normal jackpot fluctuation pattern table T1. Among them, 9 specific values are assigned to the variation number 1 (variation time Ta1) (selection rate 9% at the time of big hit), and 20 specific values are assigned to the variation number 5 (variation time Tb1). (The selection rate at the time of big hit is 20%), 30 specific values are allocated to the change number 9 (change time Tc1) (selection rate at the time of big hit 30%), and 40 specific values are The variation number 12 (variation time Td1) is assigned (selection rate at the time of big hit 40%), and one specific value is assigned to the variation number 15 (variation time Te) (selection rate at the time of big hit 1) %). As described above, except for the variation number 15 that determines the big hit, the number to which a specific value (big hit value) is assigned tends to increase as the variation number increases.

  As will be described later, when the variation number 1 (variation time Ta1) is selected, it is shown that the jackpot is won while the effect content "a (or a ')" appears in the EL display unit 1400. When the variation effect 5 (variation time Tb1) is selected and the effect content "b (or b ')" appears in the EL display unit 1400, the jackpot is won. When the display effect is displayed and variation number 9 (variation time Tc1) is selected, the jackpot is won in the EL display unit 1400 with the production content “c (or c ′)” appearing. When the display effect indicating that the change is performed and the change number 12 (change time Td1) is selected, the effect content “d (or d ′) ”appears, a display effect indicating that the jackpot is won is performed, and when the variation number 15 (variation time Te1) is selected, the effect content“ e ”is displayed on the EL display unit 1400. The display effect is shown to show that the jackpot has been won. By the way, the effect contents a, the effect contents a ′, the effect contents b, the effect contents b ′, the effect contents c, the effect contents c ′, the effect contents d, the effect contents d ′, and the effect contents e are all displayed on the EL display unit 1400. Different types of display effects (for example, types of reach effects and types of story effects) that appear as are displayed.

  Also, as will be described later, as the length of the fluctuation time, the fluctuation time Tb1 is longer than the fluctuation time Ta1, the fluctuation time Tc1 is longer than the fluctuation time Tb1, and the fluctuation time Tc1 is longer than the fluctuation time Tc1. Also, the variation time Td1 is longer, and the variation time Te is longer than the variation time Td1.

  Then, as described above, in such a normal big hit variation pattern table T1, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 67). , The production command associated with the determined variation pattern (for example, the command “01H” for variation number 1) and the winning information command (the winning type including the winning or the winning or the small hit). And (commands shown) are set (step S411). Furthermore, the value of the variation time (for example, variation time Ta1 if variation number 1) associated with the determined variation pattern is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is turned on. This is set (step S413), and the processing flag is updated to "2" (step S414).

  On the other hand, when performing the jackpot variation pattern table setting process, when it is determined that the gaming state is different from the normal external disadvantage gaming state, the jackpot variation pattern table associated with the determined gaming state is selected. Then, the variation pattern is determined based on the selected table and various commands are set in accordance with the determined variation pattern, but this description is omitted.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the normal external disadvantage game state, whether the jackpot is won by the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side or the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side Regardless, it was decided to select the jackpot variation pattern table T1 in the normal time, but when the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side and the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side are performed By selecting the big hit variation pattern table having different contents, different display effects may be displayed.

  Also, when it is determined that the normal external disadvantage game state (probability change function, time saving function are both non-operation), regardless of the type of big hit, the normal big hit variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 76 is selected. However, any one of the normal big hit variation pattern tables prepared for each big hit type may be selectively used based on the state of the big hit flag according to the big hit type.

  That is, in this case, it becomes possible to make the selection rate of the variation pattern different depending on the type of big hit, and when a particular variation pattern appears, there is a bias such as increasing the probability of being a big hit of a particular type. Like In addition, even if the variation time is the same, the variation number (effect command) can be made different according to the type of jackpot. In this case, by checking the effect command, the variation pattern and , It will be possible to grasp the type of jackpot. Therefore, by comparing the effect command and the winning information command on the peripheral control board 4140 side to determine the appropriateness thereof, the reliability of communication with the main control board 4100 is improved. Will be able to.

  Next, the variation pattern determination process at the time of a small hit will be described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, if it is determined that the small hit flag is ON in the process of step S403 (see FIG. 68), the main control MPU 4100a determines that the small hit is to be performed as the process of step S404 (see FIG. 68). The small hit variation pattern table setting process is performed so that the variation pattern when being won is set.

  In this small hit variation pattern table setting process, first, a normal external disadvantage game state (probability change function, neither time saving function is in operation), normal external advantageous game state (only time saving function operates), probability change external disadvantage game state (probability change function) Only)), and the probability variation external advantageous game state (probability variation function, both time saving function is activated) to determine which of the gaming state. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a different small hit variation pattern table (not shown in the figure) is prepared for each gaming state, and a normal external disadvantage gaming state (probability variation function, time saving function are both provided. When it is determined that it is in non-operation, the normal small hitting variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 76 is selected.

  Then, as described above, when the normal small hit variation pattern table T2 is selected in this way, the main control MPU 4100a refers to the selected table T2 and acquires it in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 67). The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number thus generated (step S410). In addition, the stop (lighting) mode of the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device (LED) is also determined here.

  Here, assuming that values of “0” to “99”, for example, can be acquired as the variable display pattern random number of the special symbol, in the small hit variation pattern table T2 in the normal time, these values of “0” to “99” can be obtained. Of the values, 35 specific values are assigned to the variation number 2 (variation time Ta2) (selection rate at the time of a small hit is 35%), and 30 specific values are variation number 6 (variation time Tb2). Is assigned to each of the small hits (selection rate of 30%), and 30 specific values are assigned to variation number 10 (variation time Tc2) (selection rate of 20% when small hits). A specific value is assigned to the variation number 13 (variation time Td2) (selection rate at the time of a small hit is 5%). In this way, as the fluctuation number increases, the number to which a specific value (small hit value) is assigned tends to decrease.

  Note that, as will be described later, when the variation number 2 (variation time Ta2) is selected, a display showing the result of the jackpot lottery while the effect content "a (or a ')" appears in the EL display unit 1400. When the production is performed and the variation number 6 (variation time Tb2) is selected, a display showing the result of the jackpot lottery while the production content "b (or b ')" appears in the EL display unit 1400. When the production is performed and the variation number 10 (variation time Tc2) is selected, a display showing the result of the jackpot lottery with the production content "c (or c ')" appearing in the EL display unit 1400. When the production is performed and the variation number 13 (variation time Td2) is selected, the production content “d (or d ′)” appears in the EL display unit 1400. Display production which jackpot lottery results are shown in Moto you are is carried out. By the way, as such a display effect showing the result of the big hit lottery, for example, a display effect showing that the big hit is lost, or a game state in which prize balls can be obtained by the operation of the opening / closing member 2006 A display effect that indicates to do (a display effect that appears even when a big hit is won) or the like is appropriately adopted.

  Also, as will be described later, as the length of the fluctuation time, the fluctuation time Ta2 is set as a time (same or approximate time) matched with the fluctuation time Ta1 as a reference. When the time Ta1 (variation number 1) or the variation time Ta2 (variation number 2) is selected, the result "a (or a ')" appears, and any result is obtained as a jackpot lottery. The pair's direction about whether or not it appears appears. Further, the fluctuation time Tb2 is set as a time (same or approximate time) matched with the fluctuation time Tb1 as a reference, and the fluctuation time Tb1 (variation number 5) and the fluctuation time Tb2 (variation). When the number 6) is selected, the effect contents "b (or b ')" appear in each case, and a pair of effects about what kind of result is obtained as the jackpot lottery. The fluctuation time Tc2 is set as a time (same or similar time) matched with the fluctuation time Tc1 as a reference, and the fluctuation time Tc1 (variation number 9) and the fluctuation time Tc2 (variation). When the number 10) is selected, the effect contents “c (or c ′)” appear in each case, and a pair of effects about what kind of result is obtained as the jackpot lottery. The fluctuation time Td2 is set as a time (same or similar time) matched with the fluctuation time Td1 as a reference, and the fluctuation time Td1 (variation number 12) and the fluctuation time Td2 (variation). When the number 13) is selected, the effect contents "d (or d ')" appear in each case, and a pair of effects about what kind of result is obtained as the jackpot lottery.

Then, as described above, in such a normal small hit variation pattern table T2, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 67). And an effect command associated with the determined variation pattern (for example, the command “02H” for variation number 2) and a winning information command (the winning type including winning / winning for a win and small win). And a command indicating) (step S411). Furthermore, the value of the variation time (for example, variation time Ta2 if variation number 2) associated with the determined variation pattern is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is turned on. Set (Step S41
3), the processing flag is updated to "2" (step S414).

  On the other hand, when performing the small hit variation pattern table setting process, when it is determined that the gaming state is different from the normal external disadvantage gaming state, the small hit variation pattern table associated with the determined gaming state Will be selected, a variation pattern will be determined based on the selected table, and various commands will be set in accordance with the determined variation pattern, but this description will be omitted. However, when the small hit is won in the gaming state in which the time saving function operates (external advantageous gaming state), a single variation pattern is determined, and the display processing is performed without any feeling of expectation (for example, pure loss). It is desirable that the same display processing as that of the low expected performance at the time) is performed.

  Next, the variation pattern determination process at the time of high-expected performance will be described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, if it is determined in the process of step S405 (see FIG. 68) that the high-expectation performance should be performed, the main control MPU 4100a determines that high-expectation is to be performed as the process of step S406 (see FIG. 68). In order to set the variation pattern for performing the effect, the high-expected loss variation pattern table setting process is performed (step S406).

  Also in this high-expected loss variation pattern table setting processing, first, the normal external disadvantage game state (probability change function, neither time saving function is in operation), normal external advantageous game state (only time saving function operates), probability change external disadvantage game state ( Only the probability variation function is operated) and the probability variation external advantageous game state (both the probability variation function and the time saving function are activated) is determined. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a different high-expected loss variation pattern table (not shown) is prepared for each gaming state, and a normal external disadvantage gaming state (probability variation function, time saving function is When it is determined that the high expected loss variation pattern table T3 in the normal state shown in FIG. 76 is selected.

  Then, as described above, when the normal high expected loss variation pattern table T3 is selected in this way, the main control MPU 4100a refers to the selected table T3 and executes the process in step S303 (see FIG. 67). The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the obtained variation display pattern random number (step S410). In addition, here, the stop (lighting) mode of the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 (LED) is also determined.

  Here, assuming that values of "0" to "99" can be acquired as the variable display pattern random number of the special symbol, in the high expectation loss variation pattern table T3 in the normal time, these "0" to "99" Among the values of, 40 specific values are assigned to the variation number 3 (variation time Ta3) (selection rate at high expected loss 40%), and 17 specific values are variation number 4 (variation time Ta3). Ta4) (selection rate at high expected loss 17%), and 25 specific values are assigned to variation number 7 (variation time Tb3) (selection rate at high expected loss 25%). , 13 specific values are assigned to the variation number 8 (variation time Tb4) (selectivity at high expected loss 13%), and 3 specific values are assigned to the variation number 11 (variation time Tc3). (Selection rate when high expectations are lost %), Selectivity of 2% during the two specific values are assigned to the change number 14 (variable time Td3) (High disappointing). In this way, as the fluctuation number increases, the number to which a specific value (missing value) is assigned tends to decrease.

  As will be described later, when the variation number 3 (variation time Ta3) is selected, it is defeated as a jackpot while the effect content "a, no development (or a ')" appears in the EL display unit 1400. When the display effect is displayed and the variation number 4 (variation time Ta4) is selected, the jackpot is defeated in the EL display unit 1400 with the production content “a, with development” appearing. Or a display effect indicating that the jackpot is lost while the effect content “c ′” appears in the EL display unit 1400, and the variation number 7 (variation time Tb3) is selected. When it is played, it is shown that the jackpot was lost to the jackpot while the effect content "b, no development (or b ')" appears on the EL display unit 1400. When the display effect is performed, and the variation number 8 (variation time Tb4) is selected, it is indicated that the jackpot was lost to the jackpot while the effect content "b, developed" appears on the EL display unit 1400. When the display effect, or the display effect indicating that the jackpot is lost while the effect content “d ′” appears in the EL display unit 1400, and the variation number 11 (variation time Tc3) is selected, , The display effect indicating that the jackpot is lost while the effect content “c (or c ′)” appears in the EL display unit 1400, and the change number 14 (change time Td3) is selected. In this case, a display performance showing that the jackpot was won while the effect content "d (or d ')" appears in the EL display unit 1400. It is carried out. By the way, as will be described later, in the case of the variation numbers 4 and 8, it appears as a loss effect pattern with different effect contents depending on the control mode on the peripheral control board 4140 side. Since the variation numbers of the jackpot effect pattern, which is a pair of variation numbers 4 and 8, are changed between the variation numbers 1 and 5 and the variation numbers 9 and 12, the control mode on the peripheral control board 4140 side is set. Accordingly, it becomes possible to make the effect patterns with different jackpot expectations appear.

  Further, as will be described later, as the length of the fluctuation time, the fluctuation time Ta3 is set as a time (same or approximate time) matched with the fluctuation time Ta1 as a reference, When the time Ta1 (variation number 1), the variation time Ta2 (variation number 2), or the variation time Ta3 (variation number 3) is selected, the production content “a” appears, and it is used as a jackpot lottery. A pair of presentations will appear as to whether the results were obtained. However, when the variation time Ta1 (variation number 1) or the variation time Ta2 (variation number 2) is selected, the effect content "a" is displayed even before the opening period before the special winning opening 2003 is opened and closed by the opening / closing member 2006. Since such an effect may be extended, a variation time Ta4 (variation number 4) longer than the variation time Ta3 (variation number 3) is prepared as a paired loss production pattern when such an extension effect is performed. ing. The variation time Ta4 (variation number 4) is also set as a time (same or approximate time) matched with the variation time Tc3 (variation number 11) as a reference. Depending on the control on the control board 4140 side, it can also be used as an effect pattern of the variation time Tc3 (variation number 11). As described above, the variation number of the big hit production pattern, which is a pair of the variation number 4 of the loss effect pattern, is changed between the variation number 1 and the variation number 9 as described above.

  Furthermore, the variation time Tb3 is set as a time (same or approximate time) matched with the variation time Tb1 as a reference, and the variation time Tb1 (variation number 5) and the variation time Tb2 ( When the variation number 6) and the variation time Tb3 (variation number 7) are selected, the production content "b" appears in each case, and a pair of productions regarding what kind of result is obtained as the jackpot lottery appears. However, when the variation time Tb1 (variation number 5) or the variation time Tb2 (variation number 6) is selected, the effect content "b" is displayed even before the opening period before the special winning opening 2003 is opened / closed by the opening / closing member 2006. Since such an effect may be extended, a variation time period Tb4 (variation number 8) longer than the variation time period Tb3 (variation number 7) is prepared as a paired loss production pattern when such an extension effect is performed. ing. The variation time Tb4 (variation number 8) is also set as a time (same or approximate time) matched with the variation time Td3 (variation number 14) as a reference. Depending on the control on the control board 4140 side, it can also be used as an effect pattern of the variation time Td3 (variation number 14). As described above, as a result, the variation number of the big hit production pattern, which forms a pair with the variation number 8 of the lost production pattern, is changed between the variation number 5 and the variation number 12.

  Then, as described above, in such a high expected loss variation pattern table T3 in the normal time, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 67). Then, the effect command associated with the determined variation pattern (for example, if the variation number is 3, the command "03H") and the winning information command (the winning or losing per win, including the small win). And a command indicating a seed) are set (step S411). Furthermore, the value of the variation time (for example, variation time Ta3 if variation number 3) associated with the determined variation pattern is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is turned on. This is set (step S413), and the processing flag is updated to "2" (step S414).

  On the other hand, when performing the big hit variation pattern table setting process, when it is determined that the gaming state is different from the normal external disadvantaged gaming state, the high expected variation pattern table associated with the determined gaming state is set. The selection is made, the variation pattern is determined based on the selected table, and various commands are set according to the determined variation pattern, but the description thereof is omitted.

  According to the large hit variation pattern table T1 in the normal time, the small hit variation pattern table T2 in the normal time, and the high expectation loss variation pattern table T3 in the normal time, the big hit expectation degree is higher than the display effect b. Is higher, the display effect c is higher than the display effect b, the display effect d is higher than the display effect c, and the display effect e is higher than the display effect d. In particular, since the display effect e can appear only when the big hit is won, it is confirmed that the big hit is won when the same effect e appears.

  Next, the changing process (step S180) executed when the process flag is “2” will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of the changing process.

  As shown in FIG. 69, in the changing process (step S180), the main control MPU 4100a firstly, as the process of step S501, the changing time set in the timer in the process of step S412 (see FIG. 68). Will determine if the time has expired. If the changing time set in the timer has not expired (NO in step S501), the changing process ends.

  If the variable time set in the timer is up (YES in step S501), the special figure LED operation flag set to ON in the process of step S413 is set to OFF (step S502). When this special figure LED operation flag is set to OFF, based on the value of the special symbol variation flag set in the processing of step S305 or step S309, the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display The variation display (variation of the special symbol) related to the lighting pattern of the plurality of LEDs as the container will be ended. Further, when the EL display unit 1400 is performing the display effect for the big hit lottery, in order to end the display effect, the confirmation stop command indicating that the effect result in the same display effect should be confirmed and displayed is displayed on the peripheral control board 4140. Is set (step S503). The confirmation stop command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the EL display unit 1400, the effect result in the same display effect is confirmed and displayed through the control described later by the peripheral control board 4140 side. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, depending on the control mode of the peripheral control board 4140, the display effect on the EL display unit 1400 is not ended even though the confirmation stop command is received, and the opening period after that is completed. It is as described above that the display effect may be controlled to be extended.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON (step S504). If the big hit flag is ON (YES in step S504), the processing flag is updated to "3" because it is in the processing stage in which the special symbol is variably stopped so as to indicate that the big hit is won (step S505). , The process during the change ends.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not ON and the lose is a big hit (NO in step S504), it is determined in step S506 whether or not the small hit flag is ON. If the small hit flag is ON (YES in step S506), the processing flag is updated to "4" because it is in the processing stage in which the special symbol is variably stopped to indicate that the small hit has been won (step S506). (S507), the changing process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the small hit flag is not ON and is a pure loss (a loss in which the specific condition is not satisfied) (NO in step S506), it is indicated that the big hit and the small hit have been lost. The processing flag is updated to "0" as the symbol is in the processing stage in which the variation is stopped (step S508), and the variation processing is ended. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation of the special symbol is performed on condition that it is held and consumed in the process of step S130.

  Next, the jackpot game start processing (step S200) executed when the processing flag is "3" will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit game start processing.

  As shown in FIG. 70, in the jackpot game start process (step S200), the main control MPU 4100a first activates the condition device as the process of step S601. Next, as the processing of step S2602, a function (probability variation function) for increasing the winning probability of a hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device is activated during the normal external disadvantage game state or the normal external advantage game state ( It is determined whether or not there is a probability fluctuation state). As a result, when it is determined that the probability variation external disadvantage game state or the probability variation external advantageous game state is in the game state and the probability variation function is operating (YES in step S602), this probability variation function The operation is stopped (step S603).

  Then, next, as the processing of step S604, while the operation of the probability varying function is stopped in this way, the function (time saving function) for facilitating the game ball to enter the second starting opening 2005c is in operation (time saving game state). Or not. In addition, when it is not determined in the process of step S602 that the probability varying function is operating, the process proceeds to step S604 without executing the process of step S603. As a result, when it is determined that the normal external advantageous gaming state or the probability variation external advantageous gaming state is in the gaming state and the time saving function is operating (YES in step S604), the operation of the time saving function is activated. It is stopped (step S605).

  Then, next, in order to carry out the big hit game while the operation of the probability varying function and the time saving function are both stopped, as a process of step S606, the big winning opening 2003 is repeatedly opened in the big hit game. The maximum number of times (16 or 9 times in this embodiment), the upper limit number (predetermined large number) that a game ball can enter the special winning opening 2003 in each round, and each round The opening mode in the big hit game is set such as the opening / closing operation time limit of the opening / closing member 2006 in the game (a predetermined long time of the long time opening / closing pattern). That is, in the process of step S606, the type of the big hit is first determined based on the big hit flag set in the process of step S317 (see FIG. 67). Then, information related to the "open mode in the big hit game" prepared in association with each type of big hit (big hit A to big hit E) thus determined is read from the ROM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) or the like. It is read, and the read information is set. As a result, the big hit game can be executed in the above-described opening mode according to the type of big hit (big hit A to big hit E). If it is not determined in the process of step S604 that the time saving function is operating, the process of step S606 is performed without executing the process of step S605.

  Then, prior to the big hit game being played, an interval effect before the big hit game is played (for example, an opening effect such as "Congratulations" or a challenge bonus effect such as "A chance to win a ball!") Is executed. As possible, a big hit time interval effect command that indicates the time from the stop of the special symbol to the start of the special bonus game (big hit game) is set (step S607). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the big hit is won, the display effect on the EL display unit 1400 is extended to the period after the stop of the special symbol (as described above. Since the extension effect) can be executed, the interval effect command set in this way is also prepared based on this. In other words, in relation to the time required for the extended effect that appears even when the small hit is won, only the interval effect command indicating a specific fixed time (for example, 8 seconds) is set regardless of the type of the big hit. Then, the interval effect command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 74, so that at a specific fixed time (for example, 8 seconds) indicated by the command. In the EL display unit 1400, either the interval effect as described above or the extension effect as described above is selectively performed through the control on the peripheral control board 4140 side, which will be described later.

  Next, an interval effect timer (for example, 8 seconds) associated with the interval effect command set in the process of step S607 is set (step S608), and the process flag is updated to "5" (step S609). , The jackpot game start processing is ended.

  Next, the small hit game start processing (step S220) executed when the processing flag is "4" will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an example of a small hit game start process.

  As shown in FIG. 71, in the small hit game start process (step S220), the main control MPU 4100a first performs the small open hit game (small hit game) as the same small hit as the process of step S701. The number of times the special winning opening 2003 is repeatedly opened in the game (two times in this embodiment), the maximum number (predetermined small number) of allowing the game ball to enter the special winning opening 2003 at the time of opening, , The opening mode in the small opening hit game (small hit game) is set, such as the opening / closing operation time limit (small time opening / closing pattern) of the opening / closing member 2006 when opening.

  Then, before the small opening hit game (small hit game) is performed, an interval effect (for example, a challenge bonus effect such as "a chance to win a ball!") Before the small game is performed can be executed. As described above, the interval effect command at the time of the small hit indicating the time from the stop of the special symbol to the start of the small bonus game (small hit game) is set (step S702). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the small hit is won, the display effect on the EL display unit 1400 is extended to the period after the stop of the special symbol (as described above). Since the extension effect) can be executed, the interval effect command set in this way is also prepared based on this. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in relation to the time required for the extension effect that appears even when the big hit is won, regardless of the symbol random number (random number for the big hit symbol) at the time of the small hit, a certain fixed time (for example, Only the interval effect command indicating 8 seconds) is set. It is possible to prevent the presence of a small hit from being guessed by the time setting when the extension effect appears, and eventually the opening and closing member 2006 operates according to the winning of the small hit, which lowers the enjoyment of the game. Can be suppressed.

  Next, an interval effect timer (for example, 8 seconds) associated with the interval effect command set in the process of step S702 is set (step S703), and the process flag is updated to "6" (step S704). , The small hit game start processing ends.

  As will be described later, the interval effect command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 64, so that in the EL display unit 1400, the peripheral control board 4140 side. Through the control described later, the interval effect is performed for the time indicated by the interval effect command.

  Next, the jackpot game process (step S240) executed when the process flag is "5" will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit game process.

  As shown in FIG. 72, in the big hit game process (step S240), the main control MPU 4100a first sets a big hit game flag indicating that the big hit game is already being performed as the process of step S801. It is determined whether or not it is in the ON state (set).

  Here, this big hit game flag is operated to the OFF state when it is in the processing situation immediately after shifting to the big hit game process (step S240). Therefore, when it is in the processing situation immediately after shifting to the big hit game process (step S240), it is determined that the big hit game flag is not in the ON state (set) (NO in step S801), and then the process of step S802. I do.

  In the process of this step S802, whether or not the above-mentioned interval effect (opening effect for confirming the big hit, challenge bonus effect for confirming the opening of the special winning opening 2003 (confirming execution of the bonus game), or extension effect) has been finished, that is, the above. It is determined whether or not the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) set in the process of step S607 (see FIG. 70) has expired. The interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) has not timed up, and the above-described interval effect (opening effect for confirming the big hit, challenge bonus effect for confirming the opening of the special winning opening 2003, or extension effect) is still being executed. In this case (NO in step S802), the jackpot game process is temporarily ended, and the process of steps S801 and S802 waits until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) times out (repeating the interrupt process). It will be.

  However, in the main control MPU 4100a according to the present embodiment, even if the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) times out as a result of performing such processing (YES in step S802), this is the only big hit. Judgment as to whether or not the game ball has passed through the effective gate 6010n (specific entrance) after the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) has been timed up so that the game does not start. Is performed (step S803). As a result, if it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the valid gate 6010n, the jackpot game process is once ended, and the process waits until it is determined in step S803 that the game ball has passed through the valid gate 6010n ( By repeating the interrupt process), the opening / closing means 2006 of the special winning opening 2003 until the game ball is accepted by the effective gate 6010n after the time (8 seconds in this case) predetermined by the interval effect timer has expired. The extension maintenance control is performed in the closed state without operating the.

  According to the extension control for the closing control period of the big winning opening 2003, the closing control period from when the special symbol is stopped based on the fact that the big hit is won until the big hit game is started (opening / closing member 2006 In the period during which the special symbol is maintained and controlled), the time from when the special symbol is stopped until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) is timed up is "predetermined after the special symbol is stopped and displayed. When the first closing control period having the given length "is set (step S802), after the first closing control period elapses, the" second closing control period having an indefinite length "is set. "Close control period of" appears further (step S803). Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel effect by mutually utilizing the attribute as the closing control period having the predetermined length and the attribute as the closing control period having the indefinite length. .

  More specifically, for the first closing control period (here, 8 seconds), for example, as described above, this addition time is used as the addition time with the change time of the change pattern of the special symbol set above. As one unit, it is possible to realize an effect using an attribute as a closing control period having a predetermined length, such as extending the display effect in the EL display unit 1400 with respect to the variable display of the special symbol. become able to. In addition, as will be described later, in this embodiment, the display effect related to the big hit lottery may be executed with the effect content for the time obtained by adding the variation time of the special symbol and the first closing control period. There is. On the other hand, for the second closing control period (here, the time until the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n), for example, a long movie until the opening / closing member 2006 operates using the same period is EL. By using the display unit 1400, it is possible to realize an effect using an attribute as a closing control period having an indefinite length. That is, for the second closed control period (here, the time until the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n), it is possible for the player to appropriately end the synchronization period. Even when a redundant effect is realized, it is possible to widen the range of the effect without causing an adverse effect such as a decrease in amusement of the game due to the delay of the effect.

  Then, as a result of such processing, when it is determined in the processing of step S803 that the game ball has passed through the effective gate 6010n, the bonus continuous operation device is activated to cause a big hit (with the operation of the condition device). The operation of the opening / closing member 2006 according to the winning of the (hit) (big hit game) shifts to a state where it is possible. That is, in this case, the main control MPU4100a, as the process of step S804, sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit game is started, and the big hit game indicating that the big hit game is already being performed. The middle flag is operated (set) to the ON state, and then the process proceeds to step S805.

  That is, as will be described later, the jackpot start command thus set is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 64, so that in the EL display unit 1400, the peripheral control board 4140. Through the control described later by the side, the display effect during the big hit game will be performed. Further, by setting (setting) the big hit game flag to the ON state, when the big hit game process (step S240) is started by the interrupt control from the next time onward, such steps S801 to S804 Without carrying out the processing of step S, the processing from the following step S805 for carrying out the processing relating to the execution of the big hit game comes to be performed.

  In the process of step S805, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 2003 is open. If it is being opened (YES in step S805), then, as the processing of step S806, the opening time of the special winning opening 2003 (elapsed time after opening) is set in the processing of step S606 (see FIG. 70). It is determined whether the open / close operation time limit (a predetermined long time or a predetermined middle time) has been reached. As a result, when it is determined that the opening / closing operation time limit has elapsed (YES in step S806), the opening / closing member 2006 is closed to close the special winning opening 2003 (step S808).

  However, even when it is determined in the process of step S806 that the set opening / closing operation time limit has not elapsed (NO in step S806), the same operation is performed after the special winning opening 2003 is opened. When the number of game balls entered into the special winning opening 2003 is equal to or larger than the upper limit number (for example, 10) set in the process of step S606 (YES in step S807), the above step S808. Then, the special winning opening 2003 is closed. On the other hand, in the case where the set opening / closing operation time limit has not yet passed (NO in step S806), and the number of game balls entering the special winning opening 2003 has not reached the upper limit, either. (NO in step S807), the big winning game process is ended while maintaining the special winning opening 2003 in an open state.

  On the other hand, in the processing of step S805, when it is determined that the special winning opening 2003 is not open, the number of times the big winning opening 2003 is opened (the number of round games) by the opening / closing member 2006 is the above step S606 (FIG. 70). It is determined whether or not the maximum number of times (16 times or 9 times) set in the processing of (see) has been reached (step S809). If it has not arrived (NO in step S809), the opening / closing member 2006 is operated to open the special winning opening 2003 (step S810), and the big hit game process is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S809, when it is determined that the round game has already been played the maximum number of times, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is stopped, and thus a big hit (a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device). The operation (big hit game) of the opening / closing member 2006 according to being won is transferred to a state in which it is impossible. That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a executes the processes of steps S811 to S817, so that the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is separated from the jackpot flag in the process of step S317 (see FIG. 67), for example. The jackpot game process is ended after the gaming state after the jackpot game is set on the basis of the jackpot winning type that has been stored as a trigger for executing the jackpot game. In addition, the winning type here is about whether or not it is a winning type that activates the probability variation function and the time saving function. For example, when the big hit that is the trigger for executing the big hit game is the big hit C. Means that the content of the information as to whether or not the time saving function is operated is different according to the game state when it is determined that the jackpot is the big hit.

  That is, first, the big hit flag and the big hit playing flag are each turned off (step S811), and the winning type of the big hit which is the trigger for executing the big hit game is determined (steps S812 and S814). Here, in the process of step S812, it is determined whether or not the winning type (big hit A to D) that activates the probability varying function. Then, as a result, when it is determined that the selected species does not activate the probability varying function, the process proceeds to step S814 without operating the probability varying function. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S812 that the winning type is the one that activates the probability varying function, the probability varying function is activated (step S813), and then the process proceeds to step S814. To do.

  Further, in the process of step S814, it is determined whether or not it is a winning type that activates the time saving function (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C won in the time saving game state). As a result, when it is determined that the winning type that activates the time saving function is not determined, the operation of the condition device is stopped without activating the time saving function (step S816), and at the time when the processing flag is set to "0" ( (Step S817), the big hit game process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S814 that the winning type is to activate the time saving function, the time saving function is activated (step S815), and then the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S816). ), When the processing flag is set to "0" (step S817), the big hit game processing is ended.

  According to such a big hit game start process, the special winning opening 2003 is opened according to the type of the big hit, until it is determined in the process of step 807 that the round game has reached the maximum number (step S806). , Step S807, step S809), so that the player can repeatedly obtain a prize ball according to the type of big hit.

  Next, the small hit game process (step S250) executed when the process flag is "6" will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game process.

  As shown in FIG. 73, also in the small hit game process (step S250), the main control MPU 4100a first shows, as the process of step S901, that the small hit game is already being performed. It is determined whether or not the in-game flag is in the ON state (set).

  Here, this small hitting game flag has been operated to the OFF state when the processing situation is immediately after shifting to the small hitting game process (step S250). Therefore, when the processing situation is immediately after shifting to the small hitting game process (step S250), it is determined that the small hitting game flag is not in the ON state (set) (NO in step S901), and then step S902. Process.

  In the process of step S902, whether or not the above-described interval effect (challenge bonus effect or extension effect) has ended, that is, is determined in advance by the interval effect timer set in the process of step 703 (see FIG. 71). It is determined whether or not the time (8 seconds in this case) is up. If the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) has not timed up and the interval effect (challenge bonus effect or extension effect) is still being executed (NO in step S902), the small hit game. The process is once terminated, and the process waits until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) expires through the processes of steps S901 and S902.

  However, in the small hitting game process (step S250) according to this embodiment, unlike the big hitting game process (step 240), as a result of such a process, the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) is timed up. In this case (YES in step S902), the small hit game is started only with this, so as the process of step S903, a small hit start command indicating that the small hit game is started is set, and the small hit is also made. The small hitting game flag indicating that the game has already been played is operated (set) to the ON state. That is, in this case, if the player confirms that the above-mentioned second closing control period does not appear (that there is no extension control from the first closing control period having a certain length), the condition device After completely removing the feeling of expectation that a bonus game may be played according to the hit (big hit) that accompanies the operation of the game (not a notification with a lot of false information, but a control related to the game progress) Depending on the presence / absence, the player can play a game after removing the feeling of expectation.

  Further, as will be described later, the small hit start command set in the process of step S903 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. In, the display effect during the small hit game is performed through the control described later by the peripheral control board 4140 side. Further, by setting (setting) the small hitting game flag to the ON state, when the small hitting game process (step S250) is started in the interruption process after the next time, such a step S901 ~ Without performing the processing of step S903, it will be performed from the processing of the following step S904 for performing the processing related to the execution of the small hit game.

  In the process of step S904, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 2003 is open. If it is being opened (YES in step S904), then as the processing of step S905, the opening time of the special winning opening 2003 (elapsed time after opening) is set in the processing of step S701 (see FIG. 71). It is determined whether the opened / closed operation time limit (a predetermined small time of the small time opening / closing pattern) has been reached. As a result, when it is determined that the opening / closing operation time limit has elapsed (YES in step S905), the opening / closing member 2006 is closed to close the special winning opening 2003 (step S907).

  However, even when it is determined in the process of step S905 that the set opening / closing operation time limit has not elapsed (NO in step S905), the same process is performed after the special winning opening 2003 is opened. If the number of game balls that entered the special winning opening 2003 is equal to or greater than the upper limit number (for example, 2) set in the process of step S701 (YES in step S905), the above step The process shifts to S907, and the special winning opening 2003 is closed. On the other hand, in the case where the set opening / closing operation time limit has not yet elapsed (NO in step S905), and the number of game balls entering the special winning opening 2003 has not reached the upper limit, either. (NO in step S905), the small winning game process is ended while keeping the special winning opening 2003 open.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S904 that the special winning opening 2003 is not open, the number of times the special winning opening 2003 is opened by the opening / closing member 2006 is determined by the process of step S701 (see FIG. 71). It is determined whether or not the set maximum number (twice) has been reached (step S908). If it has not arrived (NO in step S908), the opening / closing member 2006 is operated to open the special winning opening 2003 (step S909), and the small hit game process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S908 that the opening / closing member 2006 has opened the special winning opening 2003 the maximum number of times, the small hit flag and the small hit game flag are turned off. When the state is operated (step S910) and the processing flag is set to "0" (step S911), the small hitting game process is ended.

  According to such a small hit game process, until the determination in step 906 that the opening / closing member 2006 has opened the special winning opening 2003 has reached the maximum number, the big winning opening 2003 responds to the big hit. Although it is an opening mode in which it is difficult to enter a game ball into the special winning opening 2003 as compared with the opening mode, the player can obtain the prize balls corresponding to the opening mode. Become.

  Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4150a mounted on the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 83. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub-main process, and FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of the 16 ms steady process. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an example of the command analysis process (step S1100). 80 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process (step S1200). FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210). FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of a stop symbol determination process (step S1225a) in the first effect mode, and FIG. 83 shows an example of a stop symbol determination process (step S1225b) in the second effect mode. It is a flowchart.

  In the sub-main process, as shown in FIG. 77, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs an initialization process (step S1001). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the peripheral control RAM 4140e mounted on the peripheral control board 4140 and the like are performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S1001) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S1002).

  In the initial setting process, a process of confirming the operation of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is also executed. Specifically, a motor for activating various movable bodies (logo movable body 6200, zombie movable body 6201, main EL display substrate 1400a, sub EL display substrate 1400b, EL mounted movable body 1401) provided on the game board 5 and the like. A control is performed to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a solenoid to move the drive signal to an exposed position (movable position) and then return it to a standby position (home position). As described above, the exposed position (movable position) and the standby position (original position) of the movable body are detected based on the detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors) and mounted on the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control MPU 4150a that is being operated outputs a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid in the initial setting process, and various movable bodies (logo movable accessory 6200, zombie movable accessory 6201, provided on the game board 5). After the main EL display substrate 1400a, the sub EL display substrate 1400b, and the EL mounting movable body 1401) are activated and the various movable bodies are moved to the exposed position (movable position) by various detection switches, the standby position (original position) is set. (Position) When detecting that it has moved to various detection switches with various detection switches, stop the output of drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. Various movable member provided in 5 (logo movable won game 6200, zombie movable won game 6201, main EL display substrate 1400a, the sub EL display substrate 1400 b, EL mounted movable member 1401) to wait at a standby position (home position). If the detection by the various detection switches is not performed even after the lapse of a predetermined time limit after the movement of the movable body between the exposed position (movable position) and the standby position (original position) is started, the peripheral control MPU4150a Is determined to be abnormal, and predetermined error-related processing (error notification, etc.) is executed. By this error-related processing, it becomes possible for the administrator of the game arcade, etc. to understand the failure of the game machine and to take measures such as stopping the operation of the game machine, and the game progresses in the abnormal state. It is possible to prevent that.

  Further, in the above-described process of confirming the operation of the various movable bodies, a process of controlling the light emission of the high-intensity LEDs mounted on the LED boards of the light guide plates (the front light guide plate 2301 and the rear light guide plate 2302) is also executed. Specifically, among various movable bodies provided on the game board 5, a main EL display substrate 1400a, a sub-EL display substrate 1400b, and an EL mounted movable body 1401 (movable body mounted EL display substrate 1400c) which constitute the EL display unit 1400. When confirming the operation of, the main EL display substrate 1400a, the sub EL display substrate 1400b, and the EL mounted movable body 1401 (movable body mounted EL display substrate 1400c) that output a drive signal to the motor to constitute the EL display unit 1400. Before starting the movement of the high-luminance LED mounted on the LED substrate provided on the front light guide plate 2301 and the high-luminance LED mounted on the LED substrate provided on the rear light guide plate 2302. A pattern is displayed on the front light guide plate 2301 and the rear light guide plate 2302. That is, the main EL display substrate 1400a, the sub EL display substrate 1400b, and the EL mountable movable body 1401 (movable body mounted EL display) that configure the EL display unit 1400 in a state where the patterns are displayed on the front light guide plate 2301 and the rear light guide plate 2302. The movement of the substrate 1400c) is started.

  A vertical stripe pattern imitating noise can be displayed on the rear light guide plate 2302 (see FIG. 94), and the main EL display substrate 1400a, the sub EL display substrate 1400b, and the EL mounting movable body 1401 which configure the EL display unit 1400. When confirming the operation of the (movable-body-mounted EL display substrate 1400c), a vertical stripe pattern simulating noise is displayed in front of the display unit 1400d of the EL display unit 1400 to display the display unit 1400d (especially the main unit). It is configured so as to prevent clear visibility of the EL display substrate 1400a).

  Further, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, all of the main EL display substrate 1400a, the sub EL display substrate 1400b, and the EL mounted movable body 1401 (movable body mounted EL display substrate 1400c) that form the EL display unit 1400 are at the standby position (original position). Based on the fact that the movement is detected by various detection switches, the output of the drive signal to the electric drive source such as the motor is stopped, and the main EL display substrate 1400a, the sub EL display substrate 1400b, and the EL mounted movable body 1401 ( After the movable body mounted EL display substrate 1400c) is made to stand by at the standby position (original position), the high brightness LED mounted on the LED substrate provided on the front light guide plate 2301 and the LED substrate provided on the rear light guide plate 2302. The high-intensity LED mounted on the front light guide plate 2301 and the rear light guide plate 23 are stopped (light is turned off). State picture 2 and have not been displayed, i.e. return to the state where clear visual unobstructed display portion 1400d of the EL display unit 1400.

  Accordingly, when confirming the operation of the main EL display substrate 1400a, the sub-EL display substrate 1400b, and the EL mounted movable body 1401 (movable body mounted EL display substrate 1400c) that form the EL display unit 1400, the front light guide plate 2301 is used. A main EL that configures the EL display unit 1400 in a state in which a pattern is displayed on the rear light guide plate 2302 and clear display of the display portion 1400d of the EL display unit 1400 (particularly the end portion of the main EL display substrate 1400a) is hindered. The display substrate 1400a, the sub-EL display substrate 1400b, and the EL mounted movable body 1401 (movable body mounted EL display substrate 1400c) can be moved to the exposed position (movable position) and further returned to the standby position (original position). That is, the EL display is performed in a state in which a pattern is displayed on the front light guide plate 2301 and the rear light guide plate 2302 to prevent clear visibility of the display portion 1400d of the EL display unit 1400 (particularly the end portion of the main EL display substrate 1400a). By confirming the operation of the main EL display substrate 1400a, the sub-EL display substrate 1400b, and the EL mounted movable body 1401 (movable body mounted EL display substrate 1400c) that form the unit 1400, the power supply within the business hours of the amusement park Spoiler (design) that the display form of the EL display unit 1400 can be changed when irregular initial setting processing due to disconnection and power restoration (including instantaneous interruption due to some influence) is performed. It is disclosed to the player that the central portion of the EL display unit 1400 is opened at a time unintended by the player It becomes possible to prevent the), it can suppress the degradation of the gaming interest.

  When confirming the operation of the main EL display substrate 1400a, the sub EL display substrate 1400b, and the EL mounted movable body 1401 (movable body mounted EL display substrate 1400c) that form the EL display unit 1400, a pattern is displayed on the light guide plate. The display unit 1400d of the EL display unit 1400 (particularly the end portion of the main EL display substrate 1400a) may be prevented from being clearly visible. It is only necessary to control the light emission of the LED of brightness. However, by displaying a pattern on both the front light guide plate 2301 and the rear light guide plate 2302, the display unit 1400d (especially the main EL display substrate 1400a) can be compared to the case where the pattern is displayed only on the rear light guide plate 2302. It is possible to further hinder the visual recognition of (the end portion of).

  Further, in the case where the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the RAM clear signal indicating that the information stored in the main control internal RAM included in the main control MPU 4100a is completely erased in the initial setting process, While performing processing for confirming the operation of various movable bodies, control is performed so as not to perform processing for controlling light emission of the high-intensity LEDs mounted on the LED boards of the light guide plate (front light guide plate 2301, rear light guide plate 2302). May be This hinders the visual confirmation of the operation of the main EL display substrate 1400a, the sub EL display substrate 1400b, and the EL mounted movable body 1401 (movable body mounted EL display substrate 1400c) that form the EL display unit 1400 during the manufacturing process. Will be suppressed.

  Further, in the initial setting process, a process relating to light emission of the high-luminance LED mounted on the LED substrate provided on the front light guide plate 2301 and the high-luminance LED mounted on the LED substrate provided on the rear light guide plate 2302 As for, as long as it is possible to prevent spoiling of the morphological change behind the light guide plate (the entire moving picture of the game machine is disclosed to the player at a time when the designer does not intend), the following Such a form may be adopted. That is, the main EL display substrate 1400a, the sub EL display substrate 1400b, and the EL mounting movable body 1401 (movable body mounting EL display substrate 1400c) that form the EL display unit 1400 are provided on the front light guide plate 2301 before the movement is started. The high-brightness LED mounted on the LED board mounted on the rear light guide plate 2302 and the high-brightness LED mounted on the LED board provided on the rear light guide plate 2302 start emitting light, and all the movable bodies are at the standby position (original position). ), A high-brightness LED mounted on the LED substrate provided on the front light guide plate 2301 and a high-brightness LED mounted on the LED substrate provided on the rear light guide plate 2302 for a time longer than the time required to move to In order to continue the light emission with the LED, the light emission time of each LED in the initial setting process is set to That time "may be configured to be set to a longer time than. This makes it possible to prevent spoiling of the morphological change behind the light guide plate (the entire moving picture of the game machine is disclosed to the player at a time when the designer does not intend), and further, the abnormality in the movable body. When it occurs, the LED of each light guide plate is turned off with the lapse of time, and it becomes possible to quickly confirm the abnormality in a clear state.

  Here, the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment executes a 2 ms steady process as an interrupt process every time 2 ms elapses. That is, in this 2 ms steady process, the counter value of the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter is incremented (“1” is added to the counter value). As a result of repeating the count-up every time 2 ms has elapsed, when the counter value reaches 8 (when 16 ms has elapsed), the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set and the 16 ms elapsed monitoring is performed. The counter value of the counter is reset.

  In this regard, in the process of step 1002, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is monitored until it is set in the 2 ms steady process (loop process). As a result, when it is determined that the 16 ms elapsed flag is set (Yes in step 1002), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S1003), and the 16 ms steady process described below is performed (step S1004). The 16 ms steady process is performed every 16 ms.

In this 16 ms steady process, the EL display unit 1400, the LED of each decorative board provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 based on various effect commands received from the main control board 4100. The process of controlling the speaker is executed. When the 16 ms steady process is completed, the process returns to step S1002 and is monitored again until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set in the 2 ms steady process (loop process).
As shown in FIG. 78, in the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a first analyzes various effect commands received from the main control board 4100 (command analysis process) as the process of step S1100. Next, based on the analyzed effect command, control (effect control processing) for effect display of the EL display unit 1400 is executed (step S1200). More specifically, setting of a notice effect that can appear in the effect display of the EL display unit 1400, determination of a stop symbol of a decorative symbol that can appear in the effect display of the EL display unit 1400, and the like are performed.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a then executes a sound control process relating to the sound output of the speaker for generating a sound effect (for example, BGM) that promotes the effect (step S1300). Furthermore, the light emission decoration control processing concerning the light emission decoration by each of the decoration boards provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5 is executed (step S1400).

  Then, after that, information output processing is performed for transmitting the commands (sound output commands, light emission decoration commands, etc., in addition to the display commands described below) set in the respective processes S1200 to S1400 to the lamp driving board and the like. (Step S1500). As a result, an effect according to the set command comes to be performed through the EL display unit 1400, the speakers 121 and 391, the door frame and the decorative boards provided on the game board.

  After the information output process (step S1500) is performed, the random number update process for updating the random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S1200) is executed (step S1600), and the 16 ms steady state is maintained. The process ends.

  Note that the processing (16 ms steady processing) of these steps S1100 to S1600 is set as a processing amount that is completed within 16 ms, but if 16 ms time has elapsed from the start of the 16 ms steady processing, the steps are performed. Even if the execution up to the processing of S1600 has not been completed, the processing in the middle of execution at that point is continued without returning to the processing of the step S1100 (from the command analysis processing). Will be performed. That is, when 16 ms elapses during the execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S1002 that the 16 ms elapse flag has been set after the 16 ms steady process is completed, the 16 ms steady process is executed. To start.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment is configured to execute the random number updating process (step S1600) in the 16 ms steady process to update the various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers. Is not limited to this. For example, various random numbers may be updated by either or both of the loop process and the 16 ms steady process in the sub-main process.

  Next, the command analysis process (process of step S1100) will be described with reference to FIG. 79.

  As shown in FIG. 79, in the command analysis processing, the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) first determines that the effect command from the main control board 4100 is the reception command of the peripheral control board 4140 as the processing of step S1101. It is determined whether or not it is stored in the storage area (RAM) (step S1101).

  That is, when the peripheral control board 4140 according to the present embodiment receives the effect command from the main control board 4100, it interrupts other processing such as the 16 ms steady processing to generate the command reception interrupt processing, and the command reception interrupt processing is executed. In the plug-in process, the effect command from the main control board 4100 is stored in the received command storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140. In the received command storage area, a plurality of areas are provided in correspondence with the order of reception of effect commands from the main control board 4100, and in the command reception interrupt process, the effect commands are associated with the order of reception. Each of these areas is memorized in the form of a circle.

  In this regard, in the process of step S1101, the contents of the received command storage area are confirmed, and if the effect command is stored, the effect command with the earliest reception order from the main control board 4100 is read from the received command storage area. This is the case (step S1102).

  Next, whether the read effect command is a pattern command (command indicating a variation pattern) of the effect commands set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of step S411 (see FIG. 77). Is determined (step S1103). As a result, when it is determined that the effect command is the same effect command (YES in step S1103), the fluctuation pattern command is stored in the fluctuation display pattern storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140 and the fluctuation pattern reception flag is set. When set (step S1104), the command analysis process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the read effect command is not the pattern command (the command shown in FIG. 76) (NO in step S1103), the read effect command is processed in step S411 (see FIG. 68). Then, it is determined whether or not it is a winning information command (a winning information command indicating a winning type including a winning or a small hit) among the effect commands set on the main control board 4100 side ( Step S1105). As a result, when it is determined that the winning command is the same effect command (YES in step S1105), the winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140 (step S1106). The command analysis processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the read effect command is not the winning information command (NO in step S1105), the flag corresponding to the effect command received in the corresponding storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140 is set. When set (step S1107), the command analysis process is terminated. Note that, as such an effect command, for example, a confirmation stop command set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of step S503 (see FIG. 69), step S606 (see FIG. 70), or step S702. The interval effect command set on the main control board 4100 side in the processing of (see FIG. 71) and the big hit start set on the main control board 4100 side in the processing of step S803 (see FIG. 72). There are a command and a small hit start command set on the main control board 4100 side in the processing of step S903 (see FIG. 73).

  Next, the effect control process (the process of step S1200) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 80, this effect control process is a decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210), a decorative symbol variation process (step S1220), and a big hit, based on the value of the process selection flag indicating the progress state of the game. Either the display process (step S1230) or the small hit display process (step S1240) is selectively performed.

  That is, as will be described later, in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, the variation pattern reception flag that can be operated in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 79) is set. Under the condition that the display is performed, the process for starting the display effect in the EL display unit 1400 is performed including the variable display of the decorative pattern. For example, a display effect pattern (such as a stop pattern of a decorative pattern or the presence or absence of the above-described extension effect) is determined based on a pattern command or a winning information command, and a display command corresponding to the determined display effect pattern is set. It also performs processing such as settings related to notice production.

  In addition, the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220) executed when the process selection flag is “1” basically corresponds to the definite stop command that can be operated in the process of step S1107 (see FIG. 79). On condition that the flag that has been set is set, a display command is set to end the display effect in the EL display unit 1400, including the variable display of the decorative pattern so that the result of the big hit lottery is shown, and so on. Perform processing. Further, at the end of the process, the flag corresponding to the confirmation stop command is reset.

  Further, in the big hit display process (step S1230) executed when the process selection flag is “2”, a flag corresponding to the big hit interval effect command that can be operated in the process of step S1107 (see FIG. 79), On the condition that the flag corresponding to the big hit start command is set, a display showing that the special winning opening 2003 is opened by the EL display unit 1400 and a display during the big hit game state (for example, round display) Controls to make each occur. Further, at the end of the processing, the flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the time of big hit and the flag corresponding to the big hit start command are reset.

  Further, in the small hit display process (step S1240) executed when the process selection flag is “3”, a flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the small hit which can be operated in the process of step S1107 (see FIG. 79). Alternatively, on condition that the flag corresponding to the small hitting start command is set, the display which shows that the special winning opening 2003 is opened is displayed on the EL display unit 1400 and the effect display during the small hitting game state is displayed. Control each. Further, at the end of the processing, the flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the time of small hit and the flag corresponding to the small hit start command are reset.

  However, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment, the display effect at the time of the big hit or the small hit in the EL display unit 1400 is not ended within the fluctuation time indicated by the received pattern command. , After extending to the period (interval period) after the stop of the variable display related to the lighting pattern of the plurality of LEDs as the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device, in the display effect after this extension There is a case where the result of the big hit lottery can be shown.

  That is, in this case, as will be described later, in the decorative symbol variation start processing (step S1210), the time required for extension effect in the interval period, which is longer than the variation time indicated by the pattern command received from the main control board 4100, is also included. A display effect pattern is determined, and a display command corresponding to the determined display effect pattern is set. Further, in the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220), although the flag corresponding to the finalization stop command is set, the mid-stage effect stage in which the display effect in the EL display unit 1400 is not finished appears. Under the circumstances, the processing is ended.

  Then, in the big hit display process (step S1230) or the small hit display process (step S1240), the display effect thus extended is shown by the display command set in the decorative pattern variation start process (step S1210). The processing is performed so that it can be continuously performed depending on the contents. Therefore, in the processing at the time of extension, even if the flag corresponding to the interval effect command is set, effect control according to the command (display control indicating that the special winning opening 2003 is opened, etc.) Never do.

  As described above, the command set in the processing of steps S1210 to 1230 in the effect control processing is transmitted by the information output processing (step S1500) shown in FIG. As a result, the display effect of the content (display effect pattern or the like) indicated by the above command appears on the EL display unit 1400.

  The production control process also performs a touch panel process. In this touch panel processing, the effect control processing detects the contact state on the contact surface of the touch panel 246 based on the detection signal received from the touch panel 246. In this effect control process, the coordinate value of the contact surface of the touch panel 246 indicating the center of the contact portion based on the contact state is acquired, the position represented by this coordinate value is specified as a detection point, and the operation including this initial position is performed. Get information. Note that this effect control process may acquire not only such coordinate values but also the range of the contact surface. Details of this touch panel processing will be described later.

  Next, the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is “0” will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation start process.

  As shown in FIG. 81, in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210), the peripheral control MPU 4150a first, as the process of step S1221, the variation pattern that can be operated in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 79). It is determined whether the reception flag is in the ON state (set). That is, in the processing of this step 1221, based on the fact that the predetermined starting condition (YES in step S301) is satisfied on the main control board 4100 side, the variation pattern is obtained in the processing of step S1104 (see FIG. 79). It waits until the reception flag is operated to the ON state.

  Then, until the variation pattern reception flag is operated to the ON state, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs control related to the demonstration effect and the effect mode by the processing of the following steps S1232 to S1237.

  That is, first, it is determined whether or not the EL display unit 1400 is in a state where the demonstration effect is being executed (step S1232), and when it is determined that the EL display unit 1400 is not in the same state, the display effect such as the previous symbol variation is finished. After that, it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed (step S1236). As a result, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the display command is set in the EL display unit 1400 to start the demonstration effect. Then, the display command thus set is transmitted by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. 79, so that the demonstration effect is executed in the EL display unit 1400.

  When it is not determined that the predetermined time has elapsed in the process of step S1236, the decorative symbol variation start process is once ended, and the variation pattern reception flag is set (YES in step S1221), or the predetermined period of time. Waits until either condition is satisfied (YES in step S1236).

  Further, as a result of performing such processing (steps S1236 and S1237), when it is determined in the processing of step S1232 that the EL display unit 1400 is in the state of performing the demonstration effect (step S1232). YES), it is determined whether or not the player is allowed to operate the effect mode (step S1233).

  That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the result of the big hit lottery is the hit without the operation of the condition device (small hit) or the hit with the operation of the condition device (big hit), EL Regarding the display effect in the display unit 1400, a plurality of LEDs as the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device are not ended within the variation time of the variation pattern set on the main control board 4100 side. The display effect pattern (extended effect pattern) that can be displayed as to whether or not a win (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device is won after the variable display related to the lighting pattern is extended to the period after the stop ) Is provided, and a second effect mode in which a challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected is prepared.

  Here, an outline of an extension effect pattern that can be selected when in the first effect mode and a challenge bonus effect pattern that can be selected when in the second effect mode will be described. 84 (a) is a diagram for explaining an extension effect pattern at the time of a big hit, FIG. 84 (b) is a diagram for explaining an extension effect pattern at the time of a small hit, and FIG. 84 (c). FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining a challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a big hit, and FIG. 84 (d) is a diagram for explaining a challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a small hit.

  In the first effect mode, if the result of providing an opportunity to obtain a prize ball (bonus game) is provided by the operation of the opening / closing member 2006, the effect extended to the period after the stop of the variation of the special symbol. A display effect pattern (extension effect pattern) at the time of extension having contents can be selected.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 84 (a), when the display effect pattern at the time of extension (extension effect pattern) is selected based on the fact that the big hit is won, the peripheral control MPU 4150a first changes the special symbol. The display effect on the EL display unit 1400 is started so as to coincide with the start (based on the setting of the variation pattern reception flag). However, after this, even if the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command (at the end of fluctuation of the special symbol) or the flag corresponding to the interval effect command (rush into the opening period) is set, the display on the EL display unit 1400 The production will be continued without ending.

  That is, as described above, in the main control MPU4100a according to this embodiment, the special symbol is stopped for the closing control period from when the special symbol is stopped based on the fact that the big hit is won until the big hit game is started. From the time until the time (8 seconds in this case) preset by the interval effect timer is up (first closing control period having a predetermined length), and by the interval effect timer Time until the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n (see FIG. 51) after the predetermined time (here, 8 seconds) has expired (second closing control period having an indefinite length) Trying to control as.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment, when the display effect pattern at the time of extension (extension effect pattern) is selected based on the fact that the big hit is won, as shown in FIG. 84 (a). In, the time from the special symbol is stopped until the interval effect timer (here 8 seconds) is up (first closing control period with a certain length) minutes, for the variation time of the special symbol By extending it, the display effect related to the big hit lottery is performed. It should be noted that such a display effect can be realized as, for example, an effect in which a state in which a specific character is challenging a battle with an enemy character is displayed.

  Then, when the first closing control period having a fixed length has passed and the second closing control period having an indefinite length is controlled, the effect contents appearing on the EL display unit 1400. Is switched to a winning result presentation in which winning information about whether the result of the big hit lottery is a win accompanied by the operation of the condition device (big hit). In this case, the winning / winning effect effect is performed as a big hit effect in which the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device. It can be realized as a production in which the appearance of winning the battle is displayed. Further, considering that one display effect pattern is composed of a display effect related to the big hit lottery and a winning / winning effect effect in which the effect result appears, the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit according to this embodiment is , It can be said that the effect content is extended to within the second close control period having an indefinite length after the first close control period ends after the change of the special symbol is stopped. .

  Then, after this, as long as the second closing control period having an indefinite length is still continued, as a performance within the second closing control period, by relatively strongly hitting the game ball, , Control so that the opening effect before the big hit game is displayed on the EL display unit 1400 to urge that the big hit game should be started by performing the right hitting game in which the game ball flows down to the right game area 5a of the center accessory 2300. To do. As a result, when a right-handed game is played by the player, the game ball hit in the game area 5a on the right side of the center accessory 2300 will pass through the effective gate 6010n, and a jackpot start command will be set. Becomes As a result, when the second closing control period ends, the big hit game in which the special winning opening 2003 is opened is started (see FIG. 72). At this time, the round indicator 648 lights up to indicate the number of rounds.

  In addition, when the second closing control period having an indefinite length is finished and the big hit game in which the big winning opening 2003 is opened (the flag corresponding to the big hit start command is set), for example, EL During the big hit game, which indicates that the first round game has been started, even if the contents of the same effect are displayed in the display unit 1400 (the winning effect or the opening effect), even if the content of the effect is in the middle stage. It is executed by forcibly switching to production. However, on the other hand, unless the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n after the end of the first closing control period having a fixed length, the second closing control period having an indefinite length ends. Since it is not done (the flag corresponding to the big hit start command is not set), it is not forcibly switched to the big hit game production effect indicating that the first round game has been started.

  According to the extension effect pattern at the time of such a big hit, after the first closing control period having a constant length from the stop of the special symbol, after at least the handle lever 504 is not operated, the effective gate 6010n Since the game ball does not pass through, the production progress continues to be stagnant in the pre-start production (production during the second closing control period) of the big hit game. That is, in this case, the player does not operate the handle lever 504 until he / she surely understands the meaning of the pre-start effect (effect during the second closing control period) of the big hit game, thereby starting the start. You can continue to stall the production progress in the previous production. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n by the operation of the handle lever 504, the pre-start effect of the big hit game ends and the next effect (big hit game effect) begins to proceed. It is now possible to realize a personal pace production that suits each player's pace, in other words, to realize the speed feeling of the production progress as a production tailored to a wide range of customers regardless of age or sex. Become.

  Furthermore, in such an extended effect pattern at the time of a big hit, as long as there is a situation in which the effect is not advanced from the effect before the start of the big hit game (stagnation control of the effect by the peripheral control MPU 4150a), the main control MPU 4100a is indefinite. By controlling so that the second closed control period having the length of is not ended, the game progresses and the big hit game (bonus game in which a prize ball can be obtained) is executed. I try to avoid it. Therefore, from the player's side, by adjusting the speed required for the production process to match the player's own pace, the game will appear to proceed according to the adjusted production speed. This makes it possible to enjoy the my-pace effect on the EL display unit 1400 without worrying about the progress speed of the game.

  In this way, the extended effect pattern at the time of a big hit is, to a certain extent, the second closing control period that appears in such a manner that the closing control period is extended after the completion of the first closing control period having a certain length. It is a production pattern on the assumption that it is continued only for the time of, and within the second closing control period, a part of the production content in the production pattern (winning presentation production) and the opening production before the big hit game ( By performing a right-handed game, an effect of urging that a big hit game should be started) can be performed. Then, it is possible to end the second closing control period at an appropriate timing according to the understanding speed of each player for these effects, and eventually start the big hit game at an appropriate timing. A timer may be provided for the main control board so that the second closing control period is not unnecessarily extended. The main control board can forcibly set the big hit start command when a prescribed time has elapsed after the end of the first closing control period. The main control board may determine by lottery whether or not to set the timer.

  However, on the other hand, such a second closing control period is a period that is ended based on at least the operation of the handle lever 504 (a period having an indefinite length). When the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n by the operation of the handle lever 504 immediately after the first closing control period having a certain length is finished, the winning explicit effect is cut in the middle of the effect. Alternatively, it may be possible to rapidly advance to the next effect (a big hit game effect) without causing the effect itself to appear (effect skipping). Further, as described above, when the production is advanced earlier in this way, the game control itself also advances earlier, and the big hit game is started at an earlier stage. Therefore, while realizing the self-pacing effect in the EL display unit 1400, the experienced player or the like can enjoy the efficient and stress-free quick game / performance performance by allowing the game to progress faster by skipping the performance. I am able to

  In particular, the time (playing time) required for the opening presentation, in which the game explanation for prompting the player to hit the right is performed after the winning / winning presentation (big hit production), is useless for the player in the second and subsequent games. Often it's only time. However, according to the extension effect pattern at the time of a big hit, when the time (playing time) required for such an opening effect is prepared, but it functions as a useless time for the player, this is appropriately set. It is cut so that the production and the game can proceed more quickly. As a result, it is possible to provide the respective players with the effects and games suitable for each player.

  By the way, the production time (game) is also cut by cutting off the production time (time for the explicit production of winning) to show the winning information about whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device (big hit). If you proceed faster, the final effect result in the extended effect pattern at the time of a big hit (for example, whether or not the character wins the battle) does not fully appear, and even the opening effect is produced. Without even appearing, the big hit game production (round production etc.) will suddenly appear. That is, in this case, the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit ends in the middle stage before the effect result sufficiently appears, and even the opening effect can be omitted so that the big hit game can be started early. Become.

  By the way, in the effect within the second closed control period having an indefinite length, first, a winning / defining effect effect in which the result of the big hit lottery is a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device (big hit) is performed. After that, the opening production is performed by urging that the big hit game should be started by performing the right hitting game. However, after the opening effect has been performed for a predetermined time (or while the opening effect is being performed), a long movie dedicated to the big hit may be played. According to the second closing control period having an indefinite length, even when such a redundant effect is realized, there is no adverse effect such as a decrease in amusement of the game due to the delay in the effect, Will be able to widen the width of.

  In addition, during the second closing control period, operation acceptance for a predetermined operation means (operation button unit or the like) is permitted, and the expectation of the result of the game lottery is shown based on the operation of the button. Possible operation system effects (for example, effects that suggest the degree of expectation about the number of rounds of the big hit game, the gaming state after the big hit game, etc.) may be performed. That is, in this case, the player can realize an operation system effect in which the player can operate at his / her own pace without worrying about the valid period (the period during which the operation acceptance is permitted) that can be operated. Like

Further, the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment is in the winning of the big hit, at the time when the first closing control period having a constant length from the stop of the special symbol ends, the lighting on the round display 648. Is controlled so that it does not happen. Then, after the first closing control period ends, the control is canceled on the condition that the game ball has passed through the effective gate 6010n, so that the round display is turned on. As a result, in the second closing control period, it is possible to perform the winning / winning presentation effect on the EL display unit 1400 while the round display is turned off. Further, it is possible to prevent the number of rounds in the big hit game from being easily grasped by the player, no matter how much production stagnant occurs in the second closing control period.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 84 (b), when the display effect pattern at the time of extension (extension effect pattern at the time of small hit) is selected based on the fact that the small hit is won, the special symbol is also selected. How long the interval effect timer (here 8 seconds) until the time is up (the first closing control period with a certain length) is extended to the special symbol fluctuation time Therefore, the display effect related to the big hit lottery is performed. It should be noted that such a display effect can be realized as, for example, an effect in which a state in which a specific character is challenging a battle with an enemy character is displayed.

  However, as described above, in the main control MPU4100a according to the present embodiment, the closing control from when the special symbol is stopped based on that the small hit is won until the small opening hit game (small hit game) is started. Regarding the period (opening period), it should consist of only the time (the first closing control period with a certain length) from the stop of the special symbol to the time-up of the interval effect timer (8 seconds here). Have control over. Therefore, in such an extension effect pattern at the time of a small hit, the first closing control period (here, 8 seconds) having a constant length has elapsed, and a small open hit game (small hit game) When it is started, the winning contents are clearly indicated by the winning contents regarding whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device (big hit). I am trying to switch to. In addition, here, the winning clearing effect is performed as a losing effect in which it is clearly shown that the result of the big hit lottery is a win lost to a hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device. This can be realized as an effect in which the appearance of losing the battle with the enemy character is displayed. Further, considering that one display effect pattern is composed of the display effect related to the big hit lottery and the winning / defining effect effect in which the effect result appears, the extended effect pattern at the time of the small hit according to this embodiment is Is an effect pattern in which the effect content is extended to within a period in which a small opening hit game (small hit game) is performed after the first closing control period ends after the variation of the special symbol is stopped. I can say.

  According to such an extension effect pattern at the time of small hit, it is possible to shift to the display effect related to the next change (holding of special symbols) relatively early after it is shown that the loss is a big hit. become. Furthermore, since the effect contents are extended to within the period during which the small open hit game (small hit game) is being performed, during the execution period of the small open hit game (small hit game), EL As the attention is paid to the display unit 1400, the operation of the opening / closing member 2006 becomes less noticeable. That is, in this case, since the effect contents proceed in the same manner as in the case of so-called high-expectation loss effect (loss effect in which the opening / closing member 2006 does not operate), the loss effect pattern with respect to the extended effect pattern at the time of a big hit. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 is hard to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a hit (small hit) without operating the condition device.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation mode of the opening / closing member 2006 is similar to or the same as that of the opening / closing member 2006 when a small opening hit game (small hit game) is performed in accordance with such a small hit. A big hit game in which the opening / closing member 2006 is operated in the operation mode of No. 1, and a latent effect state (a latent effect state using so-called small hit) based on this is not prepared. That is, the extended effect pattern (see FIG. 84 (a)) at the time of a big hit and the extended effect pattern (see FIG. 84 (b)) at the time of a small hit in the first effect mode are provided only for the small hit. It is made based on the technical idea (technical idea opposite to the conventional one) that makes it difficult to grasp that it is a pachinko machine 1 that has been made. Considering that a series of behaviors during the small hit such as fluctuation and stop, the first closing control period, and opening of the special winning opening also appear during the big hit, the effect contents in each effect pattern are respectively extended. .

  In the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit and the extended effect pattern at the time of the small hit according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 84 (a) and 84 (b), the interval effect after the special symbol is stopped. Whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device only after the time (first closing control period) until the timer (here, 8 seconds) is up Information is shown (winning / falling effect production). However, for these extension effect patterns, if the display effect related to the jackpot lottery is performed by extending the extension effect pattern within the first closing control period, among the display effects, within the first closing control period. Winning information about whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device (big hit) may be displayed in the effect portion that appears. Even in such a case, it is possible to shift to the display effect related to the next change (special symbol hold digestion) relatively quickly after it is shown that the loss is a big win. In this case, in the jackpot winning presentation at the time of a big hit, a special presentation at the time of a big hit to encourage the character to win the battle while knowing that the big hit is already won In addition to the appearance for game explanation, in the winning clearing presentation at the time of small hit, the character loses the battle and regrets that it is already understood that it is the loss of the big hit. There will be a special effect when the small hit is reflected.

  With respect to the extended effect pattern in the first effect mode as described above, in the second effect mode, the result that the opportunity (bonus game) to obtain a prize ball is provided by the operation of the opening / closing member 2006 is obtained. In this case, a challenge bonus effect pattern that indicates that the player has won the prize ball can be selected in the EL display unit 1400. The challenge bonus effect pattern is a display effect pattern in which a big hit as well as a small hit can be treated as one type (hit type) as a hit for which a prize ball can be obtained by opening the special winning opening 2003.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 84 (c), in the second effect mode, when the challenge bonus effect pattern is selected based on the fact that the big hit is won, the peripheral control MPU4150a starts changing the special symbol. The display effect in the EL display unit 1400 is started to match (based on the setting of the variation pattern reception flag). Then, the display effect started in this way is ended (based on the flag corresponding to the finalization stop command being set) so as to match the end of variation of the special symbol.

  However, this display effect does not show the lottery result of winning the big hit, but wins (the big hit or the small hit) where the opportunity for winning the prize ball is given by opening the big winning hole 2003. It is shown whether or not it has been done (winning / falling effect for the challenge bonus). More specifically, when the big hit or the small hit is won, it is shown that the opportunity for winning the prize ball is provided by opening the big winning opening 2003 within the fluctuation period of the special symbol. A specific display image will appear. In this case, the player cannot know how many prize balls the player can obtain by opening the special winning opening 2003, but the player wins the winning ball by opening the special winning opening 2003. You will be able to understand what is possible.

  After a specific display image appears in the winning effect according to the challenge bonus in this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the flag corresponding to the interval effect command (at the time of big hit) based on the big winning opening 2003. The pre-start production is performed to start the challenge bonus production regarding how many prize balls the player can obtain by opening the game. As will be described later, in the challenge bonus effect, the time (the first closing control period having a certain length) from the stop of the special symbol to the time-up of the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) elapses. After that, the game is started on the condition that the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n.

  Here, in the pre-start effect for starting the challenge bonus effect, the operation amount of the handle lever 504 (right side) is used by using the first closing control period until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) is timed up. Aiming at the effective gate 6010n by a batting game) and operation timing will be described.

  In the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment, as such a pre-start effect, a countdown effect in which the operation timing of the handle lever 504 is indicated by the countdown display on the EL display unit 1400 may be performed. The countdown effect is, for example, that a countdown display of about 3 to 5 seconds is performed while explaining that the effective gate 6010n is aimed by a right-handed game, and when the countdown display is changed to "0". When the handle lever 504 is operated by an appropriate operation amount, the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n immediately after the first closing control period ends.

  Therefore, according to such a countdown effect, when the handle lever 504 is operated according to the instruction of the effect, the jackpot start command is set relatively early after the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) times up. The second closing control period is ended, and eventually the challenge bonus effect and the big hit game (special bonus game) about how many prize balls the player can obtain are started early. Like At this time, the round indicator lights up to indicate the number of rounds.

  That is, according to such production progress in the challenge bonus production pattern at the time of a big hit, the time from the expiration of the interval production timer (here, 8 seconds) until the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n (an indefinite length). Even if the second close control period having a certain length is compared with the case of the below-described challenge bonus effect pattern (see FIG. 84 (d)) at the time of a small hit, the time is ignored in terms of effect. You will be able to shorten it as much as you can. That is, the above-described countdown effect is intended for this purpose, and the second closing control period having an indefinite length is ended early to cut it, so that it will be described later. Similar to the case of the challenge bonus effect pattern (see FIG. 84 (d)) at the time of small hit, only the first closing control period having a constant length appears as the interval period before the big hit game (before the challenge bonus effect). The game is promoted in the form (progress). As a result, not only big hits but also small hits are treated as one type (hit type) as a hit that enables winning a prize by opening the special winning opening 2003. Not only the winning game and the middle open winning game, but also the small opening winning game, it is possible to perform an effect display as to which game mode appears.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment is at the time of winning the big hit, and when the first closing control period having a constant length from the stop of the special symbol ends, the round display 648 lights up. Is controlled so that it does not happen. Then, after the first closing control period ends, the control is released on the condition that the game ball has passed through the effective gate 6010n, so that the round display 648 is turned on. As a result, prior to the challenge bonus effect being performed on the EL display unit 1400, the player is notified of the fact that the round indicator 648 is lit to win the jackpot and the number of rounds in the jackpot game (special bonus game). It becomes possible to avoid being easily grasped.

  Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU4150a according to this embodiment, after the countdown display is changed to "0", the time from when the game ball is launched until it passes through the effective gate 6010n is the following preceding effect (not shown). By filling in by the effect, the time from the time of the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) to the passage of the game ball through the effective gate 6010n (the second closing with an indefinite length). The existence of the (control period) can be further hidden in a dramatic manner.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the countdown effect according to the present embodiment, the timing at which the countdown display changes to “0” is slightly earlier than the time when the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) times up (second Within the closing control period of 1). According to such a countdown effect, at least a part of the time from the launch of the game ball by the operation of the handle lever 504 to the passage of the game ball through the effective gate 6010n is the first close control period and the second. Of the closing control period, the game becomes playable so that it can be included as the time on the side of the first closing control period, and thus the second closing control period having an indefinite length is divided by It can be shortened by the amount included as the time on the first close control period side). In this case, the preceding effect is also started prior to the second closing control period, and as an effect that may cross the first closing control period and the second closing control period. It will be positioned.

  Here, as a series of effect contents leading from the countdown effect to the challenge bonus effect through the preceding effect, for example, in the countdown effect, in addition to the countdown display in the EL display unit 1400, Attack the enemy character by starting the right-handed game at the timing of "0"! Is displayed, and based on the game ball passing through the effective gate 2500 (the flag corresponding to the big hit start command is set), the challenge bonus effect showing the result of the attack that has been set is started, etc. , Can be realized by.

  Further, as the challenge bonus effect, for example, when the attack on the enemy character is avoided as a result of the attack, the game is a small opening hit game, and the attack hits the enemy character but cannot be defeated. It can be realized by sometimes indicating that the game is a middle open hit, and when the enemy character is knocked down by an attack, indicating that the game is a long open hit. Alternatively, when the attack hits the enemy character but cannot be defeated, it indicates that it is either a medium open per hit game or a long open per hit game. You may make it clear whether it is a winning game. According to such a challenge bonus effect, as long as the attack hits the enemy character, not only the prize ball amount that can be acquired but also the possibility of a small hit is eliminated, which is advantageous to the player. This also makes it possible to dramatically increase the degree of expectation of transition to a different gaming state.

  However, in such a challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a big hit, it is assumed that the handle lever 504 may not be operated for a long time even after the countdown display in the countdown effect is changed to “0”. That is, in this case, the second closing control period having an indefinite length is continued for a long time, and during this second closing control period, the countdown display is "0" on the EL display unit 1400. It is more desirable to prevent a new effect from appearing, such as being displayed as is, in order to diminish the interest of the player who causes such a situation.

  However, in the situation where the challenge bonus effect pattern has appeared, such a situation in which the effect progress is stagnant is limited to the case where the big hit is won, and the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of the small hit ( In the case of FIG. 84 (d)), it cannot occur. In other words, in this case, the amount of prize balls that can be won is that the possibility that a game is played per small opening is eliminated while the production is stagnant (no production) in which no new production is performed. Not only this, but also the degree of expectation of transition to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player will be dramatically increased.

  Although the countdown effect is realized by the countdown display, the countdown effect is not necessarily counted as long as it is performed so that the specific timing at which the handle lever 504 should be operated can be grasped. Good.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 84 (d), even when the challenge bonus effect pattern is selected based on the fact that the small hit is won in the second effect mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a does not have the special effect. The display effect on the EL display unit 1400 is started so as to match the start of the variation of the symbol (based on the variation pattern reception flag being set). Then, the display effect started in this way is ended (based on the flag corresponding to the finalization stop command being set) so as to match the end of variation of the special symbol.

  Also, similarly, in the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of small hit, in such an effect (winning effect related to the challenge bonus) that is performed during the variation period of the special symbol, the prize hole due to the opening of the special winning opening 2003 A particular display image appears showing that the opportunity for acquisition is granted. As a result, the player cannot know how many prize balls the player can obtain by opening the special winning opening 2003, but the player can obtain the winning ball by opening the special winning opening 2003. It becomes possible to grasp what is said.

  Further, after the specific display image appears in the winning effect according to the challenge bonus, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is based on that the flag corresponding to the interval effect command (during small hit) is set. A pre-start production is performed to start a challenge bonus presentation regarding how many prize balls the player can obtain by opening the special winning opening 2003.

  However, as described above, at the time of winning the small hit, the special symbol is stopped for the closing control period (opening period) from when the special symbol is stopped until the small opening hit game (small hit game) is started. It only consists of the time (the first closing control period having a certain length) from the start of the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) to the time up. When the timer expires, the effective gate 6010n A small opening per game (small bonus game) is started regardless of whether or not the game ball has passed through (see FIG. 63).

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment, in the challenge bonus effect pattern for the small hit, originally, the operation of the handle lever 504 (passage of the game ball to the effective gate 6010n) is used for advancing the game or effect. Although it is not necessary in the above, as the pre-start effect for starting the challenge bonus effect, as in the case of the above-described challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a big hit, until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) expires. The first close control period may be used to perform the countdown effect in which the operation timing of the handle lever 504 is indicated by the countdown display in the EL display unit 1400.

  According to the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of the small hit, when the handle lever 504 is operated according to the instruction of the same effect, the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of the big hit, which leads from the countdown effect to the challenge bonus effect through the preceding effect. The challenge bonus effect is started by the same series of effect contents. As a result, not only the big hits but also the small hits are treated as one type (hit type) as a hit that allows the winning of a prize ball by opening the big winning opening 2003. In addition to the winning game and the middle open winning game, it is possible to perform an effect display about which game mode appears, including the small opening winning game.

  In the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of small hit, although the small open hit game (small hit game) is started immediately after the end of the first closing control period, the countdown display shows " It is possible that the handle lever 504 may not be operated for a long time even after it is changed to "0". In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment causes the EL display unit 1400 to falsely start the preceding effect when the countdown display changes to “0”, and after the false effect starts, the peripheral control MPU4150a has a predetermined value. When the provisional rolling time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the challenge bonus effect is further controlled to start false.

  In the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of small hit, regardless of whether or not the operation system effect that requires the operation of the handle lever 504 is performed, in the EL display unit 1400, the challenge bonus effect is performed from the countdown effect to the preceding effect. A series of production contents that lead to will appear falsely (false production). Therefore, the player confirms the presence or absence of an operation on the handle lever 504, the presence or absence of a game ball passing through the effective gate 6010n, etc., so that the player can detect the EL display unit 1400 in advance of surrounding field horses. It is possible to understand that a game is played per small opening, and by doing so, it becomes possible to show intellectual actions such as immediately interrupting the game.

  As described above, the extension effect pattern in the first effect mode is, as described above, the presence of the small hit itself by continuing the second closing control period having an indefinite length for a certain time. This is a production pattern aimed at concealment, and the production content is extended to within the first closing control period having a certain length that is also present in the production pattern for small hits, and then In the second closing control period that cannot exist in the effect pattern, the opening effect before the big hit game (the effect of urging the right hit game to start the big hit game) is performed. On the other hand, the challenge bonus effect pattern in the second effect mode aims to treat the small hit as one of the hits by preventing the second closing control period having an indefinite length from appearing as much as possible. It is a production pattern that has a certain length that is also present in the production pattern at the time of a small hit, as an opening production before the big hit game (production that encourages the player to start the big hit game by performing a right-handed game). Also, the process is performed so that it can be completed within the first closing control period.

  Such an effect assuming that there is a second closed control period having an indefinite length, which is defined by the extension effect pattern in the first effect mode and the challenge bonus effect pattern in the second effect mode. According to the structure (effect structure in which the timing for prompting the right-handed game within the second closed control period is different), even if the effect is a display effect pattern (variation time of the special symbol is the same) based on one effect command, It becomes possible to greatly vary the length of the production time required from the start of the variation of the special symbol (decorative symbol) to the start of the big hit game in the first effect mode and the second effect mode. As a result, it is possible to realize a wide variety of effects with greatly different effect contents without changing the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side by step.

  By the way, according to the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of such a big hit (see FIG. 84 (c)) and the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a small hit (see FIG. 84 (d)), the display effect at the time of hit (specific When the display image) appears, at least a specific number (for example, a small number of award balls (about 40 to 50 in the present embodiment)) is provided with an opportunity to obtain the award balls. It will be done as a challenge bonus production with a round lottery element such as how many prize balls can be accumulated as a bonus, after being understood by the player .

  Furthermore, when the number of prize balls is increased, the game state may be changed to a game state advantageous to the player (a game state in which the probability varying function and the time saving function are activated). Therefore, in such a challenge bonus effect, a higher winning probability (3/400) than the winning probability (1/400) of winning with the operation of the condition device is added With (1/100), not only the prize balls can be paid out to the player (in other words, the opening / closing member 2006 operates), but also the game state advantageous to the player can be achieved. Will be able to raise awareness. As a result, it is possible to avoid repeatedly displaying only monotonous lost effects due to the winning probability of the big hit (special win) set to a low value, and to suppress the deterioration of amusement of the game. .

  Further, according to such a challenge bonus effect, even if the big hit is lost, when the specific condition is satisfied, the display effect at the time of hitting (specific display image) appears on the EL display unit 1400. In spite of the fact that the player can be made aware of the fact that the prize balls can be paid out to the player and the player is changed to the advantageous game state, the big winning hole 2003 will be a big hit. It is possible to display on the EL display unit 1400 a specific image that does not appear when the player is elected (such as an image that appears when a false effect such as a preceding effect or a challenge bonus effect is performed despite no operation of the handle lever 504). I am trying. That is, in this case, until the special winning opening 2003 is opened according to the winning of the big hit, it can also function as a waiting effect period of whether or not a specific image (false effect) appears. In particular, when a specific image (fake effect) appears, there is no change to a game state that is advantageous to the player, and the number of prize balls that can be acquired by the player is the same as the specific image (false effect). It means that the number of prize balls will be significantly smaller than that when the game does not appear, and it is shown that the jackpot is won in combination with the size of the gap of the profits that the player can obtain. This makes it possible to further enhance the interest of the game when an effect (a stagnant effect from the first closing control period) appears.

  Then, according to the configuration in which such two effect modes are adopted, in the first effect mode in which the extension effect pattern can be selected, when executing the small open hit game (small hit game), the player is told In contrast to the fact that a prize ball can be paid out (in other words, that the opening / closing member 2006 operates), an effect that is not conscious of can be performed, while in the second effect mode in which a challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected, a small effect is achieved. When executing the open hit game (small hit game), it is possible to perform an effect that makes the player aware that prize balls can be paid out (in other words, the opening / closing member 2006 operates). . As a result, in the second effect mode in which the challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected, the probability is higher than in the first effect mode in which the extended effect pattern can be selected (the winning probability of the big hit is “1/400”, small With a higher probability of "1/100)", which is a combination of the winning probability of "3/400" per hit), an effect that makes players aware that prize balls can be paid out appears, and such an effect mode Probability of executing a bonus game (opening of the special winning opening 2003 by the opening / closing member 2006) in which a prize ball can be paid out to the player without causing a change in the game state associated with the operation of the condition device by properly using It becomes possible to realize a deeper production as if changes each time. It is to be noted that it is difficult for the player to notice that such an effect can be realized by the pachinko machine 1 in which the small hit is mounted in the first effect mode, and in the second effect mode, This is because, as a hit that allows the winning of a prize ball by opening the special winning opening 2003, not only a big hit but also a small hit is displayed as one type.

  Particularly, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU4150a) according to this embodiment, there are a first effect mode in which such an extension effect pattern can be selected and a second effect mode in which a challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected. There is provided a mode compulsory control means for compulsorily selecting one of the effect modes and creating a mode compulsory period in which a change from an operation mode by the player from the forcibly decided effect mode is not permitted.

  For example, a first predetermined period after the pachinko machine 1 is delivered to the hall (for example, a period until a predetermined month and day such as one month elapses) is forcibly determined as the first effect mode. , A second predetermined period after the first predetermined period has elapsed (for example, a period until a predetermined month and day such as the next month elapses) is forcibly determined as the second effect mode. When the control for creating the mode compulsory period is performed in the above, during the first month, the production is performed so as to hide the fact that the small hit is mounted as described above, so that the big hit It operates as a pachinko machine 1 in which prize balls can be paid out to the player under the probability of winning. On the other hand, during the next month, the effect that a small hit is treated as one type of winning that can be obtained by opening the special winning opening 2003 is performed, so that the winning probability of the big hit is higher than the winning probability. With the high probability, the player can operate as a pachinko machine 1 in which prize balls can be paid out to the player, and even though the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with only one game specification, the first first predetermined In addition to the fact that it was difficult to notice the existence of a small hit during the period, it seems as if another pachinko machine with a different game specification for winning the ball, as well as the contents of the effect on the EL display unit 1400, newly started operating. It becomes possible to give the player a great impression. Note that after the second predetermined period has elapsed, the effect mode can be set in accordance with the player's operation of the operation means during the demonstration effect.

In this respect, as shown in FIG. 81, in the process of step S1233, the peripheral control MPU 4150a first sets the first effect mode and the second effect mode based on time information such as calendar information and time information of the built-in RTC 4140aa. It is determined whether or not there is a mode compulsory period in which one of the effect modes and the effect mode is forcibly determined. As a result, when it is determined that the first effect mode is forcibly determined (for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is in the first predetermined period after being delivered to the hall), the second effect is generated. When it is determined that the mode is forcibly decided (for example, in the second predetermined period after the first predetermined period has elapsed), it is considered that the change of the effect mode by the operation of the player is not allowed. (NO in step S1233), the decoration symbol variation start process (step S1210) is once ended. That is, in this case, the demonstration effect is being executed (YES in step S1232).
S), the variation pattern reception flag is set (YES in step S1221).

  On the other hand, based on the time information such as the calendar information and the time information of the built-in RTC 4140aa, it is determined that the above-mentioned mode compulsory period in which one of the first effect mode and the second effect mode is forcibly determined is not in the mode compulsory period. If it is done (for example, when the second predetermined period has already passed), it is determined that the change of the effect mode by the operation of the player is permitted (YES in step S1233), and then step S1234. Process.

  In the process of step S1234, it is determined whether or not the player has performed an operation for changing the effect mode. Here, the operation by the player is, for example, an operation on the operation button unit or the sub button, and when the main button or the sub button is operated while the demonstration effect is being performed, the EL display unit 1400 It is conceivable to perform display control so that the effect mode selection screen appears. In this case, when such a selection screen is displayed, a specific effect mode is selected by operating the sub button 372, and the selected specific effect mode is determined by operating the main button. It is determined that there is an operation by the player to change the effect mode (YES in step S1234), and the setting process related to the effect mode is performed to change to the determined effect mode (step S1235).

  The means to be operated by the player does not have to be the main button or the sub button of the operation button unit, and may be a device that allows the player to perform a predetermined operation including a proximity operation using a touch panel. Good. In addition, as processing performed when an operation is performed by the player, in addition to control for causing a change in display on the EL display unit 1400 (appearance of selection screen, display at selection, display at determination, etc.), for example, transparent The player can be informed that the effect mode has been switched by changing the effect mode of a predetermined decorative member, such as changing the color of light emitted from the back of the game panel 1100 having a certain characteristic (for example, changing from blue to red). You may show it to it.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S1221, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern reception flag that can be operated in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 79) is in the ON state (set), the main control board 4100 side Assuming that the predetermined starting condition (NO in step S301) is satisfied, the following steps S1222 to 1227 for starting the display effect on the EL display unit 1400 are performed.

  That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a first operates (resets) the fluctuation pattern reception flag in the OFF state (step S1222). Then, on this, it is determined whether or not the game state flag indicates that the normal external disadvantage game state is present (step S1223). It should be noted that this game state flag is, for example, operated at the end of the big hit game (for example, big hit display processing (step S1230)) so as to indicate the type of game state controlled after the big hit game.

  Then, when the game state flag indicates that it is in the normal disadvantageous game state (YES in step S1223), as the process of step S1224, the effect mode setting state in the process of step S1235 or the built-in RTC 4140aa. Based on time information such as calendar information and time information, it is determined whether or not the first effect mode is set. As a result, when the first effect mode is set in the period in which the first effect mode is forcibly determined or the change of the effect mode by the operation of the player is allowed, , It is determined that the first effect mode is set (YES in step S1224), and then the process of step S1225a is performed.

  In the process of step S1225a, while referring to the effect pattern table in the setting state of the first effect mode, it is stored in the variable display pattern storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a). Based on the information related to the variation pattern and the winning information stored in the winning information storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a), the effect pattern and the stop symbol in the EL display unit 1400 are determined.

  Next, a notice selection process is performed in which it is determined whether or not the notice effect is performed based on the notice determination random number (step S1226a). That is, not only the effect pattern in the EL display unit 1400 but also the execution frequency of the notice effect and the content of the effect change depending on whether it is in the first effect mode or in the second effect mode. In the selection process, in the notice effect table in the setting state of the first effect mode, the manner of notice effect (notice effect pattern) is determined based on an appropriate notice determination random number.

  Then, the display command (preliminary command) associated with each of the effect pattern, the stop design, and the notice effect pattern in the first effect mode thus determined is set (step S1227), and the process selection flag is set to "1". "(Step S1228), the decoration symbol variation start processing (Step S1210) is ended. That is, the display command and the advance notice command set in this way are transmitted by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. 78, so that in the EL display unit 1400, the contents (extended effect pattern And the like), and the notice effect of the content indicated by the notice command comes to appear.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S1224, the second effect mode is set during the period in which the second effect mode is forcibly determined or during the period in which the change of the effect mode by the operation of the player is allowed. When it is in the state, it is determined that it is not in the setting state of the first effect mode (NO in step S1224), and then the process of step S1225b is performed. In the process of step S1225b, while referring to the effect pattern table when the second effect mode is set, it is stored in the variable display pattern storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a). Based on the information related to the variation pattern and the winning information stored in the winning information storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a), the effect pattern and the stop symbol in the EL display unit 1400 are determined. Next, in the notice effect table when the second effect mode is set, an effect mode (notice effect) related to the notice effect based on an appropriate notice determination random number including a determination as to whether or not to execute the notice effect. The notice selection process for determining the pattern) is executed (step S1226b).

  Then, the display command (notice command) associated with the effect pattern, the stop pattern, and the notice effect pattern in the second effect mode thus determined are set (step S1227), and the process selection flag is set to "1". "(Step S1228), the decoration symbol variation start processing (Step S1210) is ended. That is, the display command and the advance notice command set in this way are transmitted by the information output processing (step S1500) shown in FIG. 78, so that in the EL display unit 1400, the display effect of the content indicated by the display command is displayed. As it appears, the notice effect having the content indicated by the notice command comes to appear.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S1223, when it is determined that the game state flag does not indicate that the normal external disadvantage game state (NO in step S1223), detailed description will be omitted, but the current game state is omitted. Along with determining the effect pattern and the stop symbol based on the effect table according to the (Step S1229), in the notice effect table according to the current game state, including the determination of whether to execute the notice effect, appropriate notice The notice selection process for determining the form of the notice effect (the notice effect pattern) based on the determination random number is executed (step S1230).

  Then, display commands (preliminary commands) respectively associated with the effect pattern, the stop symbol, and the notice effect pattern according to the current game state determined in this way are set (step S1227), and the process selection flag is set to "1". "(Step S1228), the decoration symbol variation start processing (Step S1210) is ended. That is, the display command and the advance notice command set in this way are transmitted by the information output processing (step S1500) shown in FIG. 78, so that in the EL display unit 1400, the display effect of the content indicated by the display command is displayed. As it appears, the notice effect having the content indicated by the notice command comes to appear.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect pattern and stop symbol determination processing (step S1225a) in the first effect mode.

  As shown in FIG. 82, in the process of step S1225a, first, the variation pattern command stored in the variation display pattern storage area in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 79) is read out, and the variation pattern command is set to this variation pattern command. The associated effect pattern is determined (step S1301). Here, in the effect pattern determination table in the first effect mode, a plurality of effect patterns may be associated with one variation pattern command (see FIGS. 88 and 89), 1 Only one effect pattern may be associated (see FIGS. 85 and 86). When a plurality of effect patterns are associated, either an effect pattern is determined based on the result of the effect lottery using a predetermined random number for effect, or an effect is determined based on the jackpot type. The pattern will be determined.

  After the specific effect pattern is determined in this manner, the stop symbol (the symbol combination at the time of stop) that appears when the decorative symbol is stopped is determined. That is, as will be described later, for the decorative symbols in the EL display unit 1400, including the case where the above-described extended effect pattern in which the display effect is not terminated when the special symbol is stopped is adopted, the variable symbol of the special symbol is adjusted to match (fixed It is supposed to stop (based on the stop command being set).

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment, when determining the stop symbol, an "extension effect pattern" and "although not an extension effect pattern, it can be prepared as an effect that is a pair of the extension effect pattern. It is determined whether any of the effect patterns of "missing effect pattern" is determined in the process of step S1301 (step S1302). As a result, when any one of the effect patterns is determined, at the time when a predetermined stop symbol at the time of extension (a specific reach lost symbol or the like) is determined (step S1303), the step S1225a (FIG. 81). (See) ends the processing. That is, in this case, in the opening period, the content of the display effect centered on the story of the character or the like is extended (developed) under the condition that the decorative design is stopped and displayed with the stop design at the time of extension. It will continue to appear, and after that, the result of whether or not the jackpot is won will be clearly stated.

  On the other hand, a normal production pattern (figure that is not an extension production pattern and is a loss production pattern that is not an extension production pattern but can be prepared as a pair of productions of the extension production pattern) 85 (c), refer to FIG. 88), the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the big hit lottery indicated by the winning information command is decided through the processes of steps S1304 to S1310.

  That is, first, it is determined whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, based on the winning information command stored in the winning information storage area in the process of step S1106 (FIG. 79) (step S1304). As a result, when the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, the process of the step S1225a (see FIG. 81) is ended at the time when the stop symbol dedicated to the big hit is determined (step S1305).

  When the result of the big hit lottery is not a big hit (NO in step S1304), it is determined whether or not the result is a small hit (step S1306), and when the result of the big hit lottery is a small hit. The stop symbol dedicated to the small hit is decided (step S1307). However, in the first effect mode, since the effect command is made to correspond to all of the above-mentioned extended effect patterns so that the presence of the small hit is hidden, the processing in step S1306 is always performed. Then, it is determined that the result of the big hit lottery is not a small hit, and then, as a process of step S1308, it is determined whether or not the reach is a display effect (high expected loss effect).

  As a result, when the reach is a display effect, the process of step S1225a (see FIG. 81) is ended when the reach loss stop symbol is determined (step S1309), whereas the reach is formed. When the display effect is not displayed, the process of step S1225a (see FIG. 81) is ended at the time point when the irregular stop symbols in which the reach is not formed are determined (step S1310).

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect pattern and stop symbol determination processing (step S1225b) in the second effect mode.

  As shown in FIG. 83, in the process of step S1225b, first, the variation pattern command stored in the variation display pattern storage area in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 79) is read out, and the variation pattern command is read. The associated effect pattern is determined (step S1321). Here, also in the effect pattern determination table in the second effect mode, a plurality of effect patterns may be associated with one variation pattern command, or only one effect pattern is associated. May be. When a plurality of effect patterns are associated, either an effect pattern is determined based on the result of the effect lottery using a predetermined random number for effect, or an effect is determined based on the jackpot type. The pattern will be determined.

  After the specific effect pattern is determined in this manner, the stop symbol (the symbol combination at the time of stop) that appears when the decorative symbol is stopped is determined. That is, as described above, in the second effect mode, for the decorative symbol in the EL display unit 1400, when the result of the lottery that allows the prize balls to be obtained is obtained, the variation of the special symbol is stopped ( The stop pattern (specific display image) at the time of a hit is to be stopped based on the fixed stop command being set).

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment, when determining the stop symbol, a big hit based on the winning information command stored in the winning information storage area in the process of step S1106 (see FIG. 77). It is determined whether or not the result of the lottery is a win (a big win or a small win) in which a prize ball can be obtained (steps S1322 and S1324). As a result, when the result of the big hit lottery is a win (big hit or small hit) that allows winning a prize ball (YES in step S1322 or YES in step S1324), the opening of the special winning opening 2003 is confirmed. When the bonus challenge stop symbol which can be grasped as is determined (step S1323), the process of step S1225b (see FIG. 81) is ended. As a bonus challenge stop symbol, for example, a special symbol that does not become a component of a big hit symbol combination is made to appear during its fluctuation, and then the symbol symbol at the time of stop includes the special symbol, etc. can do.

  In this case, in the opening period after the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, for example, at least a specific number (for example, a small number of prize balls (about 40 to 50 in this embodiment)) can be won. It is a round lottery element such as how many prize balls can be added as a bonus after it is understood by the player that the opportunity to obtain prize balls is provided as described above. There will be a challenge bonus effect.

  On the other hand, when the result of the big hit lottery is not a hit (big hit or small hit) that is possible to win a prize ball (NO in either processing of step S1322 and step S1324), as the processing of step S1325. , It is determined whether or not the reach is a display effect.

  As a result, when the reach is a display effect, the process of step S1225b (see FIG. 81) is ended when the reach loss stop symbol is determined (step S1326), whereas the reach is formed. When the display effect is not displayed, the process of step S1225b (see FIG. 81) is ended at the time point when the irregular stop symbols in which the reach is not formed are determined (step S1327).

  Hereinafter, an example of the display effect that appears when the various processes (steps S1210 to S1240) by the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment are performed will be described. FIG. 85 is a time chart showing an example of the display effect that appears on the EL display unit 1400 when any of the effect commands “01H” to “04H” shown in FIG. 76 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side.

  As shown in FIG. 85 (a), when the first effect mode is set, the variation time shown in FIG. 76 is based on the fact that the big hit is won on the main control MPU4100a side. If the variation related to the special symbol having Ta1 is started (timing t0), in the EL display unit 1400, the display effect a at the time of a big hit associated with the effect command “01H” (for example, a specific mission a). The dynamic display of the extended effect pattern having the content of whether or not the player can succeed (whether or not the character A can defeat the enemy) is started. The extended effect pattern (effect command “01H”) having the content of the display effect a started in this way is reached even when the timing t1 at which the change of the special symbol is stopped due to the passage of the change time Ta1 has arrived. , This is continued without ending the display effect a (without success or failure of the specific mission a).

  Further, when dynamically displaying the extended effect pattern when the effect command is “01H”, the variation of the decorative pattern is also started. However, as described above, with respect to the variation of this decorative symbol, the variation is stopped at the timing t1 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped in the lost stop mode at the time of extension.

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment, when the decorative design is fixedly stopped, the decorative design is temporarily stopped within the variation time Ta1 in the lost stop mode at the time of extension. Then, while the decorative design is temporarily stopped in the lost stop mode at the time of extension, the display effect a in the EL display unit 1400 until the decorative design is fixedly stopped by the passage of the variation time Ta1. With respect to, the continuous expected effect regarding whether or not this is continued (for example, whether or not the character A that has fallen due to an attack from an enemy can stand up) is performed.

  That is, in this case, a display effect a (not developed, lost), which will be described later, associated with the command “03H” shown in FIG. 76 is prepared, so that the display effect a even when the timing t1 has elapsed. When the above is continued, this will function as the "development display effect a (effect that leaves a chance to succeed in the specific mission a)". Therefore, when this "development display effect a" appears, the special symbol is seen from the player side even though it is in the first closing control period after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. It can be understood as something that is still changing. Also, regarding the decorative pattern in the EL display unit 1400, it becomes possible to grasp that the temporary stop state is maintained even though the decorative pattern is in the state after the fixed stop. It will be possible to appear as if there is still a chance that it is shown that the jackpot is won by overturning the losing stop mode.

  However, at this time, the extended effect pattern (effect command “01H”) having the content of the display effect a is performed in a large display area (center or entire display area) of the EL display unit 1400. In the above, the variable display of the decorative pattern should be performed only in a small display area (a portion such as an end portion of the display area that is difficult to be noticed) of the EL display unit 1400 for such a display effect a. However, without paying attention to the movement of the decorative pattern, the player can grasp the result of the big hit lottery (whether the result is displayed by the character) depending on whether or not the specific mission a in the display effect a can be successful. More desirable to do.

  That is, in the extension effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (big hit) associated with the effect command “01H”, in the first closing control period after the change of the special symbol is stopped, the actual However, despite the fixed stop of the decorative pattern, the continuous expected effect at the time of the temporary stop succeeded (for example, the character A who fell down due to an attack from the enemy stood up). Under the possession, the "development display effect a" appears. In this "development display effect a", by using the time until the end timing t2 of the first closing control period on the main control MPU4100a side, for example, a state in which the character A faces the enemy again is displayed. A presentation is made as to whether or not the mission a can be successful.

  However, as will be described later, such "display effect a after development (effect as to whether or not a specific mission a can be succeeded)" in the first closed control period on the main control MPU4100a side is shown in FIG. It is also performed in the extension effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the command “02H”. Then, as described above, in the first effect mode, in order to make it difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a small hit, the display effect a (small hit) is a big hit. It is more desirable to move to the next change (retention digestion of the special symbol) relatively early after is shown.

  Therefore, in the extension effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (big hit) that is associated with the effect command “01H”, by the time the end timing t2 of the first closing control period comes, Without showing the success of the mission a (the character A defeats the enemy), there is an indication as to whether or not the specific mission a can be successful (the character A attacks the enemy and this succeeds). Only the production). As a result, the jackpot explicit effect a can appear in the form that the success of the specific mission a is shown after the end timing t2 of the first closing control period, and is associated with the effect command “01H”. The existing display effect pattern functions as a "hit effect pattern of effect patterns having effect contents a".

  However, as described above, in the extension effect pattern at the time of a big hit, after the first closing control period having a constant length is finished, the closing control period is extended to have an indefinite length. The closing control period of 2 appears further. Then, within the second closing control period, part of the effect contents (big hit explicit effect a) in the extended effect pattern at the time of a big hit and the opening effect before the big hit game (the big hit game is started by performing a right hitting game) The production that encourages that) should be performed. Then, as a result of the handle lever 504 being operated at an appropriate timing according to the understanding speed of each player for these effects, when the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n (timing tx), the second closing control period is set. After that, the big hit game and the big hit game performance are started. The details of the effect during the big hit game will be described later.

  Further, this is also as described above with reference to FIG. 84 (a), but the second closing control period from the timing t2 to the timing tx is ended based on the operation of the handle lever 504. Since it is (a period having an indefinite length), for example, the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n by the operation of the handle lever 504 immediately after the first closing control period having a certain length ends. When the game is played as follows, the big hit explicit effect a, the opening effect, etc. are forcibly advanced to the next effect (big hit game in-game effect) without cutting at that point or almost causing the effect itself to appear (effect skip). The Rukoto.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), based on the fact that the small hit is won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the first effect mode is set now, FIG. Suppose that the variation related to the special symbol having the variation time Ta2 shown in (here, described as being set to the same time as the variation time Ta1) is started (timing t0), in the EL display unit 1400, , A display effect a at the time of a small hit associated with the effect command “02H” (for example, whether or not a specific mission a can be successful (whether or not the character A can defeat an enemy)) The dynamic display of the extended effect pattern with contents is started. When the extension effect pattern (effect command “02H”) having the content of the display effect a started in this way is also an extension effect pattern (see FIG. 85 (a)) associated with the effect command “01H”. Similarly, even in the situation where the timing t1 at which the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped due to the passage of the fluctuation time Ta2 has arrived, the display effect a is not ended (without success or failure of the specific mission a). ) Continue this.

  Also, when the extension effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the effect command “02H” is dynamically displayed, the variation of the decorative pattern is started. Further, with respect to the variation of the decorative symbol, at the timing t1 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the fixed stop is performed in the lost stop mode at the time of extension, and the extended production pattern associated with the production command “01H” (FIG. 85). This is the same as in (a)). In addition, even if the lottery result of the big hit is different between the big hit and the small hit, a single display form is adopted and the display mode is distinguished. It has not been done.

  Still further, while the decorative design is temporarily stopped in the lost stop mode at the time of extension, the display effect in the EL display unit 1400 until the decorative design is fixedly stopped by the elapse of the variation time Ta2. Regarding a, the continuous expected effect regarding whether or not this is continued (for example, whether or not the character A that has fallen due to an attack from an enemy can stand up) is also performed. This is the same as the case of the extended effect pattern (see FIG. 10A) associated with the effect command “01H”.

  That is, even in the extension effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the effect command “02H”, in the first closing control period after the change of the special symbol is stopped, In reality, despite the fixed stop of the decorative pattern, the succeeding expected production at the time of temporary stop succeeded (for example, the character A, which has fallen due to an attack from an enemy, stood up). The “display effect a after development” appears under the impression. In this "development display effect a", for example, a state in which the character A faces the enemy again is displayed by using the time until the end timing t2 of the first closed control period on the main control MPU 4100a side. An effect as to whether or not a specific mission a can be successful is performed.

  Furthermore, similarly, until the end timing t2 of the first closing control period arrives, the success of the specific mission a (the character A defeats the enemy) is not shown, and the specific mission a is not specified. An effect as to whether or not the mission a can be succeeded (an effect as to whether or not the character A attacks the enemy and succeeds) appears. However, as described above with reference to FIG. 84B, the extension effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the effect command “02H” has a certain length. After the first closing control period ends, the second closing control period having an indefinite length does not appear in such a manner that the closing control period is extended. Therefore, after the end timing t2 of the first closing control period, until the end timing t3 of the control related to the opening of the special winning opening 2003 in the small opening hit game (small hit game) at the time of the production command "02H", the specification is performed. In the form in which the appearance of failure of the mission a is shown, the loss explicit presentation a appears. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “02H” functions as a “missing effect pattern of effect patterns having effect contents a”.

  In the lost explicit presentation a, for example, the attack by the character A is evaded and the enemy escapes, and then the character A regrets.

  According to the extension effect patterns associated with such effect commands “01H” and “02H”, from the start timing t0 of the special symbol to the opening end timing t3 of the special winning opening 2003 (or the second closing control period). Since the time until the big hit explicit effect a in) ends as one effect that depends on the big hit, it becomes possible to direct the player's gaze point to such an effect. It becomes possible to make it difficult to notice that the special winning opening 2003 is opened when the loss explicit presentation a is performed, and that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a small hit.

  In addition, in order to obtain such an effect, even if the player confirms that the special winning opening 2003 is open, no information is obtained (a phenomenon that may be a reason for confirming the opening). Is to be excluded) is important. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the big hit game in which the special winning opening 2003 is opened in the same or similar opening manner as the small opening hit game (small hit game) can be executed, by confirming the opening, After that, it becomes possible to recognize that the game state may be changed on the condition of the operation of the condition device. In addition, since the player can obtain information that can be an opportunity to quit the game, that the player has won the big jackpot with a small number of balls that do not match the low winning probability of the big jackpot, attention is given to the opening of the special winning opening 2003. It may be one of the factors that cause you to turn your head.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 85 (c), when the first effect mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a side does not win either the big hit or the small hit (a pure hit). ) Is obtained, the fluctuation associated with the special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta3 shown in FIG. 76 (here, described as being set to the same time as the timing t0 to t1) If it is started (timing t0), in the EL display unit 1400, the display effect a at the time of a loss associated with the effect command “03H” (for example, can a specific mission a be successful (character A))? Is able to defeat the enemy) Whether or not, etc.) Dynamic display of a non-extended display effect pattern is started. However, the display effect pattern (effect command “03H”) having the content of the display effect a started in this way is displayed when the timing t1 at which the change of the special symbol is stopped due to the passage of the change time Ta3 has arrived. This is ended without extending the effect a (in the form of failing a specific mission a).

  More specifically, when the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect a at the time of loss (without development) associated with the effect command “03H” is dynamically displayed, the variation of the decorative symbol is started. Further, even in the variation of the decorative symbol, at the timing t1 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped in the fixed stop state in the extended stop state at the time of extension, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the lost stop state at the time of extension. ing. As for the loss stop mode at the time of extension, a single display mode appears at the time of a big hit, at the time of a small hit, and at the time of the loss.

  In addition, while the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in the lost stop mode at the time of extension, the display effect a in the EL display unit 1400 until the decorative pattern is definitely stopped by the passage of the variation time Ta3. As for the effect, the effect that is expected to be continued is also performed (for example, whether or not the character A, which has fallen due to an attack from an enemy, can stand up). This is the same as in the case of the extension effect pattern (see FIGS. 85A and 85B) associated with the commands “01H” and “02H”.

  However, in the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect a at the time of loss (no development) associated with the effect command “03H”, the continuous expected effect at the time of temporary stop fails (for example, from the enemy). It is shown that the character A, who has fallen due to an attack, has not stood up yet, so that the player knows that a specific mission has failed. By preparing such an effect pattern, it is possible to make the effect pattern continued after timing t1 shown in FIGS. 85 (a), (b), and (d) function as the effect pattern with development. become.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 85 (d), when the first effect mode is currently set, the main control MPU 4100a side is unable to win either the big hit or the small hit. Based on the fact that the (miss) is obtained, the variation related to the special symbol having the variation time Ta4 shown in FIG. 76 (here, it is assumed that the time is set to the same time as the timing t0 to t3). If it is started (timing t0), in the EL display unit 1400, the display effect a at the time of a loss associated with the effect command “04H” (for example, can a specific mission a be successful? The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the content of (whether A can defeat the enemy) or not) is started. However, when the display effect pattern (effect command “03H”) having the content of the display effect a started in this way is the effect command “01H” to “03H” even though it is a non-extended display effect pattern. Even when the timing t1 has arrived due to the passage of the variable time Ta1 to ta3 of the special symbol, this is continued without ending the display effect a (without making the specific mission a successful or unsuccessful). . Furthermore, when the display effect pattern (effect command “04H”) is dynamically displayed, the variation of the decorative design is started, but this variation of the decorative design is continued without being terminated at the timing t1. Has become.

  That is, in the case of a loss (pure loss), unlike the case of a big hit or a small hit, not only the time required to control the opening of the special winning opening 2003 but also the opening of the special winning opening 2003 is maintained in a closed state. The first closing control period is not prepared, and it is immediately shifted to the next variation. Therefore, it is difficult to extend the time required for the display effect a with respect to the variation time of the special symbol.

  In this regard, regarding the display effect pattern (display effect a) associated with the effect command “04H”, in the main control MPU 4100a, from the variation start timing t0 at the time of a small hit to the opening end timing t3 of the special winning opening 2003. It is prepared to be adopted when the variation time Ta4 having a length corresponding to the time is selected as a reference. Therefore, in this display effect pattern (display effect a), as in the case of the display effect pattern (display effect a) associated with the effect commands “01H” to “03H”, the display effect a in the EL display unit 1400. Although the effect with the content of appears, the special symbol is not stopped at the timing t1, and the display effect has a longer time in the first place.

  That is, in this case, regarding both the special symbol and the decorative symbol, the variation is not fixedly stopped at the timing t1 in the lost stop mode at the time of extension, but the decorative symbol among the symbols is changed. As in the case of the display effect patterns associated with the effect commands “01H” to “03H”, the extension time is set at the stage before the timing t1 which is only a halfway stage with respect to the variation time Ta4. Temporarily stop in the losing stop mode. Then, while the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in the lost stop mode at the time of extension, whether or not this is continued for the display effect a in the EL display unit 1400 until the timing t1 arrives. Is expected to be continued (for example, whether or not the character A that has fallen due to an attack from an enemy can stand up). In addition, the loss stop mode at the time of extension is a single display even if the big hit lottery result and the variation time are different between the big hit, the small hit and the loss (pure loss). The mode is adopted, and the display mode is not distinguished.

  In this way, the expectation of success has been achieved (for example, the character A who has fallen due to an attack from the enemy has stood up) succeeded in the continuous expected production under the temporary stop of the decorative pattern. Then, the "display effect a after development" appears. However, after this, the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is not returned to the variable state again, and like the display effect pattern associated with the effect commands “01H” to “03H”, the display effect a In the EL display unit 1400, its stop state (fixed stop when “01H” to “03H”, temporary stop when “04H”) in a small display area (a portion such as an end of the display area that is difficult to be noticed). (Stop) is maintained until timing t2.

  In this "development display effect a", there is an effect as to whether or not a specific mission a can be succeeded, for example, a situation in which the character A faces the enemy again within the time period of the fluctuation time Ta4. Done. However, as in the case of the display effect patterns associated with the effect commands "01H" to "03H", it looks like that the specific mission a was successful (the character A is an enemy until the timing t2 comes. Is not displayed, and only an effect regarding whether or not a specific mission a can be succeeded (an effect such as whether character A attacks an enemy and whether or not this succeeds) appears. ing.

  Then, after the timing t2, until the end timing t3 of the control related to the opening of the special winning opening 2003 in the small opening winning game (small hitting game) at the time of the production command "02H", the specific mission a fails The loss explicit presentation a appears in the form shown. In the lost explicit presentation a, as in the case of the production command “02H”, for example, the attack by the character A is evaded and the enemy escapes, and then the character A regrets. It is performed as a defeat production. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “04H” functions as a “missing effect pattern of effect patterns having effect contents a”.

  As described above, in the first effect mode, based on the result of the jackpot lottery being a loss, a specific effect effect pattern (effect command “effect command“, which causes a specific effect content (display effect a) to appear in the EL display unit 1400. 04H "), when a specific variation time (variation time Ta4) is determined on the main control MPU4100a side, within the determined specific variation time (variation time Ta4). The display control relating to the specific loss effect pattern is performed in such a manner that the specific effect content (display effect a) appears. Nevertheless, based on the result of the big hit lottery being a win, a specific effect content (display effect a) appears in the EL display unit 1400, with respect to the specific loss effect pattern (effect command “04H”). When performing the display control related to the hitting effect pattern (effect command “01H”), the main control MPU 4100a side determines a variation time (variation time Ta1) shorter than the specific variation time (variation time Ta4). When this occurs, not only the determined short fluctuation time (fluctuation time Ta1) but also a longer time including at least a predetermined interval period (first closing control period, second closing control period) is set as the presentation time. However, the display control for the specific hit effect pattern is performed in such a manner that the specific effect content (display effect a) appears within this effect time. It was.

  According to such an effect method, even in a predetermined interval period after the stop of the special symbol, the winning effect regarding whether or not the winning is won in the EL display unit 1400 and the opening effect are performed. Become. In addition, these effects can be appropriately cut so that effects and games can be advanced, and it is possible to realize an effect progression (game progression) with a good tempo. In addition, when a display effect pattern of such specific effect contents (display effect a) appears, a notable effect element is added to whether or not the special symbol is stopped in the middle of it. When the stop is confirmed, it is possible to grasp that the opportunity for winning a prize ball is provided by opening the special winning opening 2003, so that it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, by providing the display effect pattern for the effect command “04H” with respect to the extended effect pattern for the effect commands “01H” and “02H”, the “developed display effect a” can be obtained. It has become possible to avoid having to set the expectation of a big hit when it appears, within the range constrained by the appearance ratio of the big hit and the small hit, and the small hit is installed. Even under such an effect system that makes it difficult to recognize that, it is possible to perform an effect design with a higher degree of freedom as shown in FIG.

  Further, in the display effect pattern when the effect command "04H", since the special symbol is changing after the timing t1, there is no problem even if the player confirms the changing state of the special symbol. Absent. And by preparing such a non-extended effect pattern in a manner mixed with the extended effect pattern, even if the stop state of the special symbol in the extended effect pattern is confirmed, the player On the other hand, it becomes possible to promote awareness that may be mistaken.

  In addition, in the display effect pattern for the effect command “04H”, the special winning opening 2003 is not opened when the loss explicit effect a is performed, so that the player has confirmed the special winning opening 2003. There is no problem even if there is. Then, the non-open loss explicit effect a is prepared in such a manner as to be mixed with the loss explicit effect a at the time of the above-mentioned effect command “02H”, so that the special winning opening 2003 in the loss explicit effect a is opened. Even if it is confirmed, it becomes possible to urge the player to become aware of what may be a mistake.

  In the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment, in the display effect pattern at the time of the effect commands "01H", "02H", and "04H", the specific mission a is reached before the timing t2 arrives. Whether or not the character A succeeds (whether or not the character A defeats the enemy) is not shown, but whether or not the specific mission a succeeds (the character A is before the arrival of the timing t2). Whether or not to defeat the enemy) may be displayed. In other words, in this case, after the result display appears, the big hit explicit effect or the lose explicit effect is performed. Even with such an effect method, the display effect a at the time of the small hit does not cause the small hit. Most of the first closing control period of No. 1 is used for the display effect a, and thereafter, a big hit defeat effect, such as displaying a state in which the character A regrets, appears as a big hit defeat effect. It is possible to move to the next change (retention digestion of special symbols) relatively quickly after being broken.

  By the way, as described above, such a display effect appears when any of the effect commands “01H” to “04H” shown in FIG. 76 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side in the first effect mode. Is. Then, the player wins the big hit with the winning probability of the big hit without being aware of the existence of the small hit which is not particularly required in order to realize such playability (playability) in the first effect mode. You will enjoy the game about whether or not it will be done.

  However, even when any of the effect commands “01H” to “04H” shown in FIG. 76 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side, when the second effect mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a is set. Even if there is no change in the normal external disadvantage game state, not to mention the contents of the production commands "01H" to "04H" itself from the side, a big winning hole 2003 due to a small win. By actively adopting the display effect pattern of the effect contents on the premise of opening the game, the chance frequency of winning a prize ball by opening the special winning opening 2003 is higher than that in the first effect mode. The game playability (draftness) is realized as if was greatly increased.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 85 (a), when the second effect mode is set, the jackpot is won on the main control MPU 4100a side, as shown in FIG. 76. If the variation related to the special symbol having the variation time Ta1 is started (timing t0), the EL display unit 1400 has the contents of the display effect a ′ at the time of the big hit associated with the effect command “01H”. The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern and the change of the decorative pattern are started respectively.

  However, the content of the display effect a ′ in the second effect mode is different from the content of the display effect a in the first effect mode, and for example, can a specific mission a ′ be successful? In the mode, the display design pattern (challenge) having contents such as whether or not the decorative design can be stopped and displayed by the bonus challenge stop design that makes it possible to know that the special winning opening 2003 is confirmed to be open) It is prepared as a bonus effect pattern). Therefore, the variable display of the decorative pattern is also performed over the entire display area of the EL display unit 1400 (at least in a central portion of the display area, which is easily noticed). In this way, in the second effect mode, paying attention to the movement of the decorative symbol, depending on whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on the predetermined symbol line, The player is made to understand the result of the lottery.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment, the display mode of the decorative pattern is made different between the first effect mode and the second effect mode. For example, the decorative design in the first effect mode is a relatively small design image mainly composed of numbers, whereas the decorative design in the second effect mode is displayed as a relatively large design image mainly composed of characters. For example, in the second effect mode, the decorative pattern is set as a display form that is more easily noticed.

  Then, in the non-extended display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “01H”, for example, such a decorative symbol is stopped in a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears in the variable time Ta1 until the timing t1 arrives. A display effect a'having contents such as an appropriate character struggling to be displayed appears, and at the timing t1 at which the change of the special symbol is stopped, the special winning opening 2003 can be opened to obtain a prize ball. In order for the player to be able to understand that the bonus challenge stop symbol will be fixedly stopped with the stop display mode in which the bonus symbol stop symbol appears on the predetermined symbol line. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “01H” functions as a “hit effect pattern of effect patterns having effect contents a ′”.

  Further, when the decorative design is fixedly stopped in the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop design appears, the EL display unit 1400 uses the first closing control period, and the player is opened by opening the special winning opening 2003. As a pre-start effect of the challenge bonus effect regarding the number of prize balls that can be acquired, a countdown effect a ′ in which the operation timing of the handle lever 504 is indicated by the countdown display in the EL display unit 1400 is performed. I am trying.

  Here, as described above, the countdown effect a'is, for example, a countdown display of about 3 to 5 seconds, which is performed while explaining that the target gate 6010n is aimed by the right-handed game. When the handle lever 504 is operated with an appropriate operation amount when the display changes to “0”, the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n immediately after the first closing control period ends.

  Therefore, according to such a countdown effect a ′, when the handle lever 504 is operated according to the instruction of the effect, as shown in FIG. 85 (a), the end timing t2 of the first closing control period is As soon as the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n after it arrives, the end timing tx of the second closing control period comes earlier than in the case of the first effect mode. As a result, the challenge bonus effect regarding how many prize balls the player can obtain is started relatively early after the end timing t2 of the first closing control period arrives. As a result, in the effect, which opening mode (a long open per game, a middle open per game, a small open per game) is opened and the big winning opening 2003 is displayed. That is, in this case, the player hits the game ball to the special winning opening 2003 not only in the big hit game but also in the small open hit game (small hit game), whereby the player is in the first effect mode. Compared with the above, the game playability (performance) is realized as if the chance frequency of winning a prize ball by opening the special winning opening 2003 is significantly increased. The details of the effect during the big hit game will be described later.

  By the way, as described above with reference to FIG. 84 (c) as well, in such a challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a big hit, even if the countdown display in the countdown effect a ′ is changed to “0”, the steering wheel is operated for a long time. It is assumed that the lever 504 may not be operated. That is, in this case, the second closing control period having an indefinite length is continued for a long time, and during this second closing control period, the countdown display is "0" on the EL display unit 1400. It is more desirable to prevent a new effect from appearing, such as being displayed as is, in order to diminish the interest of the player who causes such a situation.

  However, in the situation where the challenge bonus effect pattern has appeared, such a situation in which the effect progress is stagnant is limited to the case where the big hit is won, and the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of the small hit ( In the case of FIG. 84 (d) and FIG. 85 (b)), this cannot occur. In other words, in this case, the amount of prize balls that can be won is that the possibility that a game is played per small opening is eliminated while the production is stagnant (no production) in which no new production is performed. Not only this, but also the degree of expectation of transition to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player will be dramatically increased.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), when the second control mode is currently set, the small hit is won on the side of the main control MPU 4100a. If the variation related to the special symbol having the variation time Ta2 shown in (here, it is assumed that it is set to the same time as the timing t0 to t1) is started (timing t0), the EL display unit In 1400, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a ′ at the time of the small hit associated with the effect command “02H” and the change of the decorative pattern are started.

  Then, the non-extended display effect pattern (effect command "02H") having the content of the display effect a'started in this way also has, for example, such a decorative pattern in the variable time Ta2 until the timing t1 arrives. , A bonus challenge stop symbol appears, a display effect a ′ having contents such as an appropriate character struggling to stop and display in a stop display mode appears, and at the timing t1 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped, In order to make it possible for the player to understand that winning the prize ball is possible by opening the winning opening 2003, the bonus symbol stop symbol is fixedly stopped with a stop display mode that appears on a predetermined symbol line. Becomes As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “02H” functions as a “hit effect pattern of effect patterns having effect content a ′”.

  However, as described above, at the time of winning the small hit, the special symbol is stopped for the closing control period (opening period) from when the special symbol is stopped until the small opening hit game (small hit game) is started. It only consists of the time (the first closing control period having a certain length) from the start of the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) to the time up. When the timer expires, the effective gate 6010n A small open hit game (small hit game) is started regardless of whether or not the game ball has passed to (see FIG. 73).

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU4150a according to the present embodiment, even in the case of the display effect pattern when the effect command "02H", as in the case of the display effect pattern when the effect command "01H", the decorative pattern Is fixedly stopped in a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears, the first closing control period is used to determine how many prize balls the player can obtain by opening the special winning opening 2003. As a pre-start effect of the challenge bonus effect regarding whether or not it is a thing, a countdown effect a ′ in which the operation timing of the handle lever 504 is indicated by the countdown display on the EL display unit 1400 is performed.

That is, in the display effect pattern when in the second effect mode, the big hit and the small hit are both handled in the same way as opening the special winning opening 2003, and the variation of the decorative symbol is started. The effect contents from the timing t0 to the challenge bonus effect are not distinguished, and when the handle lever 504 is operated in accordance with the instruction of the effect, the countdown effect a'and the preceding effect (not shown) are passed to the challenge bonus. The challenge bonus effect is started with the same series of effect contents as in the challenge bonus effect pattern (effect command “01H”) at the time of a big hit, which leads to effect.
Therefore, not only the big hits but also the small hits are treated as one type (hit type) as the hits that can be won by opening the big winning opening 2003. Not only the game and the middle open game, but also the small open game can be displayed to show which game mode appears. As a result, as compared with when in the first effect mode, the game characteristic (effect characteristic) as if the chance frequency of winning a prize ball by opening the special winning opening 2003 is significantly increased is realized. . It should be noted that, of the long open per game, medium open per game, and small open per game, the small open per game ends in a relatively short time. Whether or not the winning is won may be made known to the player by displaying a specific image that does not appear when the big hit is won in the effect in the first closed control period.

  As described above, the display effect pattern for the effect command “02H” is a display effect pattern based on one effect command, but the small hit is a no-chance loss in which no chance of winning a prize ball is given ( An extended effect pattern in the first effect mode that is handled in the same manner as an effect pattern (similar to the effect command “04H”) at the time of pure loss, and a small hit as a high chance hit that gives an opportunity to win a prize ball ( It is selectively executed as one of the non-extended display effect patterns (challenge bonus effect patterns) in the second effect mode which is handled in the same manner as the effect pattern at the time of big hit (the effect command "01H"). . That is, in this case, the effect information related to the winning is appropriately reversed on the side of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, so that a variety of effects having greatly different effect contents can be produced without changing the logic on the side of the main control MPU 4100a. You will be able to make it happen.

  In addition, in addition, the small open per game (small hit game) means that only a small amount of prize balls (about 40 to 50 balls in the present embodiment) can be practically acquired by the player as a privilege, Since the game is not shifted to a more advantageous game state for the player than before the small opening hit game (small hit game) is performed, the interest in the game is reduced despite the opening / closing member 2006 being operated. It can be said that it is necessary to pay attention to the handling in the game setting because it may occur. Therefore, conventionally, when mounting a small hit, a big hit game is played with the same behavior as a small open hit game (small hit game), and after that, a specific function that functions to shift to an advantageous game state First, prepare the winning species, and in the situation where a small open hit game (small hit game) is played, make the player aware of the possibility that it is a big hit game according to the win of the particular winning species. Therefore, it has been a major premise to maintain the entertainment of the game when a small open hit game (small hit game) is played. However, even with such a conventional gaming machine, when a specific winning type is won, the jackpot is finally won under the jackpot winning probability that is set extremely low in the normal gaming state. In spite of this, a decrease in the amusement of interest of the game due to the inability to obtain the prize balls commensurate with this low probability (a decrease in the interest of the entertainment of the game due to the difference between the jackpot probability and the real probability of the jackpot) is inevitable. It was

  In this respect, with the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a small hit is mounted, a big hit game is performed with the same behavior as a small open hit game (small hit game), and an advantageous game state after that. In the point that no specific winning type that functions to shift to is prepared, the technical idea is originally different from the conventional game machine in order to suppress the deterioration of the game interest when a small open hit game (small hit game) is performed. It is very different.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the small hit is mounted, the jackpot type (big hit) so that a plurality of kinds of big hit games with different prize ball amounts that can be obtained by the player can be executed. A, big hits B to E) will be prepared. When opening the special winning opening 2003, first, the result of the lottery in which the opening of the special winning opening 2003 is confirmed in the big hit lottery (a big hit A expected to obtain a large amount of coins, a medium amount of coins expected to be won) Big hits B to E, small hits expected to win a small amount of coins, and display effects are performed (whether a challenge bonus effect pattern appears regardless of hit type). I have to). As a result, when it is shown that the same lottery result has been obtained, it is possible for the player to understand that at least a small amount of balls are available for acquisition. , And then there will be more challenge bonus productions about how many coins can be accumulated (whether it is possible to accumulate from a small amount of coins to medium or large amount of coins). I am trying.

  Furthermore, when the number of prize balls is increased, the game state may be changed to a game state advantageous to the player (a game state in which the probability varying function and the time saving function are activated). In this respect, according to this embodiment, depending on how many coins are stacked (big hit A, which is expected to obtain a large amount of coins, or big jackpot B to E, which is expected to acquire a medium amount of coins), The degree of expectation for the operation of the probability varying function (probability of transition to the game state in which the probability varying function operates) is made different. That is, in this case, a challenge as to which of a plurality of types of operation modes is prepared such that the probability of changing to the gaming state in which the probability varying function operates after the opening of the special winning opening 2003 is different appears It will function as a bonus effect. Therefore, in such a challenge bonus effect, the winning probability “1/400” with a condition device actuated is higher than the winning probability “3/400” without a condition device actuated. With "1/100", not only the prize balls can be paid out to the player (in other words, the opening / closing member 2006 operates), but also the game state can be shifted to the player's advantage. Will be able to raise awareness.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the expectation (actual probability expectation when the big hit A) is 100% for the operation of the probability variation function when piled up until a large amount of coins can be obtained, and at least medium. The expectation for the operation of the probability variation function when it is piled up until it is possible to obtain a large amount of coins (the probability of probability change in the case of big hits A to E) is 82%, and it is possible to acquire a medium amount of coins. The expectation for the operation of the stochastic fluctuation function (accurate change expectation for big hits B to E) is 61.7%, and the expected number of coins that can be obtained is high. The probability of probability change is higher when the situation is higher.

  Moreover, according to such a challenge bonus effect, since it is positioned as a default effect state that a small amount of coins can be acquired, a large amount of coins can be acquired according to the winning of the big hit. Unlike conventional gaming machines, which have a basic game (basic effect) whether or not, even when a small open hit game (small hit game) is performed in which a small amount of balls can be obtained, Since the special winning opening 2003 is only opened in a form in conformity with the default effect state, the deterioration of the amusement of the game is suppressed. Furthermore, in the second effect mode, since the fact that a small amount of balls can be obtained is positioned as a default effect state, the probability of appearance of the hit effect (probability of entering the challenge bonus) ) Is also set to a higher probability (higher probability that the winning probability of the big hit is added to the winning probability of the small hit), so that the prize balls corresponding to the low probability cannot be obtained, so that the game is played. It is also avoided that the interest is reduced.

  And, in order to have the challenge bonus effect pattern which realizes such a game and effect in the second effect mode, the lottery for the small hit is also performed in the first effect mode. At the time of winning the small hit, the variable time Ta2 to Td2 having a length matched to the variable time Ta1 to Td1 of the special symbol at the time of winning the big hit can be selected. However, in the first effect mode, originally, the small hit is not required, and basically, the display effect as to whether or not the big hit is won is performed based on the big hit probability. Therefore, in the first effect mode, it is convenient to realize a display effect that is difficult for the player to notice that it is a pachinko machine equipped with a small hit, but a change in the special symbol in the EL display unit 1400. When simply adopting the production method in which the result of the big hit lottery appears when stopped, after the special symbol is stopped, the opening period at the time of executing the small opening hit game (small hit game) and the opening period of the big winning opening 2003 after that The existence of the game will be conspicuous, and the interest in the game may decline.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, in the first effect mode, at the timing t1 (at the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol) when the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command is set. Also, the display effect on the EL display unit 1400 is not ended but is continued. Further, when entering the first closing control period, the flag corresponding to the interval effect command is set at the timing t1, but the peripheral control MPU 4150a indicates that the special winning opening 2003 is opened. The setting of the command is ignored without switching to the interval effect, and the display effect on the EL display unit 1400 is continued. Then, at the timing t2 when the first closing control period ends and the second closing control period starts, the display effect on the EL display unit 1400 is determined by the result of the big hit lottery accompanied by the operation of the condition device. It is executed by switching to the winning / declaration presentation effect in which the winning / losing information on whether or not it is a (big hit) is displayed, and further to the opening presentation.

  That is, in this case, the above-mentioned effect at the time of small hit is positioned as one effect that appears when the big hit is lost, and after the stop of the special symbol, the first closing when the small open hit game (small hit game) is executed. By performing over the control period and the opening period of the special winning opening 2003 thereafter, the display effect of the next change (holding of special symbols) relatively quickly after it is shown that the big hit has been lost. Will be able to move to. As a result, the production progresses in the same manner as in the case of so-called high-expected loss production, so that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a hit (small hit) without operating the condition device. This makes it harder to notice, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the operation of the opening / closing member 2006 according to the winning of the small hit.

  Then, in the pachinko machine 1 in which such a first effect mode and a second effect mode are prepared, in particular, the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment has the first effect mode as described above. And a second effect mode, a mode compulsory control means for compulsorily determining one of the effect modes and creating a mode compulsory period in which a change from the compulsory-determined effect mode by a player's operation is not permitted is provided. ing. Then, on this, the first predetermined period (for example, one month) after the pachinko machine 1 is delivered to the hall is forcibly decided as the first effect mode, and the first predetermined period has elapsed. The control related to the creation of the mode forced period is performed so that the second predetermined mode (for example, the next one month) after that is forcibly set to the second effect mode.

  According to such a mode compulsory period, on the hall side, the extension effect pattern as described above appears during the first predetermined period, so that the small hit is hidden from the player even though it is mounted. While performing, by displaying a hit in the display effect on the EL display unit 1400 based on the winning probability "1/400" of the jackpot, the player wins a prize ball under the winning probability "1/400" of the jackpot. It becomes possible to start the operation of the first gaming-specific pachinko machine that can be paid out (first newly opened store). In addition, in the second predetermined period after the first predetermined period has elapsed in this way, not only the big hit but also the small hit are one of those types as the hits that can be won by opening the special winning opening 2003. Since the above-mentioned challenge bonus effect pattern to be handled appears, the presence of the small hit is hardly noticed in the first predetermined period, and the winning probability of the big hit is higher than “1/400”. Based on the probability “1/100”, the hit display is performed in the display effect in the EL display unit 1400.

  That is, in this case, the prize balls can be paid out to the player with a higher probability “1/100” obtained by adding the winning probability “1/400” of the big hit to the winning probability “3/400” of the small hit. It becomes possible to start the operation of a new pachinko machine of the second game specification (the second newly opened store). As a result, although the pachinko machine 1 is originally equipped with only one game specification, another pachinko machine having a different game specification for acquiring a payout as well as the effect contents in the EL display unit 1400 newly operates. It becomes possible to give the player the impression of that.

  Furthermore, according to such a mode compulsory period, unless it is determined that a predetermined month and day (first predetermined period) has not elapsed and a specific date and time (second predetermined period) is reached. Not only is the change control from the first effect mode not permitted, but some effect modes (second effect mode) out of the plurality of effect modes are still hidden without appearing. Will be performed. That is, in this case, as the days and months have passed since the pachinko machine 1 was delivered to the hall, the production functions that had been hidden until then were gradually exposed, and finally, the exposure was revealed. It becomes possible to selectively use the new effect function by the operation of the player, so that it becomes possible to maintain the entertainment of the game over a long period of time.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 85 (c), when the second effect mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a side is not awarded with either the big hit or the small hit (a pure lose). ) Is obtained, the fluctuation relating to the special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta3 shown in FIG. 76 (here, it is assumed that the time is set to the same time as the timing t0 to t1) When it is started (timing t0), in the EL display unit 1400, a dynamic display of a non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a ′ at the time of a loss, which is associated with the effect command “03H”. , And start changing the decorative pattern.

  Then, the non-extended display effect pattern (effect command “03H”) having the contents of the display effect a ′ started in this way also has, for example, such a decorative pattern in the variable time Ta3 until the timing t1 arrives. , A display effect a ′ having contents such as an appropriate character struggling to stop and display in a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears appears. However, at the timing t1 at which the change of the special symbol is stopped, the decoration symbol is definitely stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on the predetermined symbol line without the effort of the appropriate character. It becomes (challenge bonus production pattern). As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “03H” functions as a “missing effect pattern of effect patterns having effect contents a ′”.

  In this way, the display effect pattern for the effect command "03H" is the "non-extended display effect pattern" regardless of the effect mode. Therefore, when the display effect pattern is in the first effect mode, between the effect pattern (effect command “01H”) and the effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a at the time of a big hit, in which the “extended effect pattern” is adopted. Since there is a deviation in the effect time in the above, it is not possible to function as an effect pattern at the time of losing the effect pattern having the content of the display effect a at the time of a big hit, and the content of the display effect a develops. As described above, it only functions as a midway effect pattern that ends at that midway stage.

  On the other hand, in the second effect mode, the display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a ′ at the time of the big hit when the effect command is “01H” is “non-extended display effect pattern (challenge bonus effect pattern. ) ”, There is no deviation in the effect time from the effect pattern (effect command“ 01H ”) and the effect pattern (effect command“ effect command “ 01H ”) will be functioned as an effect pattern (an effect pattern in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on a predetermined symbol line) at the time of losing. Further, as described above, in the second effect mode, the "non-extended display effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a'at the time of the small hit when the effect command is "02H" is also an effect at the time of hitting. Since it appears as a pattern (a bonus challenge stop design appears on a predetermined design line), even for this production pattern (production command “02H”), an effect pattern at the time of loss (a bonus challenge stop design is a predetermined one) It will function as an effect pattern that does not appear on the pattern line.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 85 (d), when the second effect mode is currently set, the main control MPU 4100a side is unable to win either the big hit or the small hit. Based on the fact that the (miss) is obtained, the variation related to the special symbol having the variation time Ta4 shown in FIG. 76 (here, it is assumed that the time is set to the same time as the timing t0 to t3). If it is started (timing t0), in the EL display unit 1400, a dynamic display of a non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of loss, which is associated with the effect command “04H”. Is started.

  That is, regarding the display effect pattern for the effect command “04H”, the display effect pattern for the effect command “03H” has the contents of the display effect a at the time of a big hit when the effect command is in the first effect mode. In view of the fact that it cannot function as an effect pattern at the time of losing the effect pattern (effect command “01H”), it is necessary to compensate for this (effect pattern at the time of loss in the first effect mode). It was prepared. Therefore, as opposed to the display effect pattern for the effect command "03H", the display effect pattern for the effect command "04H" adopts the "non-extended effect pattern" when in the second effect mode. There is a gap in the effect time with the effect pattern (effect command "01H") having the contents of the display effect a'at the time of the big hit, and an effect having the contents of the display effect a'at the time of the big hit. It cannot function as a production pattern when the pattern is lost.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the variation time Tc1 at the variation number “9” and the variation time Tc2 at the variation number “10” shown in FIG. The variable time Ta4 is prepared as a variable time having the same length as the variable time Ta4. That is, in this case, when in the second effect mode, a later-described display effect pattern (see FIG. 86 (a)) having the content of the display effect c ′ at the time of a big hit when the effect command is “09H” is “non. Since it appears as the "extended display effect pattern", the effect time with the same effect pattern (effect command "09H") does not deviate. Therefore, with regard to the display effect pattern when the effect command “04H” is set, when the second effect mode is set, the non-missing display effect c ′ associated with the effect command “04H” is displayed. By starting as a dynamic display of the extended display effect pattern, the effect pattern (bonus) at the time of losing the effect pattern (effect command “09H”) having the content of the display effect c ′ at the time of a big hit The challenge stop symbol is designed to function as an effect pattern which does not appear on a predetermined symbol line.

  In the non-extended display effect pattern (effect command “04H”) having the content of the display effect c ′ started in this way, for example, such a decorative pattern is set in the variation time Ta4 until the timing t3 arrives. , A display effect c ′ with contents such as an appropriate character struggling to stop and display in a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop pattern appears. However, at the timing t3 when the change of the special symbol is stopped, the decoration symbol is definitely stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on the predetermined symbol line without the effort of the appropriate character struggling. Become.

  As described above, the display effect pattern for the effect command “04H” appears when the specific loss variation time Ta4 is selected, but the effect command (variation time) from the main control MPU 4100a is different. It is possible to function as each lost display effect pattern for the big hit display effect patterns of the two kinds of effect contents a and c ', and as the lost effect display effect pattern for any of these big hit display effect patterns. Whether to do it is selectively set based on which of the first effect mode and the second effect mode is set. As a result, regarding the two big-hit effect commands "01H" and "09H", the big-hit effect command "01H" is generated in the first effect mode and in the second effect mode. , The appearance probability of the lost display effect pattern prepared for the big hit display effect pattern of "09H" can be changed.

  More specifically, regarding the big hit effect pattern of the effect command “01H”, in the first effect mode, the effect command “04H” at the time of losing is adopted as the second effect mode even though the effect command “04H” is adopted as the missing effect pattern. In the effect mode of, the effect command “04H” at the time of losing is not adopted as the missing effect pattern. Therefore, for the big hit effect pattern of the effect command “01H”, the appearance probability of the effect command “04H” with respect to the lost effect pattern becomes higher in the second effect mode than in the first effect mode. Regarding the big hit effect pattern of the effect command “09H”, in the first effect mode, although the effect command “04H” at the time of losing is not adopted as the missing effect pattern, the second effect In the effect mode, the effect command "04H" at the time of losing is adopted as the missing effect pattern. Therefore, for the big hit effect pattern of the effect command “09H”, the appearance probability of the effect command “04H” with respect to the lost effect pattern becomes higher in the first effect mode than in the second effect mode. As a result, it is possible to cause a variety of display effect patterns with different expectations depending on the effect mode to appear, without changing the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side one by one (see FIG. 87).

  As a reason why such special effect can be realized, for one loss variation time Ta4, the effect command in which the mutual effect lengths are adjusted by using up to the stop timing t3 of the special symbol as the effect time. Even though the big hit production pattern of "09H" and the variation time Ta4 that is shorter than the loss variation time Ta4 are used, at least the first closing control period after the symbol stop is added and used as the production time. The big hit production pattern (first production mode) of the production command "01H" in which the length of the is adjusted is prepared. That is, by preparing a big hit effect pattern whose effect time is adjusted in this way, one big hit change time Ta4 is associated with big hit effect patterns of effect commands "01H" and "09H" having different change times Ta1 and Tc1. When the loss variation time Ta4 is selected, the peripheral control MPU 4150a side can determine which of the effect contents a and c'will appear. Further, even in such a first closing control period that is added as the effect time, when a win (big hit or small hit) for opening the special winning opening 2003 is won, a certain length is maintained regardless of the type. It is also important to set such a long time (for example, 8 seconds) in order to realize such a special effect by including the effect pattern at the time of a small hit.

  FIG. 86 is a time chart showing an example of a display effect that appears on the EL display unit 1400 when any of the effect commands “09H” to “11H” shown in FIG. 76 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side.

  As shown in FIG. 86 (a), when the first effect mode is set, the variation time shown in FIG. 76 is based on the fact that the big hit is won on the main control MPU4100a side. If the variation related to the special symbol having Tc1 is started (timing t0), in the EL display unit 1400, the display effect c at the time of a big hit associated with the effect command “09H” (for example, a specific mission c The dynamic display of the extended effect pattern having the content of whether or not the player can succeed (whether or not the character C can defeat the enemy) is started. Then, the extended effect pattern (effect command “09H”) having the content of the display effect c started in this way is reached even when the timing t3 at which the change of the special symbol is stopped due to the passage of the change time Tc1 has arrived. , This is continued without ending the display effect c (without success or failure of the specific mission c).

  That is, as described above, the fluctuation time Tc1 for the fluctuation number “9” shown in FIG. 76 is not prepared as a fluctuation time having the same length as the fluctuation time Ta4 for the fluctuation number “4”. However, when the first effect mode is set, since such an "extended effect pattern" is adopted, there is a difference in the effect time with the effect pattern (effect command "04H"). Is caused. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when in the first effect mode, the effect-related relationship with the display effect pattern when the variation number is "4" (big hit effect pattern, lost effect effect). Pattern) is not given.

  Further, when dynamically displaying the extended effect pattern when the effect command is "09H", the variation of the decorative pattern is also started. However, with respect to the variation of the decorative symbol, the variation is stopped at the timing t3 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped in the lost stop mode at the time of extension.

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment, when the decorative design is fixedly stopped, the decorative design is temporarily stopped within the variation time Tc1 in the lost stop mode at the time of extension. Then, while the decorative design is temporarily stopped in the lost stop mode at the time of extension, the display effect c in the EL display unit 1400 until the decorative design is fixedly stopped by the elapse of the variation time Tc1. In regards to the above, a continuous expected effect regarding whether or not this is continued (for example, whether or not the character C that has fallen due to an attack from an enemy can stand up) is performed.

  That is, in this case, the display effect c (no development, loss) described later associated with the command “11H” shown in FIG. When the above is continued, this will function as the "development display effect c (effect where there is a chance to succeed the specific mission c)". Therefore, when this "development display effect c" appears, the special symbol is seen from the player side even though it is in the first closing control period after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. It can be understood as something that is still changing. Also, regarding the decorative pattern in the EL display unit 1400, it becomes possible to grasp that the temporary stop state is maintained even though the decorative pattern is in the state after the fixed stop. It will be possible to appear as if there is still a chance that it is shown that the jackpot is won by overturning the losing stop mode.

  At this time, however, the extended effect pattern (effect command “09H”) having the content of the display effect c is performed in a large display area (center or entire display area) of the EL display unit 1400. In the above, the variable display of the decorative pattern should be performed only in a small display area (a portion such as an end portion of the display area that is difficult to be noticed) of the EL display unit 1400 for such a display effect c. However, it is more desirable to let the player grasp the result of the big hit lottery depending on whether or not the specific mission c in the display effect c can be succeeded without paying attention to the movement of the decorative symbol.

  That is, in the extension effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (big hit) associated with the effect command “09H”, in the first closing control period after the change of the special symbol is stopped, the actual However, despite the fixed stop of the decorative pattern, the continuous expected effect at the time of the temporary stop succeeded (for example, the character C falling down due to an attack from the enemy stood up). Under the possession, the “development display effect c” will appear. In this "development display effect c", by using the time until the end timing t4 of the first closing control period on the main control MPU 4100a side, for example, the appearance of the character C facing the enemy again is displayed. A presentation is made as to whether or not the mission c can be successful.

  However, as will be described later, such "display effect c after development (effect as to whether or not a specific mission c can be succeeded)" in the first closed control period on the main control MPU 4100a side is shown in FIG. The extension effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the command “10H” is also performed. As described above, in the first effect mode, in order to make it hard to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a small hit, the display effect c (small hit) is a big hit defeat. It is more desirable to move to the next change (retention digestion of the special symbol) relatively early after is shown.

  Therefore, in the extension effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (big hit) that is associated with the effect command “09H”, by the time the end timing t4 of the first closing control period arrives, the specific effect. Without showing the success of the mission c (the character C defeats the enemy), there is no indication as to whether or not the specific mission c can be successful (the character C attacks the enemy and this succeeds). The production of whether or not) is made to appear. As a result, after the end timing t4 of the opening effect, the big hit explicit effect c can appear in a form showing that the specific mission c has succeeded, and the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “09H”. Will function as a "hit effect pattern among effect patterns having effect contents c".

  However, as described above, in the extension effect pattern at the time of a big hit, after the first closing control period having a constant length is finished, the closing control period is extended to have an indefinite length. The closing control period of 2 appears further. Then, within the second closing control period, part of the effect contents in the extended effect pattern at the time of a big hit (big hit explicit effect c) and the opening effect before the big hit game (the big hit game is started by performing a right-handed game) The production that encourages that) should be performed. When the game lever passes through the effective gate 6010n (timing ty) as a result of the handle lever 504 being operated at an appropriate timing according to the understanding speed of each player for these effects (timing ty), the second closing control period is started. After that, the big hit game and the big hit game performance are started. The details of the effect during the big hit game will be described later.

  Further, this is also as described above with reference to FIG. 84 (a), but the second closing control period from the timing t4 to the timing ty is ended based on the operation of the handle lever 504. Since it is (a period having an indefinite length), for example, the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n by the operation of the handle lever 504 immediately after the first closing control period having a certain length ends. When the game is played as, the big hit explicit effect c, the opening effect, etc. are forcibly advanced to the next effect (big hit in-game effect) without cutting at that point or almost causing the effect itself to appear (effect skipping). The Rukoto.

  On the other hand, when the first effect mode is set, the variation time Tc2 shown in FIG. 76 (here, variation time is based on the fact that the small hit is won on the main control MPU 4100a side. Suppose that the variation related to the special symbol having the same time as Tc1 is described) is started (timing t0), in the EL display unit 1400, it is associated with the effect command “10H”. A dynamic display of an extended effect pattern with the contents of display effect c at the time of small hit (for example, whether or not a specific mission c can be successful (whether or not the character C can defeat an enemy)) Be started. When the extension effect pattern (effect command “10H”) having the content of the display effect c started in this way is also an extension effect pattern (see FIG. 86 (a)) associated with the effect command “09H”. Similarly, even when the timing t3 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped due to the passage of the variation time Tc2 has arrived, the display effect c is not terminated (without success or failure of the specific mission c). ) Continue this.

  Also, when the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the effect command “10H” is dynamically displayed, the variation of the decorative symbol is started. Further, with respect to the variation of the decorative symbol, at the timing t3 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the fixed stop is performed in the lost stop mode at the time of extension. This is the same as in (a)). In addition, even if the lottery stop mode at the time of this extension is different between the big hit and the small win, the single display mode is adopted, and the display modes are distinguished. As described above, it is not done.

  Still further, while the decorative design is temporarily stopped in the lost stop mode at the time of extension, the display effect in the EL display unit 1400 until the decorative design is fixedly stopped due to the lapse of the variation time Tc2. Regarding c, the point is such that a continuous expected effect regarding whether or not this is continued (for example, whether or not the character C that has fallen due to an attack from an enemy can stand up) is performed. This is the same as the case of the extended effect pattern (see FIG. 86 (a)) associated with the effect command “09H”.

  That is, even in the extension effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the effect command “10H”, in the first closing control period after the change of the special symbol is stopped, In reality, despite the fixed stop of the decorative pattern, the succeeding expected production at the time of the temporary stop succeeded (for example, the character C falling down due to an attack from the enemy stood up). The “display effect c after development” appears under the impression. Then, in this "development display effect c", for example, the appearance of the character C facing the enemy again is displayed by using the time until the end timing t4 of the first closing control period on the main control MPU 4100a side. A presentation is made as to whether or not a specific mission c can be successful.

  Furthermore, similarly, until the end timing t4 of the first closing control period arrives, the specific mission c is not shown to be successful (the character C defeats the enemy), and the specific mission c is not displayed. An effect as to whether or not the mission c can be succeeded (an effect as to whether or not the character C attacks the enemy and succeeds) appears. However, as described above with reference to FIG. 84 (b), the extension effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the effect command “10H” has a certain length. After the first closing control period ends, the second closing control period having an indefinite length does not further appear in such a manner that the closing control period is extended. Therefore, after the end timing t4 of the first closing control period, until the end timing t5 of the control related to the opening of the special winning opening 2003 in the small opening hit game (small hit game) at the time of the production command "10H", it is specified. In the form in which the appearance of the failure of the mission c is shown, the loss explicit effect c appears. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “10H” functions as the “missing effect pattern of the effect patterns having the effect content c”.

  In the lost explicit effect c, for example, as a big hit defeat effect different from the lost explicit effect a, the character C defies the attack and the enemy escapes, and then the character C regrets. Done.

  According to the extended production patterns associated with such production commands “09H” and “10H”, the special symbol start timing t0 to the opening end timing t5 of the special winning opening 2003 (or the second closing control period) Since the time until the big hit explicit effect c ends in) will function as one effect that depends on the big hit, it becomes possible to direct the player's gaze to such an effect. It becomes possible to make it difficult to notice that the special winning opening 2003 is opened when the loss explicit presentation c is performed, and thus the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a small hit.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 86 (c), when the first effect mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a side is not awarded with either the big hit or the small hit. ) Is obtained, the fluctuation related to the special symbol having the fluctuation time Tc3 shown in FIG. 76 (here, described as being set to the same time as the timing t0 to t3) If it is started (timing t0), in the EL display unit 1400, the display effect c at the time of a loss associated with the effect command “11H” (for example, can a specific mission c be successful (character C Is able to defeat the enemy) Whether or not, etc.) Dynamic display of a non-extended display effect pattern is started. However, the display effect pattern (effect command “11H”) having the content of the display effect c started in this way is displayed when the timing t3 at which the change of the special symbol is stopped due to the passage of the change time Tc3 comes. This is ended without extending the production c (in the form of failing a specific mission c).

  More specifically, when the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (no development) at the time of losing, which is associated with the effect command “11H”, is dynamically displayed, the variation of the decorative symbol is started. Further, even in the variation of the decorative symbol, when the variation of the special symbol is stopped at the timing t3 at which the variation of the special symbol is fixedly stopped in the lost stop mode at the time of extension, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the lost stop mode at the time of extension. ing.

  In addition, while the decorative design is temporarily stopped in the lost stop mode at the time of extension, the display effect c in the EL display unit 1400 until the decorative design is fixedly stopped by the elapse of the variation time Tc3. As for the point, the effect that is expected to be continued (for example, whether or not the character C that has fallen due to an attack from an enemy can stand up) is performed. This is the same as the case of the extension effect pattern (see FIGS. 86A and 86B) associated with the commands “09H” and “10H”.

  However, in the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c at the time of loss (no development) associated with the effect command “11H”, the continuous expected effect at the time of temporary stop fails (for example, from the enemy). It is shown that the character C, which has fallen due to an attack, has not stood up yet, so that the player knows that a specific mission has failed. By preparing such an effect pattern, it becomes possible to cause the effect pattern continued after the timing t3 shown in FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b) to function as a developed effect pattern.

  In the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment, whether or not the specific mission c is successful before the timing t4 arrives even in the display effect patterns when the effect commands are "09H" and "10H". Whether or not (whether or not the character C defeats the enemy) is not shown, but whether or not the specific mission c succeeds before the arrival of the timing t4 (whether or not the character C defeats the enemy) Whether or not) may be displayed. That is, in this case, after the result display appears, the big hit explicit effect or the lose explicit effect is performed, but even with such an effect method, in the display effect c at the time of the small hit, at the time of the small hit. Most of the first closing control period of is used for the display effect c, and after that, a big hit defeat effect appears, such as displaying a state that the character C regrets. It is possible to move to the next change (retention digestion of special symbols) relatively quickly after being broken.

  By the way, as described above, such a display effect appears when any of the effect commands “09H” to “11H” shown in FIG. 76 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side in the first effect mode. Is. Then, the player wins the big hit with the winning probability of the big hit without being aware of the existence of the small hit which is not particularly required in order to realize such playability (playability) in the first effect mode. You will enjoy the game about whether or not it will be done.

  However, even when any of the production commands “09H” to “11H” shown in FIG. 76 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side, when the second production mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a is set. Even if there is no change in the normal external disadvantage game state, not to mention the contents of the production commands "09H" to "11H" itself from the side, a big winning hole 2003 due to a small win By actively adopting the display effect pattern of the effect contents on the premise of opening the game, the chance frequency of winning a prize ball by opening the special winning opening 2003 is higher than that in the first effect mode. The game playability (direction performance) as if the game play was greatly increased is realized.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), it is shown in FIG. 76 based on the fact that the big hit is won on the main control MPU4100a side when the second effect mode is set now. If the variation related to the special symbol having the variation time Tc1 is started (timing t0), the EL display unit 1400 has the content of the display effect c ′ at the time of the big hit associated with the effect command “09H”. The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern and the change of the decorative pattern are started respectively.

  However, the content of the display effect c ′ in the second effect mode is different from the content of the display effect c in the first effect mode, and for example, can a specific mission c ′ be successful? In the form, the display design pattern (challenge) having contents such as whether or not the decorative design can be stopped and displayed by the bonus challenge stop design that makes it possible to know that the special winning opening 2003 is confirmed to be open) It is prepared as a bonus effect pattern). Therefore, the variable display of the decorative pattern is also performed over the entire display area of the EL display unit 1400 (at least in a central portion of the display area, which is easily noticed). In this way, in the second effect mode, paying attention to the movement of the decorative symbol, depending on whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on the predetermined symbol line, The player is made to understand the result of the lottery.

  Then, in the non-extended display effect pattern (challenge bonus effect pattern) when the effect command is “09H”, for example, such a decorative symbol is a bonus challenge stop symbol in the variable time Tc1 until the timing t3 arrives. At the timing t3 at which the change of the special symbol is stopped, the special winning opening 2003 is opened as the display effect c ′ with the contents such as an appropriate character struggling to stop and display is displayed. In order for the player to be able to recognize that the opportunity for winning the prize ball is given, the decorative design is fixedly stopped in the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop design appears on the predetermined design line. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “09H” functions as a “hit effect pattern of effect patterns having effect content c ′”.

  Further, when the decorative design is fixedly stopped in the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop design appears, the EL display unit 1400 uses the first closing control period and the player wins by opening the special winning opening 2003. As a pre-start effect of the challenge bonus effect c ′ regarding the number of possible prize balls, a countdown effect c ′ in which the operation timing of the handle lever 504 is indicated by the countdown display in the EL display unit 1400 is displayed. I am trying to do it.

  Here, as described above, the countdown effect c'is, for example, a countdown display for about 3 to 5 seconds, which is performed while explaining that the target gate 6010n is targeted by the right-handed game. When the handle lever 504 is operated with an appropriate operation amount when the display changes to “0”, the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n immediately after the first closing control period ends. However, as will be described later, since the countdown effect c'has a different degree of expectation from the countdown effect a ', the effect contents may be different from each other (for example, different background colors). I have to.

  Therefore, according to such a countdown effect c ′, when the operation handle is operated according to the instruction of the effect, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), the end timing t4 of the first closing control period comes. Immediately after that, the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n, so that the end timing ty of the second closing control period comes earlier than in the case of the first effect mode. As a result, the challenge bonus effect regarding how many prize balls the player can obtain is started relatively early after the end timing t4 of the first closing control period arrives. As a result, in the effect, which opening mode (a long open per game, a middle open per game, a small open per game) is opened and the big winning opening 2003 is displayed. That is, in this case, the player hits the game ball to the special winning opening 2003 not only in the big hit game but also in the small open hit game (small hit game), whereby the player is in the first effect mode. Compared with the above, the game playability (performance) is realized as if the chance frequency of winning a prize ball by opening the special winning opening 2003 is significantly increased. The details of the effect during the big hit game will be described later.

By the way, as described above with reference to FIG. 84 (c) as well, in such a challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a big hit, even if the countdown display in the countdown effect c ′ is changed to “0”, the handle is operated for a long time. It is assumed that the lever 504 may not be operated. That is, in this case, the second closing control period having an indefinite length is continued for a long time, and during this second closing control period, the countdown display is "0" on the EL display unit 1400. It is more desirable to prevent a new effect from appearing, such as being displayed as is, in order to diminish the interest of the player who causes such a situation.

  However, in the situation where the challenge bonus effect pattern has appeared, such a situation in which the effect progress is stagnant is limited to the case where the big hit is won, and the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of the small hit ( In the case of FIG. 84 (d) and FIG. 86 (b)), this cannot occur. In other words, in this case, the amount of prize balls that can be won is that the possibility that a game is played per small opening is eliminated while the production is stagnant (no production) in which no new production is performed. Not only this, but also the degree of expectation of transition to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player will be dramatically increased.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), based on the fact that the small hit is won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the second effect mode is set now, FIG. Suppose that the variation related to the special symbol having the variation time Tc2 (here, described as being set to the same time as the timing t0 to t3) is started (timing t0), the EL display unit In 1400, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the small hit associated with the effect command “10H” and the variation of the decorative pattern are started respectively.

  Then, the non-extended display effect pattern (effect command “10H”) having the content of the display effect c ′ started in this way also has, for example, such a decorative pattern in the variable time Tc2 until the timing t3 arrives. At the timing t3 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped, a display effect c ′ having contents such as an appropriate character struggling to stop and display the bonus challenge stop symbol appears and the special symbol fluctuation is stopped. The challenge symbol is fixedly stopped in a stop display mode in which the symbol is displayed on the predetermined symbol line. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “10H” functions as a “hit effect pattern of effect patterns having effect content c ′”.

  However, as described above, at the time of winning the small hit, the special symbol is stopped for the closing control period (opening period) from when the special symbol is stopped until the small opening hit game (small hit game) is started. It only consists of the time (the first closing control period having a certain length) from the start of the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) to the time up. When the timer expires, the effective gate 6010n A small open hit game (small hit game) is started regardless of whether or not the game ball has passed to (see FIG. 73).

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU4150a according to the present embodiment, even in the case of the display effect pattern when the effect command is "10H", as in the case of the display effect pattern when the effect command is "09H", the decorative pattern When is fixedly stopped with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, the first closing control period is used, and how many prize balls can be obtained by the player by opening the special winning opening 2003 As a pre-start effect of the challenge bonus effect regarding whether it is a thing, a countdown effect c'in which the operation timing of the handle lever 504 is indicated by the countdown display on the EL display unit 1400 is performed.

  That is, in the display effect pattern when in the second effect mode, the big hit and the small hit are both handled in the same way as the big winning opening 2003 being opened, and the variation of the decorative pattern is started. The effect contents from the timing t0 to the challenge bonus effect are not distinguished, and when the handle lever 504 is operated in accordance with the instruction of the effect, the challenge bonus is given from the countdown effect c ′ through the preceding effect (not shown). The challenge bonus effect is started with the same series of effect contents as in the challenge bonus effect pattern (effect command “09H”) at the time of a big hit, which leads to effect. Therefore, not only the big hits but also the small hits are treated as one type (hit type) as a hit that allows the winning of a prize ball by opening the big winning opening 2003. It is possible to perform an effect display including which game mode appears, including small games per small opening as well as games and games per medium opening. As a result, as compared with when in the first effect mode, the game characteristic (effect characteristic) as if the chance frequency of winning a prize ball by opening the special winning opening 2003 is significantly increased is realized. . It should be noted that, of the long open per game, the medium open per game, and the small open per game, the small open per game ends in a relatively short time, and therefore, the small hit among the large hits A to E and the small hit. Whether or not the winning is won may be made known to the player by displaying a specific image that does not appear when the big hit is won in the effect within the first closing control period.

  As described above, with regard to the display effect pattern when the effect command is “10H”, even though the effect is a display effect pattern based on one effect command, the small hit is treated as a no-chance loss in which no chance of winning a prize ball is given. The extended effect pattern in the first effect mode and the small hit are treated as hits of a high chance that an opportunity of winning a prize ball is given (similar to the effect pattern at the time of a big hit (effect command "09H")) It is selectively executed as one of the non-extended display effect patterns in the effect mode of No. 2. That is, in this case, the effect information related to the winning is appropriately reversed on the side of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, so that a variety of effects having greatly different effect contents can be produced without changing the logic on the side of the main control MPU 4100a. You will be able to make it happen.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 86 (c), when the second effect mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a side is not hit with either a big hit or a small hit (a pure hit). ) Is obtained, the fluctuation related to the special symbol having the fluctuation time Tc3 shown in FIG. If it is started (timing t0), in the EL display unit 1400, a dynamic display of a non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of loss, which is associated with the effect command “11H”. , And start changing the decorative pattern.

  Then, the non-extended display effect pattern (effect command "11H") having the content of the display effect c'started in this way also has, for example, such a decorative pattern in the variable time Tc3 until the timing t3 arrives. , A display effect c ′ with contents such as an appropriate character struggling to stop and display in a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop design appears. However, at the timing t3 when the change of the special symbol is stopped, the decoration symbol is definitely stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on the predetermined symbol line without the effort of the appropriate character struggling. It becomes (challenge bonus production pattern). As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “11H” functions as the “missing effect pattern of the effect patterns having the effect content c ′”.

  In this way, the display effect pattern for the effect command “11H” is “non-extended display effect pattern” regardless of the effect mode. Therefore, when the display effect pattern is in the first effect mode, between the effect pattern (effect command “09H”) and the effect pattern having the content of the display effect c at the time of the big hit in which the “extended effect pattern” is adopted. Since there is a deviation in the effect time in the above, it cannot function as an effect pattern at the time of a loss with respect to an effect pattern having the content of the display effect c at the time of a big hit, and the content of the display effect c is developed. As described above, it only functions as a midway effect pattern that ends at that midway stage.

  On the other hand, in the second effect mode, the display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the big hit when the effect command “09H” appears as the “non-extended display effect pattern”. , For the effect pattern (effect command "09H") having the contents of the effect "display effect c'at the time of a big hit, there is no deviation in the effect time from the effect pattern (effect command" 09H "). Will be used as an effect pattern (an effect pattern in which a bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on a predetermined symbol line). Further, as described above, when in the second effect mode, the "non-extended display effect pattern" having the contents of the display effect c'at the time of the small hit when the effect command is "10H" is also an effect at the time of hitting. Since a pattern (a bonus challenge stop design appears on a predetermined design line) appears as a pattern, an effect pattern at the time of a loss (a bonus challenge stop design is a predetermined design pattern for this production command (production command “10H”)) It will function as an effect pattern that does not appear on the design line.

  Thus, the display effect pattern for the effect command “09H” corresponds to the display effect pattern for the effect command “01H” shown in FIG. 85 (a), and for the effect command “10H”. The display effect pattern corresponds to the display effect pattern for the effect command “02H” shown in FIG. 85 (b), and the display effect pattern for the effect command “11H” is shown in FIG. 85 (c). It corresponds to the display effect pattern when the effect command “03H” is used, and the effect contents of the corresponding effect patterns are different from each other, but the effect series addressed to itself (effect content a series, effect content). For the c series), they function as production patterns having almost the same roles.

  However, in the production content c series (production commands “09H” to “11H”), a display production pattern corresponding to the production command “04H” in the production content a series (production commands “01H” to “04H”) is prepared. Not not. That is, also in the effect content c series, if a display effect pattern corresponding to the effect command “04H” is prepared, in the first effect pattern, a display effect pattern corresponding to the effect command “09H” is generated. Although this can be effectively functioned as a lost display effect pattern, in the second effect pattern, it cannot be made to function as a lost display effect pattern with respect to the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “09H”. Therefore, even though it has been given a relatively long time, there was a big hit pattern combination that does not appear, and there was a display pattern for exclusive use of the loss. It is a thing.

  Therefore, in the first effect mode, for the hit effect pattern at the time of the effect command "09H", the effect pattern at the time of loss (pure loss) that does not satisfy the specific condition is adopted as the loss effect pattern. Only the effect pattern when a specific condition is satisfied (display effect pattern when the effect command is "10H") functions as the only existence that replaces the effect pattern at the time of the loss (pure loss). Come to do. That is, in this case, in the effect content c series (effect commands “09H” to “11H”), unlike the effect content a series (effect commands “01H” to “04H”), the “developed display effect c” appears. It is unavoidable to set the jackpot expectation when hitting within a range limited by the appearance ratio of the jackpot and the jackpot. However, the effect content c of the effect content c series (effect commands “09H” to “11H”) has a longer time than the effect content a of the effect content a series (effect commands “01H” to “04H”). Also, as the big hit expectation degree, it is executed as an effect having a higher expectation degree than the effect content a. Therefore, with regard to the jackpot expectation degree when the “development display effect c” appears, even if it is within the range restricted by the appearance ratio of the jackpot and the jackpot, this is set as a required appropriate value described later. It is relatively easy to set.

  Regarding the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “04H” of the effect content a series (effect commands “01H” to “04H”), when the second effect mode is selected, effect content a By making it function not as a hit production pattern (production command "01H", "02H") of the series, but as a production effect pattern for the hit production pattern (production command "09H", "10H") of the production content c series. As described above, it is arranged to avoid the presence of a big hit pattern combination as a display effect pattern for exclusive use with a loss that does not appear. Therefore, in the effect contents c series (effect commands “09H” to “11H”), when the second effect mode is set, the hit effect patterns (effect commands “09H” and “10H”) are prepared. The loss effect pattern appears with a higher probability than the ratio of the loss effect pattern (effect command “11H”), by the addition of the selection probability of the display effect pattern of the effect command “04H”.

Further, although the details are omitted, the respective display effect patterns respectively associated with the effect commands “05H”, “06H”, “07H”, and “08H” of the effect content b series shown in FIG. Display in the same manner as the respective display effect patterns (see FIGS. 85 (a) to (d)) associated with the a-series effect commands “01H”, “02H”, “03H”, and “04H”. It is set as a production pattern. Furthermore, the respective display effect patterns respectively associated with the effect commands “12H”, “13H”, and “14H” of the effect content d series shown in FIG. 76 are the effect command “0” of the effect content c series.
It is set as a display effect pattern having the same aspect as each of the display effect patterns (see FIGS. 86A to 86C) associated with 9H ”,“ 10H ”, and“ 11H ”, respectively. That is, the respective display effect patterns respectively associated with the effect commands “05H”, “06H”, “07H”, and “08H” of the effect content b series shown in FIG. 76, and the effect content d shown in FIG. 76. The effect relations between the respective display effect patterns respectively associated with the series effect commands “12H”, “13H”, and “14H” are the effect commands “01H”, “02H” of the effect content a series, Display effect patterns (see FIGS. 85 (a) to (d)) respectively associated with "03H" and "04H" and effect commands "09H", "10H", "11H" of the effect content c series. The display effect patterns (see FIGS. 86 (a) to 86 (c)) that are associated with each other are set to have the above-described effect relationship.

  FIG. 87 (a) is a table showing the jackpot expectation and the like in the first effect mode separately for each effect content series, and FIG. 87 (b) is a challenge in the second effect mode. It is a table showing a bonus rush expectation degree and the like for each performance content series. Regarding the numerical values indicating the probabilities, the second decimal place is rounded off to the first decimal place, and thus the total probability value of each element may not be 100%.

  According to the setting mode relating to such a display effect pattern, as to the big hit expectation degree which is the expectation degree that the hit effect appears in the first effect mode, as shown in FIG. The jackpot expectation rate when the display effect pattern appears is "0.5%", and the jackpot expectation degree when the display effect pattern of the effect content b appears is "1.5%" and the effect content c The jackpot expectation when the display effect pattern appears is "13.7%", and the jackpot expectation when the display effect pattern of the effect content d appears is "33.1%". It should be noted that when the display effect pattern of the effect content e appears, the jackpot expectation degree is “100%”, and therefore this is omitted in the table. In the display effect pattern of the effect content e, a definite effect that the big hit is won appears regardless of the effect mode.

  Also, regarding the big hit expectation degree (expectation degree at which a hit effect appears) at the stage when each display effect pattern that can appear in the first effect mode has developed, when the developed effect content a appears. The jackpot expectation of "1.3%", the jackpot expectation when the post-development effect content b appears "3.7%", and the jackpot when the post-development effect content c appears The degree of expectation is "25%", and the degree of expectation of jackpot when the effect content d after development appears is "72.7%".

  On the other hand, regarding the challenge bonus plunge expectation degree, which is the degree of expectation that the hit effect appears in the second effect mode, when the display effect pattern of the effect content a ′ appears, as shown in FIG. 87 (b). The challenge bonus plunge expectation level is “7.9%”, and the challenge bonus plunge expectation level when the display effect pattern of the effect content b ′ appears is “11.8%” and the effect content c ′ is displayed. The challenge bonus plunge expectation degree when the effect pattern appears is “15.4%”, and the challenge bonus plunge expectation degree when the display effect pattern of the effect content d ′ appears is “10%”.

  That is, as described above, only the display effect patterns of the effect contents a and b of the effect contents a to d are the big hit effect patterns (effect command “01H”, effect command “05H” set as the extended effect patterns. )), A non-extended display effect pattern (effect command “04H”, effect command “08H”) that can function as a lost effect pattern only in the first effect mode is prepared. Then, on this, the non-extended display effect pattern (effect command “04H”, effect command “08H”) prepared in this manner is used as the hit effect pattern (effect command “effect command“ 04H ”, effect command“ 08H ”) in the second effect mode. 09H ”, the effect command“ 10H ”) and the hit effect pattern (effect command“ 12H ”, effect command“ 13H ”) of the effect content d ′ are diverted as respective lost effect patterns.

  According to the display effect pattern associated with such effect commands “04H” and “08H”, the winning effect is expected to appear in the first effect mode, including the effect contents a and b after development. Although the degree (big hit expectation) is low, the appearance probability of each display effect pattern of the effect contents a and b is increased (for each display effect pattern of the effect contents c and d). It becomes possible to avoid repeating only display effect patterns that cannot be expected. Furthermore, for each of the display effect patterns of the effect contents c and d, the appearance probability including the effect contents c and d after development is low, but the hit effect appears in each of the display effect patterns of the effect contents c and d. The expectation level (big hit expectation level) is increased (for each display effect pattern of effect contents a and b), whereby the entertainment of the game when a specific display effect pattern (effect contents c and d) appears. Can be improved.

  On the contrary, the display effect patterns associated with such effect commands “04H” and “08H” are used as display effect patterns for the effect contents c and d series in the second effect mode. As a result, the appearance probability of the production contents c and d series can be increased accordingly (operation for the appearance probability). This makes it possible to reduce the disparity in the appearance probability between the effect contents a to d and the expectation degree at which the hit effect appears than in the first effect mode, and the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side can be It is possible to realize a wide variety of effects with greatly different effect contents without making any changes.

  Moreover, in the second effect mode, the display effects associated with the effect commands “04H” and “08H” regarding the disparity between the effect contents with respect to the expectation level (hit level of challenge bonus) at which the hit effect appears. In addition to the fact that the pattern is used as a display production pattern of the production contents c and d series, a big hit as well as a small hit is one of the types as a hit that can be won by opening the big winning opening 2003. It is designed to be further reduced by being treated as (an operation to reduce the disparity in the degree of expectation in which the hit effect appears).

  According to the production mode when in the second production mode, the display production patterns of the production contents a ′ to d ′ are relatively likely to appear regardless of the type of the production contents a ′ to d ′. Become. Further, the rush probability of the challenge bonus effect (probability of executing the hit effect) in which the opportunity to win the prize ball is confirmed is more equalized than that in the first effect mode (here, the effect content is Within the range of ± 10% between the types of a'to d '), even if any of the effect contents a'to d'appear due to the fact that the above-mentioned difference in appearance probability is filled, the game It is easy for a person to expect an opportunity to win a prize ball.

  In this respect, when in the second effect mode, when the player enters (executes) the challenge bonus effect, "the special winning opening 2003 is opened in any mode (long open per game, medium open per open game, small open per open game). It is better to make each of the display contents of the effect contents a ′ to d ′ relatively easy to appear than to make the display contents a ′ to d ′ appear biased to one of them. It is more desirable to suppress the deterioration of the entertainment level.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), in the display effect pattern of the effect contents a'to d'according to this embodiment, the effect content a'has the largest appearance probability of the game per long and medium opening. It becomes smaller, and becomes gradually larger in the order of effect contents b ′, c ′, d ′. In addition, regarding the appearance probability of the game per small opening, the effect contents a ′ are the largest, and the effect contents b ′, c ′, d ′ are gradually decreased in this order. Therefore, when the display effect pattern of the effect content a'appears, there is certainly a high possibility that the special winning opening 2003 will be opened by a small opening game, but at least a small amount of prize balls (in the present embodiment, as a privilege). , 40 to 50 pieces) have been confirmed to be obtainable, and with a color tone that is expected to open the big winning hole 2003 by a long open game or a medium open game. You will be able to enjoy it as a production. Further, when the display effect pattern of the effect content d'appears, the probability that the big winning hole 2003 will be opened by the long open hit game or the middle open hit game, the big win hole 2003 will be opened by the small open hit game. Since it is higher than the probability that at least a small amount of prize balls can be won as a privilege, it is rather confirmed that the big winning hole 2003 is based on a long open game or a medium open game. It will function as an effect of the shade such as whether or not it is released. Then, the display effect patterns of the effect contents b ′ and c ′ respectively function as the effect of the color tone between the display effect pattern of the effect content a ′ and the display effect pattern of the effect content d ′. The display effect pattern of the effect content b ′ has a darker shade of the effect of the display effect pattern of the effect content a ′, and the display effect pattern of the effect content c ′ has a shade of effect of the display effect pattern of the effect content d ′. Is getting darker. Therefore, since the display effect patterns of such effect contents a ′ to d ′ are relatively easy to appear, the player can enjoy effects of various shades.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, with respect to the above-described operation for reducing the disparity in the degree of expectation that the hit effect appears between the effect contents compared to when in the first effect mode, the hit effect is expected to appear. It is decided that the magnitude relationship will be reversed depending on the production mode. More specifically, as shown in (a) and (b) of FIG. 106, in the first effect mode, the expectation levels of effect contents b and c are “1.5%” and “13”, respectively. 7% ”, which is smaller than the expectation level“ 33.1% ”of the effect content d, the expectation levels of effect contents b ′ and c ′ are in the second effect mode. These are "11.8%" and "15.4%", respectively, which are higher than the expectation level "10%" of the effect content d '. Even with such a setting mode, it is possible to realize a wide variety of effects with greatly different effect contents without changing the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side by step.

  However, when the effect pattern of the effect content d'appears, the degree of expectation (probability) that the winning effect (challenge bonus effect) is executed is certainly higher than when the effect patterns of the effect content b'and c'appear. Although it is low, as long as the challenge bonus effect is entered, there is a higher probability that the large winning opening 2003 will be opened by the game per long and medium opening with a higher probability than in the case of the effect contents b'and c '. , It is easy to get a lot of balls. Therefore, the effect patterns of the effect contents b ′ and c ′ and the effect pattern of the effect content d ′ are divided according to the player, and such various shades are given according to the display effect pattern. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment appeal.

  Next, based on the result of the big hit lottery in the normal external disadvantage game state, an example of the effect that appears on the EL display unit 1400 when the control for opening the special winning opening 2003 is being performed will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 76, FIG. 85 (a) and FIG. 86 (a), according to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the first effect mode, types of big hits (big hit A to big hit E) ) Does not change the effect contents, and the type thereof is not shown, and the control for opening the special winning opening 2003 (here, the control for the big hit game) is started while being kept secret. It will be. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the first effect mode, the type and the period of the jackpot are determined by using the period when the control for opening the special winning opening 2003 is being performed. An effect that can show the game state after the end will be performed.

  That is, as described above, when the result of the big hit lottery in the normal external disadvantage game state is either big hit A or B, both the time saving function and the probability fluctuation function are activated after the big hit game is finished. It will be controlled to the probability variation external advantageous game state. Therefore, when one of the big hits A and B is won, first, in the EL display unit 1400, after clearly showing that the big hit has been won as the big hit explicit effects a to d, a long-time opening / closing pattern and a medium time The effect (information for big bonuses, regular bonuses, etc.) relating to the payout amount as to whether or not the special winning opening 2003 is opened will be performed (big hit game in-game effect). In addition, as the big hit game effect during such a big hit amount, even if it is not performed after the big hit explicit effects a to d, the big hit is selected in the big hit explicit effects a to d. When clearly indicating, the information regarding the payout amount (type of big hit) may be displayed together (simultaneous display).

  In addition, when the result of the big hit lottery in the normal external disadvantage game state is one of the big hits C to E, the external disadvantage game state in which the time saving function does not operate after the jackpot game ends (the probability variation function also operates) Normal external disadvantage game state, or probability variation external disadvantage game state in which the probability fluctuation function operates) is controlled. Then, as the effect state after the big hit game is finished, it is controlled to a predetermined latent effect state in which it is kept secret whether or not the probability variation function is in operation. Therefore, when one of the big hits C to E is won, first, in the EL display unit 1400, after clearly showing that the big hit has been won as the big hit explicit effects a to d, either one of the big hits A and B is hit. By performing an effect different from the big hit game effect when is being won, an effect indicating that one of the big hits C to E of the big hits A to E is won is performed ( Big hit game production). In addition, when the big hits C to E are won, since the open mode of the middle open hit game is adopted in all cases, it is only possible to show that the big hits C to E have been won, and the information on the amount of coins paid out is also shown. It has been shown. In addition, with respect to the effects shown that any of the big hits C to E has been won, even if it is not performed after the big hit explicit effects a to d are performed, the big hits in the big hit explicit effects a to d are won. It may also be displayed (simultaneous display) together with the fact that the winning is clearly indicated.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 76, FIG. 85 (a) and FIG. 86 (a), in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the second effect mode, it is possible to open the special winning opening 2003. There is no difference in the content of the effect depending on the type of big hit (big hit A to big hit E, small hit), and the type is not shown, and the control for opening the special winning opening 2003 remains concealed ( Here, the control for the big hit game or the small hit game) will be started. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the second effect mode, the type of hit (big hit, small hit is used by using the period when the control for opening the special winning opening 2003 is being performed. The above-mentioned challenge bonus effect, in which the winning, jackpot type), the gaming state after the end of the period, and the like can be shown, is performed.

  That is, in the opening effect (challenge bonus effect) in the second effect mode, first, in what mode (long open per game, medium open per game, small open per game), the special winning opening 2003 is released. The information that is related to the payout amount (such as a big bonus, regular bonus, or small bonus) will be performed. As a result, when it is shown that the special winning opening 2003 is open due to the long open per game (big bonus), it is naturally shown that it is controlled to the probabilistic external advantageous gaming state based on the winning of the big hit A. Will be done. Also, when it is shown that the special winning opening 2003 is open due to the game of small opening (small bonus), it is a winning of the small hit and it is naturally shown that the game state is not changed. Becomes

  However, when it is shown that the special winning opening 2003 is open due to the middle open game (regular bonus), a battle effect by a predetermined character is further performed as an open effect. As a result, when the character wins in the same battle effect, it is shown that the character is controlled to the probability variation external advantageous game state based on the winning of the big hit B. On the other hand, when the character is defeated in the same battle production, it is shown that one of the big hits C to E has been won, and after the end of the open production (big hit game), a time saving The external disadvantage game state in which the function does not operate (normal external disadvantage game state in which the probability variation function does not operate, or the probability variation external disadvantage game state in which the probability variation function operates) is controlled. Then, as the effect state after the big hit game is finished, it is controlled to a predetermined latent effect state in which it is kept secret whether or not the probability variation function is in operation.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the predetermined latent effect state is limited to the period until the special symbol changes a specific number of times (for example, 10 times). For example, when a specific enemy character is not encountered until the end of the same period, it indicates that the player is in a probabilistic external disadvantage game state, while when a specific enemy character is encountered during the same period, a predetermined battle effect is performed. I am trying. When the character wins in this battle effect, it indicates that the jackpot has been won, and when the character loses, it indicates that the character is normally in the external disadvantage game state, thereby waiting for the end of the same period. The latent production state is ended without any action.

  In this way, according to the latent production method in which the current game state is shown by the end of the period until the special symbol changes a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) at the latest, as a player, It becomes possible to purely enjoy whether or not the game is in the game state, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game enjoyment due to the fact that the game state is kept secret for a long time although the time saving function is not activated.

  By the way, in the example described above with reference to FIG. 85 (a), the effect command "01H" shown in FIG. 76 in the first effect mode has the "extended effect pattern" with the content of the display effect a. 88 is associated with each other, but as shown in FIG. 88, in addition to the “extension effect pattern”, a “non-extension display effect pattern” having the content of the display effect a is also associated. You may

  That is, in this case, in the first effect mode, when the effect command “01H” shown in FIG. 76 is received, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines the “extended effect pattern” having the content of the display effect a and the display effect a. One of the “non-extended display effect patterns” having the content of “1” is selected, and the EL display unit 1400 starts dynamic display of the selected display effect pattern.

  Here, as a method for selecting the “extended effect pattern” having the content of the display effect a and the “non-extended display effect pattern” having the content of the display effect a, for example, Based on the result of a predetermined effect lottery based on the method, a method of selecting one of the "extended effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a and the "non-extended display effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a Or (b) "extension effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a and "non-extension display effect pattern having the content of the display effect a" based on the type of the jackpot that is won in the jackpot lottery. In addition to the method of selecting any of the above, etc., a method of combining (a) and (b) can be adopted.

  Then, when the method (a) is adopted, how many of the values of the random numbers that can be acquired are associated with the “extension effect pattern” and the “non-extension display effect pattern”, respectively. In the first effect mode, the “extended effect” having the content of the display effect a when the effect command “01H” shown in FIG. The respective appearance probabilities of the "pattern" and the "non-extended display effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a will be determined. Regarding the setting of such appearance probability, it is the end of the display effect pattern that the big hit expectation degree is higher when the "extended effect pattern" appears than the "non-extended display effect pattern". It is more desirable to entertain the production.

  Further, in the case of adopting the method of (b), when a specific winning type (for example, a big hit A) is won, a dynamic "non-extended display effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a is displayed. The display is started on the EL display unit 1400. According to such a rendering method, at timing t1, the winning result for at least a specific winning species (for example, big hit A) is shown.

  For example, at the stop timing t1 of the special symbol, when a big hit pattern (a big hit manifestation effect that is clearly a big hit) by the "non-extended display effect pattern" appears, "big hit A" which is the most advantageous to the player. It is possible to know that the player has been won, and in the first closing control period, the EL display unit 1400 performs an opening effect such as “Congratulations” to celebrate the player. Then, for example, at the timing t2 when the first closing control period ends and the second closing control period starts, it is effective to switch to the effect display that the big hit game should be started by the right-handed game. The timing tx at which the game ball passes through the gate 6010n is relatively likely to come earlier than in the case of the extended display effect pattern, and in the subsequent big hit game, the big hit effect dedicated to the "big hit A" is performed. Become. However, at the stop timing t1 of the special symbol, when the hit effect by the "non-extended display effect pattern" (a big hit explicit effect that is clearly a big hit) does not appear, the "big hit A" which is the most advantageous for the player. On the contrary, it will be possible to understand that the player has not been elected. In this case, it is possible to know that one of the "big hit B" to "big hit E" has been won when the big hit explicit effect appears after the above-mentioned continuous expected effect of the "extended effect pattern". It will be.

  Further, when adopting the method of combining (a) and (b), an effect lottery table is prepared for each type of jackpot, and based on the obtained random number value while referring to this effect lottery table. Then, one of the "extension effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a and the "non-extension display effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a is selected. That is, by preparing an effect lottery table for each type of jackpot, it is possible to make the selection rates of the “extended effect pattern” and the “non-extended display effect pattern” in each table different. As a result, for example, the expectation of the type of the jackpot that has been won can be made different depending on whether the jackpot is clearly won in the "extended production pattern" or the "non-extended display production pattern". In addition to being able to do it, when the “non-extended production pattern” has a lower jackpot expectation, it is clearly said that it is a jackpot. , "Extended effect pattern" has a higher expectation of big hits, but when it is clearly shown that it is a big hit, the expectation of "big hit A" having the highest advantage is low, and so on. Will also be possible.

  Regarding the method for selecting the "extended production pattern" and the "non-extended display production pattern", in addition to the display production pattern of the production command "01H" described above, the production command "05H" shown in FIG. The display effect patterns of "09H" and "12H" can be similarly adopted. However, when it is adopted as the display effect pattern of the effect commands “01H” and “05H”, the display effect patterns of the effect commands “03H” and “07H” are lost with respect to the display effect pattern as the hit effect pattern. It becomes possible to function as a pattern.

  Also, in the example described above with reference to FIG. 86 (a), the effect command "02H" shown in FIG. 76 in the first effect mode has the "extended effect pattern" with the content of the display effect a. 89, the "extension effect pattern" having the content of the display effect c is also associated with the "extension effect pattern" as shown in FIG. 89. Good.

  That is, in the "extension effect pattern having the content of the display effect c" thus associated with the effect command "02H", the display effect is performed by extending the stop timing t1 of the special symbol. , The production content is only the display production pattern (see FIG. 86 (c)) of the production command “11H” when in the first production mode, and the post-development display production in which the jackpot expectation is higher. The content of the performance will not appear. Therefore, in the first effect mode, when the effect command “02H” shown in FIG. 76 is received, a part of the effect command is allocated to effect contents in which such a developed display effect does not appear. It is possible to set a higher winning probability for a small hit while keeping the appearance probability of the developed display effect in the first effect mode low. In this case, in the second effect mode, the rush probability to the challenge bonus effect (the degree of expectation that the hit effect appears) is increased by the amount that the winning probability of the small hit is set higher. As a result, it is possible to give an opportunity to obtain a prize ball by opening the special winning opening 2003 with a higher probability.

  In this case, in the first effect mode, when the effect command “02H” shown in FIG. 76 is received, the peripheral control MPU 4150a causes the “extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a” and the “display effect”. "Extension effect pattern having the content of c" is selected, and the EL display unit 1400 starts the dynamic display of the selected display effect pattern. As a method for selecting the “extension effect pattern having the content of the display effect a” and the “extension effect pattern having the content of the display effect c”, for example, the result of a predetermined effect lottery based on random numbers On the basis of the above, it is possible to employ a method of selecting one of the "extension effect pattern having the content of the display effect a" and the "extension effect pattern having the content of the display effect c". When this method is adopted, how many of the values of the random numbers that can be acquired are the "extension effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a" and the "extension effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c". The content of the display effect a when the effect command “02H” shown in FIG. 76 is received in the first effect mode, depending on the ratio of the random number values that are associated in advance with each other. The respective appearance probabilities of the "extended effect pattern having" and the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c "are determined.

  Also, regarding the method of selecting the "extension effect pattern having the content of the display effect a" and the "extension effect pattern having the content of the display effect c", the display effect pattern of the above-mentioned effect command "02H" In addition to the above, the display effect pattern of the effect command "06H" shown in FIG. 76 can be similarly adopted. When adopted as the display effect pattern of this effect command "06H", "extension effect pattern having contents of display effect b" and "extension effect pattern having contents of display effect d" should be selected. Becomes

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the variation pattern (variation number "15", effect command "15H") shown in FIG. 76 for confirming the big hit is prepared. You may omit it. That is, in this case, when the special winning opening 2003 is opened in the second effect mode, the challenge bonus effect pattern can be made to appear without fail.

By the way, in the form of the game processing pattern at the time of a big hit (the case of the above-mentioned challenge bonus) when the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n as the start of the accessory continuous operation device, in the first place, a small hit When is won, there is a problem that the player can easily recognize that it is not a big hit. That is, in the case of a big hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device, the right-handed game ball is supplied to the game ball guide path unit 6010, the game ball is guided to the effective gate 6010n, and by passing therethrough,
The accessory continuous operation device is activated and the attacker is released. In this way, in the big hit with the operation of the condition device, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is entrusted to the timing of the player, whereas in the case of the small hit without the operation of the condition device, the game ball Regardless of whether or not it passes through the effective gate 6010n, that is, even if the accessory continuous operation device does not operate, after the first closing control period having a constant length elapses, the special winning opening 2003 is It will be released. Therefore, even if the EL display unit 1400 (upper plate liquid crystal display device 244) teaches a right-handed stroke, a player who does not make a right-handed stroke, whether the player intentionally or not, or a delayed right-handed stroke. The player who is trying to do so can easily determine whether the lottery result is a big hit or a small hit.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the right-handed game ball passes through the effect gate 6011 before passing through the effective gate 6010n, and the preceding effect (advance notice) occurs before the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n. Production) was executed. Therefore, regardless of whether the lottery result is a big hit or a small hit, the player expects the preceding effect and immediately makes a right hit based on the teaching of the EL display device, and even if the gaming state is a small hit. The game ball will pass through the effective gate 6010n within the first closing control period. As a result, even if the lottery result is a small hit, the big winning opening 2003 will be opened (short-term open) after the right-handed game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n. It becomes difficult to distinguish whether it is a big hit or a small hit. In addition, when the lottery result is a big hit, for example, when the lottery result is a big hit, for example, when the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n, the big winning opening 2003 is hidden without explicitly indicating that it is a probability fluctuation state. Since a so-called latent probability change can occur, the player can expect that the lottery result will be a big hit even if the special winning opening 2003 is opened for a short period of time.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a game ball guide path unit 6010 is provided on the right side of the game area 5a so that all the game balls that are hit to the right are supplied to the game ball guide path unit 6010. Since the entrance end of the game ball guideway unit 6010 opens at the upper right of the game area 5a, the game ball that has been hit to the right and has reached the right side of the game area 5a will immediately enter the game ball guideway unit 6010. . After that, the game ball passes through the effect gate 6011 immediately below the opening of the game ball guideway unit 6010, and then always passes through the effective gate 6010n. Therefore, although the game ball has not passed through the effective gate 6010n at the stage when the game ball has passed through the effect gate 6011, a pioneering effect for the game ball passing through the effective gate may be performed by the game machine. Become.

  As described above, the falling speed of the game ball is alleviated by the bent portion 6010d and the straight portion 6010d of the game ball guideway unit (also called a warp unit) 6010, so that the game ball spends a predetermined time to play the game. It passes through the ball guide path unit 6010 and reaches the effective gate 6010n at the bottom of the game ball guide path unit. In this way, the gaming machine can earn time as compared with the case where the gaming ball freely falls after passing through the effect gate 6011 to passing through the effective gate 6010n. Use the time to improve the quality of production by sufficiently long processing time for various production processes such as preceding production, suggestive production, notice selection, etc. which are generated when the game ball passes through the production gate 6011. can do.

  Next, an effective embodiment in the case of performing a game process performed when the lottery result is a big hit or a small hit by using the effect gate 6011 and the effective gate 6010n will be described. When the main control board 4100 performs a lottery by entering a ball into the first starting opening 2001 and determines whether a big hit or a small hit is achieved, the peripheral control board 4140 receives a command from the main control board 4100 and suggests a lottery result. A predetermined effect pattern is determined from the effect patterns of and the special effect is started. As a special effect, the EL display unit 1400 displays, for example, a duel scene in which an enemy character (boss zombie) appears and a player-side character (warrior fighting a zombie) fights. Next, the peripheral control board 4140 displays a still image of a scene as if a boss zombie attacks the player on the EL display unit 1400, and additionally displays a “right hit” instruction. When the player receives this instruction and hits right, the right-handed game ball passes through the effect gate 6011, and when the peripheral control board 4140 receives the detection signal from the gate sensor, the player's interest is invited from the speaker. A sound effect is sounded before the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n for operating the accessory continuous operation device. At this point, the player expects or illusions that the lottery result is a big hit even if the lottery result is actually a small hit. When the game ball that has passed through the production gate 6011 passes through the effective gate 6010n and the peripheral control board 4140 receives the detection signal from the gate switch of the effective gate 6010n, if the lottery result is a big hit, the warrior wins the zombie production. (Big hit result effect) is displayed on the EL display unit 1400 to suggest a big hit to the player. Since the accessory continuous operation device is activated by the game ball passing through the effective gate 6010n, the peripheral control board 4140 is for a big hit in accordance with the large winning opening 2003 being opened for a plurality of rounds. Perform the performance. On the other hand, in the case where the lottery result is a small hit, since the accessory continuous operation device is not operated, the main control board 4100 does not trigger the passage of the game ball at the effective gate 6010n, and the main control board 4100 has a short winning period 2003. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 4140 executes an effect in which the warrior loses to the zombie (small hit result effect) on the EL display unit 1400, suggesting to the player that it is not a big hit. By the instruction on the EL display unit 1400, the player hits the game ball to the right without delay, so that the big winning opening in the case of a small hit is actually opened after the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n. Done.

  Even if the above-described preceding effect in which the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n is performed without providing the effect gate 6011, the timing at which the game ball is launched by the player is uncertain, and the preceding effect is preceded by the result effect. In the first place, it is difficult to generate. If only the result production that distinguishes between big hits and small hits other than big hits is performed with the passage of the effective gate of the game ball as an opportunity, the production must be monotonous and uninteresting in the first place. Even if there is a right-handing instruction, the player does not give much importance to this and cannot have sufficient incentive to launch a game ball toward the effective gate 6010n. To that extent, it may be possible for the player to easily understand whether the big hit or the small hit. Therefore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is provided with the effect gate 6011 as described above. Although the detection information of the gate switch of the effect gate 6011 has been described as being input to the peripheral control board 4140, the detection information of the gate switch of the effect gate 6011 may be input to the main control board 4100. .. At this time, the peripheral control board 4140 can recognize that the game ball has passed the effect gate according to a command from the main control board 4100.

  Since the preceding effect due to the game ball passing through the effect gate 6011 is related to the result effect due to the game ball passing through the effective gate 6010n, the peripheral control board 4140 forms the preceding effect according to the lottery result. May be changed. For example, the preceding effect when the lottery result is a big hit is a high frequency sound pattern, and the preceding effect when the lottery result is a small hit is a low frequency sound pattern which is special to this pattern. Further, as the preceding effect, the expectation / reliability for the big hit in the lottery result may be displayed on the EL display device in the form of percentage. Further, a part of the result effect may be displayed as the preceding effect, and the result effect may be a special form. For example, the result of winning or losing a battle with a zombie may be displayed as a preceding effect, and the expectation of a big hit may be displayed as a result effect. Specifically, even if it is a small hit, an effect that defeats a zombie is performed by a preceding effect, and a low probability is displayed as a result effect.

  Since the effect produced by the game ball passing through the effect gate 6011 precedes the passage of the game ball in the effective gate 6010n, the game ball passing through the effect gate 6011 is surely effective within the managed time. It must be able to pass through the gate 6010n. Therefore, this is realized by directly connecting the effect gate 6011 and the effective gate 6010n using the game ball guideway unit 6010. Even if the effect gate can be passed through the effect gate 6010n, it is not always possible to pass it through the effective gate 6010n by merely providing the effect gate on the upper right side of the game area 5a. It is also conceivable to remove the effect gate from the game ball guiding path unit 6010 and provide a sensor at the end of the rail 6033, for example, but with this configuration, even if the game ball that has passed through the sensor is strongly struck by the handle device. However, it does not mean that the right area of the game area 5a is reached without exception. Furthermore, the production gate cannot be provided on the left side of the game area 5a.

  On the other hand, the game ball that has been hit right before the big hit game is started and has entered the taxiway unit 6010 (game ball wasting means) is isolated from the outside in the game ball taxiway unit, It is consumed and wasted without being able to enter the first starting opening 2001 or the general winning opening 2004, in other words, it forces the player to abandon the opportunity to win the lottery. In order to ensure that the game ball passes through the effect gate 6011 in the game ball guide path unit, the game machine gives the player a price for the useless ball, and gives the player an opportunity for additional effect in exchange, or a big hit state. It is possible to change the preliminary suggestion effect (effect display of the EL display unit 1400) regarding whether or not to shift to the (advantageous game state). Since the additional effect can precede the result effect in a form related to the lottery result effect, the player has a higher effect in which the preceding effect and the effect effect are combined, as compared with the case where the lottery result effect is simply performed. You can enjoy the benefits of being offered to quality. In this way, the game ball launched by the launching means into the predetermined area that is not accepted by the predetermined starting opening is detected by the main board (above specific detecting means) by the effect gate 6011 and / or the effective gate 6010n, The player loses the chance of being drawn if the game ball is detected by the specific detection means while a predetermined effect is being performed among the effects being performed by the peripheral control board (effect performing means). The value of the effect can be increased by displaying a specific effect that can be beneficial to the user (value improving means). After the right hitting instruction has been given when the lottery result is a big hit or a small hit in a normal game state where the big prize hole is not open (a big hit game state) and is not a time saving state So, in the case of a small hit, it is clear that the game ball that first passed through the production gate within the specified time was a useless ball with no opportunity to enter, although it was launched with the instruction of right-handed as a trigger. The peripheral control board detects this dead ball, and according to the game state, for example, according to the cumulative number of the dead balls between the big hits (the larger the cumulative number, the greater the value of the dead ball), The EL display unit 1400 may display a special effect image or a compensation effect moving image as a special effect (for example, a premium character). In addition, when a plurality of game balls pass through the production gate as useless balls (in the case of a big hit, the game ball passes through the production gate before the special winning opening is opened even if the game ball passes through the effective gate. The peripheral control board 4140 may change the effect according to the number of balls that have passed. Furthermore, the degree of change in the effect may be changed according to the value of the game ball, that is, according to 4 pachi, 1 pachi, etc. For example, in the case of one pachi compared to the case of four pachis, the degree of change in the effect is set to 1/4. In the case of 4 pachis, a certain change occurs in the effect with one game ball, and in the case of 1 pachi, the same change occurs in the effect only when 4 balls are supplied as waste balls. Every time a one-ball game ball passes through the production gate as a useless ball, the production screen comes into focus and the density of the production screen is increased.

  In the above description, even if the lottery result is a small hit, the lottery result is produced (the zombie loses) by the passage of the game ball at the effective gate 6010n as in the case of the big hit. In the case of a small hit, since the condition device is not activated and it is not significant to activate the accessory continuous operation device, the production of the lottery result is not triggered by the passage of the game ball in the effective gate 6010n, The display effect of the lottery result may be performed at a timing when the player passes the effect gate 6011 and then the effective gate 6010n. As described above, the time from when the game ball passes through the effect gate 6011 to when it reaches the effective gate 6010n is set within a specific range by the game ball falling speed reducing means of the game ball guideway unit 6010 described above. Therefore, the gaming machine can show the player that the lottery result is a big hit, and it is difficult to judge whether the lottery result is a big hit or a small hit.

  Further, when the lottery result is a small hit, the result production performed when the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n is that the warrior loses to the enemy character. You may make it defeat an enemy character. In addition, the production gate 6011 and / or the effective gate 6010n in the game ball taxiway unit 6010 may be made difficult for the player to visually recognize, and, for example, the resin case member of the game ball taxiway unit 6010 may be opaque. Alternatively, the area of the effect gate 6011 and / or the effective gate 6010n may be covered with a decorative plate. By making the effective gate 6010n difficult for the player to visually recognize the effect gate 6011 while allowing the player to visually recognize the effect, the gaming machine provides the player with an effect caused by the game ball passing through the effect gate 6011. It is possible to suddenly develop the lottery result production and improve the interest of the game.

  On the other hand, by making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the effect gate 6011, the player feels an unexpected feeling as if a related effect suddenly occurs before the effect effect generated by the game ball passing through the effective gate 6010n. Can be given to. When the result of the lottery is a small hit and the timing of the player's right-hand hit is delayed, or when the special winning opening has finished opening for a short period of time, the peripheral control board 4140 causes the game ball to pass through the production gate. Even so, we are trying not to generate preceding production. Further, the peripheral control board 4140 may cause the movable accessory to behave as the preceding effect by the game ball passing through the effect gate 6011 without being limited to the above-described sound effect. In addition, when the game ball passes through the effect gate 6011 and then passes through the effective gate 6010n, the peripheral control board 4140 steps up related effects such as sound effect, display effect, and movable accessory effect. You can also do it. For example, when the lottery result is a big hit, the operation amount of the movable winning object is reduced when the game ball passes the effect gate 6011, and the operation amount of the movable winning object is increased when the game ball passes the effective gate 6010n. Alternatively, a predetermined movable accessory is operated in the former case, and another movable accessory is operated in the latter case. Further, the gaming machine may change the mode of the effect on the effect gate 6011 and / or the effective gate 6010n according to the number of passing game balls to the effect gate 6011 within a predetermined time. In this way, since the game ball always passes through the effect gate 6011 before passing through the effective gate 6010n, the lottery result effect is left to the player's timing, but the game result falls (small hit). Even in the case of), the player can realize a gaming machine that can expect a big hit until the end.

  The game machine described here provides an operation opportunity to the auxiliary display device (upper plate liquid crystal display device 244) when a predetermined effect is being performed among the effects performed by the effect execution means (peripheral control board 4140). Furthermore, a substantially same effect as a predetermined effect displayed on the effect display device (EL display unit 1400) is provided so that the player can recognize the progress of the game by visually checking the auxiliary display device. By displaying on the auxiliary display device, the effect can be expanded beyond the game area (5a) (cross-border means), so that the player can actively have a sense of participation in the game, and as a result, , Can improve the quality of the game.

  Further, in the gaming machine described here, when a predetermined effect is displayed on the display screen (operable display unit) of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 by the peripheral control board 4140 (operation containing effect display means), the upper plate is displayed. An operation opportunity can be given to almost the entire display area of the liquid crystal display device 244 or an almost entire area in which a predetermined effect is displayed (overall operation target means). When operation is enabled, no matter which area of the entire area is operated, by changing the display mode of the predetermined effect based on the operated area, the predetermined effect reflects the intention of the player. It is possible to create a desired creative effect (desired effect creating means). Therefore, it is possible to positively give the player a sense of participation in the game and to improve the quality of the game. It should be noted that the above-described entire operable range may be changed according to the content of the predetermined effect displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

  Next, the EL display unit 1400 and the light guide plates (the front light guide plate 2301 and the rear light guide plate 2302) that are the main parts of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 96. As described above, the EL display unit 1400 is a self-luminous display and does not require a light source such as a backlight which is required in a liquid crystal device; therefore, the thickness of the display device can be suppressed and the size of the display device can be smaller than that of the liquid crystal display device. There is an advantage that can be done. Specifically, the thickness of the thin plate EL device (EL display substrates 1400a to 1400c) is about 1 mm, and the weight is significantly lighter than that of the liquid crystal device.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 90, the EL display unit 1400 of this example includes a plurality of EL display substrates 1400a to 1400c having different shapes. Specifically, the EL display unit 1400 of this example is arranged on the most front side and is surrounded by the display portion 1400d of the EL display unit 1400 (center accessory (frame decoration) 2300 to perform effect display and the like. Area (also referred to as a display surface or a display area) that can be independently configured, and a main EL display substrate 1400a, which is arranged behind the main EL display substrate 1400a and has a size of about half the size of the main EL display substrate 1400a. The sub EL display substrate 1400b and the column EL mounting movable body 1401 (see FIG. 91) arranged in the back of the sub EL display substrate 1400b are mounted on the forefront of the figure, and the main EL display substrate 1400a and the sub EL display are provided. And a circular movable body-mounted EL display substrate 1400c smaller than the substrate 1400b.

  Further, each of the EL display substrates 1400a to 1400c can be moved in a predetermined direction by a motor (not shown) as a moving unit. In the normal state, only the main EL display substrate 1400a is exposed so that it can be visually recognized by the player, and when a special condition such as a specific reach is established, the main EL display substrate 1400a is moved to move the sub EL. The form of the display unit 1400d itself of the EL display unit 1400 is changed so as to expose the display substrate 1400b and the movable body mounted EL display substrate 1400c. A form change of the display unit 1400d of the EL display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 93. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing a process of changing the form of the EL display unit 1400, FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between an operation process of the EL display unit 1400 and a light emission time of the light guide plate, and FIG. 93 is an EL display. It is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 in a state where a central portion of a display portion 1400d of the unit 1400 is opened. In addition, in FIG. 91, the lower side of the figure shows the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (player side), and the upper side of the figure shows the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 (pachinko machine 1 side).

  As shown in FIG. 91A, in the display portion 1400d of the EL display unit 1400, normally, the main EL display substrate 1400a alone closes the inside of the game panel 1100 and the center accessory (frame-shaped ornament) 2300. The sub EL display substrate 1400b and the movable body mounted EL display substrate 1400c are on standby at the back of the main EL display substrate 1400a. However, since each of the EL display substrates 1400a to 1400c is an opaque member whose back portion cannot be visually recognized, the sub-EL display substrate 1400b and the movable body-mounted EL display substrate 1400c which are normally on standby from the player on the back portion of the main EL display substrate 1400a are provided. Only the main EL display substrate 1400a is visible, and the (EL-mounted movable body 1401) is not visible. In other words, normally, the sub EL display substrate 1400b and the movable body mounted EL display substrate 1400c (EL mounted movable body 1401) are housed in a standby position hidden by the main EL display substrate 1400a.

  Then, when the special condition is satisfied, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a drive signal to a motor for moving the main EL display substrate 1400a to cause the main EL display substrate 1400a to move, as shown in FIGS. 91 (B) and 91 (C). By sliding to the left in the drawing, the sub EL display substrate 1400b is exposed so that it can be visually recognized by the player. Note that, as described above, the sub EL display substrate 1400b is about half the size of the main EL display substrate 1400a, and the left end portion thereof is located at the central portion of the display portion 1400d of the EL display unit 1400 in FIG. is doing. The peripheral control MPU 4150a slides the main EL display substrate 1400a until the right end of the main EL display substrate 1400a shown in FIG. When the position of the left end portion of the EL display substrate 1400b in the drawing matches, the main EL display substrate 1400a is further slid to the left in the drawing as shown in FIGS. 91B and 91C, and the sub EL display substrate 1400b is also moved. A drive signal is output to a motor for moving the sub EL display substrate 1400b to slide to the right in the drawing, thereby opening the central portion of the display portion 1400d of the EL display unit 1400. At this time, the main EL display substrate 1400a and the sub EL display substrate 1400b are moved at the same speed (slide) so that the shape of the display portion 1400d of the EL display unit 1400 becomes symmetrical with the central vertical line as the axis of symmetry. ) Let me.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 91B and 91C, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a drive signal to a motor for moving the EL mounted movable body 1401 to open the central portion of the display portion 1400d of the EL display unit 1400. In synchronization with the above, the EL mounted movable body 1401 is caused to project toward the front side in the drawing, whereby the movable body mounted EL display substrate 1400c is projected toward the front direction in the figure. It should be noted that even after the sliding of the main EL display substrate 1400a is started until the EL mounted movable body 1401 (movable body mounted EL display substrate 1400c) is projected toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1, it may be executed at once in a short time. Of course, by doing this, the player facing the pachinko machine 1 is given a stronger impression that the central portion of the display portion 1400d of the EL display unit 1400 suddenly cracks and the EL-mounting movable body 1401 projects from behind. Is possible.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a newly outputs the screen data to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae when the EL display boards 1400a to 1400c are moved by the motors. A plurality of EL display substrates 1400a to 1400c including an EL display substrate (in this example, a sub EL display substrate 1400b and a movable body mounted EL display substrate 1400c) exposed so as to be visually recognized by the player cooperate to perform effect display. . As described above, by changing the form of the display unit 1400d of the EL display unit 1400, the display content of the display unit 1400d is changed and various effect displays can be executed.

  That is, the EL display unit 1400 of the present example is configured such that the main EL display substrate 1400a is configured by the display unit 1400d of the EL display unit 1400, and the first EL display unit 1400a that can perform effect display independently. And a sub EL display substrate 1400b constitute a display unit 1400d, and a second display form capable of collaboratively performing effect display, a main EL display substrate 1400a, a sub EL display substrate 1400b, and a movable body mounted EL display substrate 1400c. The display unit 1400d is configured by and the effect display can be executed by switching to any one of a plurality of display modes having different appearances from the third display mode in which the effect display can be performed in cooperation with each other. There is.

  In addition, the main EL display substrate 1400a has a size that can singly close the insides of the game panel 1100 and the center accessory (frame-shaped ornament) 2300, and an area in which an image cannot be displayed does not occur ( Since there is no missing area in the display portion 1400d), the displayable area occupied by the display portion 1400d of the EL display unit 1400 is the maximum in the first display form. In the second display mode in which the main EL display substrate 1400a is slid to the left in the drawing to expose the sub EL display substrate 1400b so that the player can see it, the main EL display substrate 1400a and the sub EL display substrate 1400b are used for the game. It is possible to close the inside of the frame of the panel 1100 and the center accessory (frame-shaped ornament) 2300, and there is almost no area where an image cannot be displayed (the missing area of the display portion 1400d is the main EL display substrate 1400a. Therefore, most of the display portion 1400d of the EL display unit 1400 is a displayable area because it is only a boundary 1400p portion between the sub EL display substrate 1400b. On the other hand, in the third display form in which the movable body mounted EL display substrate 1400c is exposed by opening the central portion of the display unit 1400d of the EL display unit 1400, the movable body mounted EL display substrate 1400c is opened in the center of the EL display unit 1400. Since a region where the image cannot be displayed because the portion cannot be completely closed (a part of the display portion 1400d is missing), the displayable region of the EL display unit 1400 is minimized. That is, by switching the EL display unit 1400 from the first display form to the third display form, the area of the portion having the display function (the function of displaying an image or the like) in the display portion 1400d of the EL display unit 1400 is reduced. Part is reduced. In addition, the area of the portion having the display function in the display unit 1400d of the EL display unit 1400 is reduced, while an area where effects other than the display effect can be executed is created. Further, in the third display mode, the movable body mounted EL display substrate 1400c is exposed in the open central portion of the EL display unit 1400 to perform effect display, thereby displaying the display function of the display unit 1400d of the EL display unit 1400. Since the reduced portion is compensated for, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the quality of the effect executed by the EL display unit 1400.

  Further, as described above, since the weight of the EL display substrates 1400a to 1400c is significantly lighter than that of the liquid crystal device, the EL display substrates 1400a to 1400c can be moved quickly. The display mode, the second display mode, and the third display mode can be switched quickly. In this way, when the EL display unit 1400 is switched from the first display form to the third display form by accelerating the switching of the form of the EL display unit 1400, the player has gone through the second display form. The main EL display substrate 1400a and the sub EL display substrate 1400b can be suddenly changed from the first display mode in which the display unit 1400d can be configured by the main EL display substrate 1400a alone to perform the effect display independently. The display unit 1400d is configured by the movable body-mounted EL display substrate 1400c and the display unit 1400d is switched to the third display mode in which the effect display can be executed in cooperation, so that the seamless single-plate EL device is broken. A high impression can be given to the player.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 91, in this example, a light guide plate (a front light guide plate 2301 and a rear light guide plate 2302) is provided in front of (in the figure below) the EL display substrates 1400a to 1400c so as to be substantially parallel to the EL display substrates 1400a to 1400c. ) Are arranged. The front light guide plate 2301 is used to indicate that a big hit expectation is high in advance notice production, reach production, etc., and the high brightness of the front light guide plate 2301 provided on the front light guide plate 2301 based on the command received from the main control board 4100 by the peripheral control MPU 4150a. By outputting a lighting signal to the LED to cause the high-brightness LED to emit light, and this light is incident on the front light guide plate 2301, it is possible to display the other pattern (for example, a pattern simulating a specific character).

  In addition, the rear light guide plate 2302 outputs a lighting signal to a high brightness LED provided on the rear light guide plate 2302 based on a command received by the peripheral control MPU 4150a from the main control board 4100 to cause the high brightness LED to emit light. When this light is incident on the rear light guide plate 2302, a pattern different from the pattern displayed on the front light guide plate 2301 is displayed, which makes it difficult to notice that the display form of the EL display unit 1400 is changed. It is possible. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 94, the rear light guide plate 2302 can display a vertical striped pattern 1400m simulating noise, and the main EL display substrate 1400a and the sub EL display substrate 1400b are moved to move the EL display unit 1400. By displaying a vertical stripe pattern 1400m that imitates noise in front of the central portion when opening the central portion, clear display of the display portion 1400d (particularly the end portion of the main EL display substrate 1400a) of the EL display unit 1400 is hindered and the main EL is prevented. It is difficult for the player to understand that the display substrate 1400a is moving.

  As described above, the rear light guide plate 2302 is used to make it difficult to notice that the display form of the EL display unit 1400 is changed, but only when the operation confirmation of various movable bodies is performed in the initial setting process. Instead, it is also used when changing the display form of the EL display unit 1400 in the effect (reach effect in this example) during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Further, when changing the display form of the EL display unit 1400 in the effect (reach effect in this example) during the variable display of the decorative pattern, it is difficult to notice that the display form of the EL display unit 1400 is changed. You may make it have both the function to do, and the function to suggest that a big hit expectation degree is high. That is, when the pattern is displayed on the rear light guide plate 2302 during the variable display of the decorative pattern, it is not only difficult to notice that the display form of the EL display unit 1400 is changed, but also the jackpot expectation is high. In other words, when the pattern is displayed on the rear light guide plate 2302, the appearance frequency is set to be a big hit at a higher rate than when the pattern is not displayed on the rear light guide plate 2302. Etc. may be set. As a result, the variable display of the decorative pattern executed on the display unit 1400d of the EL display unit 1400 can be focused more, so that the pattern displayed on the rear light guide plate 2302 disappears and the display form is changed. When the display unit 1400 suddenly appears in front of the player's eyes, the display unit 1400 can be surprised and surprised, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed.

  FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation process of the EL display unit 1400 and the light emission timing of the rear light guide plate 2302. As shown in FIG. 92, after the peripheral control MPU 4150a starts the variable display of the decorative pattern, the execution time of the effect using the operation of the EL display unit 1400 (the effect of opening the central portion of the EL display unit 1400) comes At a predetermined timing before (before the movement of the main EL display substrate 1400a is started), a high-brightness LED provided on the rear light guide plate 2302 is caused to emit light, and a vertical stripe pattern 1400m imitating noise is displayed on the rear light guide plate 2302. Let After that, with the vertical stripe pattern 1400m imitating noise displayed on the rear light guide plate 2302, a drive signal is output to the motor that moves the main EL display substrate 1400a to start the movement of the main EL display substrate 1400a. That is, in the main EL display substrate 1400a, a vertical stripe pattern 1400m simulating noise is displayed on the rear light guide plate 2302, which hinders clear visibility of the display portion 1400d (especially the end portion of the main EL display substrate 1400a) of the EL display unit 1400. It is controlled to move in the state of being controlled.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a emits light from the high-brightness LED provided on the rear light guide plate 2302 at least until the right end of the moving main EL display substrate 1400a matches the position of the left end of the sub EL display substrate 1400b. The vertical stripe pattern 1400m imitating noise is continuously displayed on the rear light guide plate 2302, and the rear light guide plate 2302 is based on that the right end portion of the main EL display substrate 1400a matches the left end position of the sub EL display substrate 1400b. Of the high-intensity LED provided on the display unit 1400d of the EL display unit 1400 (especially the main EL display) is stopped (light is turned off) and the vertical stripe pattern 1400m simulating noise is not displayed on the rear light guide plate 2302. It is returned to a state where clear visibility of the substrate 1400a) is not hindered. Here, the light guide plate extinguishing process performed based on that the right end portion of the main EL display substrate 1400a matches the position of the left end portion of the sub EL display substrate 1400b includes various detection switches (for example, the detection switches used in the initial setting process described above). , A photo sensor, etc.). It should be noted that the light guide plate turn-off processing may be performed after receiving signals from various detection switches and before the main EL display substrate 1400a and the sub EL display substrate 1400b move in opposite directions. . Although not shown in FIG. 92, after the light guide plate turn-off processing is performed, the main EL display substrate 1400a and the sub EL display substrate 1400b move in opposite directions.

  In this manner, the high-brightness LED is caused to emit light in a state where only the main EL display substrate 1400a is visible to display a vertical stripe pattern 1400m imitating noise on the rear light guide plate 2302, and the display portion 1400d of the EL display unit 1400 is clear. After the movement of the main EL display substrate 1400a is started in a state in which the main EL display substrate 1400a is disturbed, the high-intensity LED of the high-intensity LED is detected based on that the right end portion of the main EL display substrate 1400a matches the left end position of the sub EL display substrate 1400b. The main EL display substrate 1400a and the sub-EL display substrate are switched to a state in which the display portion 1400d of the EL display unit 1400 can be clearly recognized by stopping (turning off) the light emission and disappearing the display of the vertical stripe pattern 1400m simulating noise. 1400b is moved in the opposite direction. In other words, after the high-brightness LED is made to emit light and the vertical stripe pattern 1400m simulating noise is displayed on the rear light guide plate 2302, the emission of the high-brightness LED is stopped (turned off) and the vertical stripe pattern 1400m simulating noise is displayed. The main EL display substrate 1400a is moved within the period until disappearance, and the right end portion of the main EL display substrate 1400a is aligned with the left end position of the sub EL display substrate 1400b. The player suddenly moves in a direction in which the main EL display substrate 1400a and the sub-EL display substrate 1400b are opposite to each other when the display unit 1400d of the EL display unit 1400 is switched from a state in which the clear display is obstructed to a state in which the clear display is visible. Then, since a scene in which the central portion of the EL display unit 1400 is opened is seen, it is possible to give the impression that the central portion of the display portion 1400d of the EL display unit 1400 is suddenly broken.

  Even when the EL display unit 1400 is switched from the first display form to the third display form and then returned to the first display form again, the height mounted on the LED substrate provided on the rear light guide plate 2302 is high. A vertical stripe pattern 1400m that imitates noise is displayed on the rear light guide plate 2302 by causing the LED of the brightness to emit light, and then the EL mounted movable body 1401 (movable body mounted) in a state where clear visibility of the display portion 1400d of the EL display unit 1400 is disturbed. The movement of the EL display substrate 1400c) is started, and all of the main EL display substrate 1400a, the sub EL display substrate 1400b, and the EL mounted movable body 1401 (movable body mounted EL display substrate 1400c) that form the EL display unit 1400 are at the standby positions. Based on the fact that it has moved to the (home position) detected by various detection switches, it drives to an electric drive source such as a motor. After the signal output is stopped and the main EL display substrate 1400a, the sub EL display substrate 1400b, and the EL mounted movable body 1401 (movable body mounted EL display substrate 1400c) are on standby at the standby position (original position), the rear light guide plate A state in which a pattern is not displayed on the rear light guide plate 2302 by stopping (turning off) the high-luminance LED mounted on the LED substrate provided on the 2302, that is, a clear visual confirmation of the display portion 1400d of the EL display unit 1400. May be returned to the unhindered state. As a result, when the display form of the EL display unit 1400 is changed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display unit 1400d of the EL display unit 1400 is prevented from being clearly recognized and the process of the change of the display form is difficult to be grasped. Therefore, it is possible to give a fresh surprise each time the display form of the EL display unit 1400 changes, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, as long as it is difficult to notice that the display form of the EL display unit 1400 is changed, the pattern displayed on the rear light guide plate 2302 is not limited to the above-mentioned pattern, and further, the pattern on the rear light guide plate 2302. The display period and display timing (display start time, display end time) are not limited to those described above. That is, in the above example, when changing the display form of the EL display unit 1400 (the first display form in which the main EL display substrate 1400a alone constitutes the display portion 1400d of the EL display unit 1400: FIG. 91 (A)) , The final display form (third display form that constitutes the display portion 1400d by the main EL display substrate 1400a, the sub EL display substrate 1400b, and the movable body mounted EL display substrate 1400c: FIG. 91C) is changed. Based on the previous display form (the second display form that constitutes the display portion 1400d by the main EL display substrate 1400a and the sub EL display substrate 1400b: FIG. 91 (B)), the light emission of the high-brightness LED is performed. It is configured such that it is stopped (turned off) and the display of the vertical striped pattern 1400 m simulating noise on the rear light guide plate 2302 disappears. Separately from this configuration, the high-brightness LED of the rear light guide plate 2302 is caused to emit light to display a vertical stripe pattern 1400m imitating noise on the rear light guide plate 2302, and then the light emission is stopped (turned off) to cause the rear light guide plate 2302. In the period until the display of the vertical striped pattern 1400m simulating the noise in FIG. 1 disappears, the display form of the EL display unit 1400 before the change (the main EL display substrate 1400a independently displays the display unit 1400d of the EL display unit 1400). The first display mode to be configured: the display section 1400d is configured by the final display mode (main EL display substrate 1400a, sub EL display substrate 1400b, and movable body mounted EL display substrate 1400c) from the configuration shown in FIG. Display form: EL display substrates 1400a to 1400c by controlling the drive of the motor so as to be changed to FIG. It may be allowed moved. As a result, when the display unit 1400d of the EL display unit 1400 is switched from a state in which the clear display is disturbed to a state in which the display unit 1400d is clearly visible, the display form of the EL display unit 1400 is renewed and suddenly the final display form ( The EL display unit 1400, which has been changed to the already broken state, appears in front of the player, so that the player can be surprised and surprised, and the game will not be bored by giving it sharpness. be able to.

  Further, when the display form of the EL display unit 1400 is changed, it may be made to make it difficult for the player to recognize at least the start operation of changing the display form, and specifically, the display form of the EL display unit 1400. Prior to the start of the operation of changing (the movement of the main EL display substrate 1400a), the high-brightness LED provided on the rear light guide plate 2302 is caused to emit light to display the vertical stripe pattern 1400m imitating noise on the rear light guide plate 2302. In that state, the operation of changing the display form of the EL display unit 1400 (movement of the main EL display substrate 1400a) may be started. In this case, the display form of the EL display unit 1400 is in the process of switching from the first display form to the third display form (from the start of switching from the first display form to the second display form to the second display form). Of the rear light guide plate 2302 before the display mode is changed to or after the switching from the second display mode to the third display mode is started). The light emission of the LED having the brightness may be stopped (turned off) so that the display of the vertical stripe pattern 1400m simulating the noise on the rear light guide plate 2302 disappears. In this case as well, the display form of the EL display unit 1400 is renewed when the display portion 1400d of the EL display unit 1400 is switched from a state in which the clear display is obstructed to a state in which it can be clearly viewed, which is unexpected to the player. It is possible to give sexuality and surprise, and you can give the game a sharpness and keep it from getting tired.

  In addition, when changing the display form of the EL display unit 1400 (the first display form in which the main EL display substrate 1400a independently constitutes the display portion 1400d of the EL display unit 1400: FIG. 91A), A high-brightness LED of the light guide plate 2302 is caused to emit light to display a vertical stripe pattern 1400m that imitates noise on the rear light guide plate 2302, and in that state, an operation of changing the display form of the EL display unit 1400 is started to make a final display. Vertical stripes that imitate noise in the rear light guide plate 2302 by stopping (turning off) the light emission of the high-intensity LED based on the change to the second display form before the change to the third display form The control for disappearing the display of the pattern 1400 m and the vertical stripe pattern 140 imitating noise on the rear light guide plate 2302 by causing the high-intensity LED of the rear light guide plate 2302 to emit light. m is displayed, the operation of changing the display form of the EL display unit 1400 is started in that state, and the light emission of the high-intensity LED is caused based on the change to the third display form which is the final display form. Control to stop (turn off) the display of the vertical stripe pattern 1400m that imitates noise on the rear light guide plate 2302, and make the high-brightness LED of the rear light guide plate 2302 emit light to cause vertical stripe pattern that imitates noise on the rear light guide plate 2302. 1400 m is displayed, and in that state, the operation of changing the display form of the EL display unit 1400 is started to change the display form of the EL display unit 1400 from the first display form to the third display form (the first display form). Before starting the switching from the display form to the second display form and before changing to the second display form, or switching from the second display form to the third display form. (Before the change to the third display mode from the start), the emission of the high-intensity LED provided on the rear light guide plate 2302 is stopped (turned off), and the vertical stripe pattern 1400 m that imitates the noise in the rear light guide plate 2302 is formed. It may be possible to execute any one or a plurality of arbitrary combinations of the control for disappearing the display. When a plurality of combinations among these plurality of controls can be executed, the high-luminance LED provided on the rear light guide plate 2302 is stopped (turned off) to generate a vertical stripe pattern 1400 m simulating noise in the rear light guide plate 2302. When the display state of the EL display unit 1400 is switched from the state in which the clear display of the display unit 1400d of the EL display unit 1400 is disturbed to the state in which the display is clearly visible, the display mode of the EL display unit 1400 is changed to any display mode. You can let me pay attention to what is done. Further, in this case, the jackpot expectation is changed according to the display form of the EL display unit 1400 when the state in which the clear visibility of the display unit 1400d of the EL display unit 1400 is disturbed is switched to the state in which the clear visibility is visible. You may do it. For example, in the case where the display unit 1400d of the EL display unit 1400 is changed to a third display form which is a final display form when the display unit 1400d is switched from a state in which the clear display is disturbed to a state in which it is clearly visible, The jackpot expectation degree may be higher than that in the case where the second display form before the change to the third display form, which is the final display form, is changed. As a result, the change in the display form of the EL display unit 1400 can be paid more attention to, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed.

  In the above example, the display form of the EL display unit 1400 is changed by using the rear light guide plate 2302 provided on the side closest to the display unit 1400d of the EL display unit 1400 among the light guide plates (the front light guide plate 2301 and the rear light guide plate 2302). Although it is configured so that it is difficult to notice the change, the display form of the EL display unit 1400 is changed by using the front light guide plate 2301 provided on the side closest to the player. You may comprise so that it may become hard to notice. In this case, a pattern that makes it difficult for the player to notice that the display form of the EL display unit 1400 is being changed is displayed and displayed in front of the display unit 1400d of the EL display unit 1400. Since it can be directed to focus on the design, the display portion 1400d of the EL display unit 1400 can be made more difficult to be visually recognized.

  Further, LED boards on which high-luminance LEDs are mounted are also provided on the left and right sides of the rear light guide plate 2302, and light is incident from the upper and lower end surfaces of the rear light guide plate 2302 and the left side of the rear light guide plate 2302. The pattern to be displayed on the rear light guide plate 2302 may be different from that when light is incident from the right and left end faces. In this case, light is incident from the upper and lower end faces of the rear light guide plate 2302. The display form of the EL display unit 1400 is changed by configuring the display position of the vertical stripe pattern 1400m that imitates noise depending on whether the light is incident from the left and right end faces of the rear light guide plate 2302. In this case, high-brightness LEDs provided on the upper and lower end faces of the rear light guide plate 2302 and high-brightness LEDs provided on the left and right end faces of the rear light guide plate 2302 are switched. The noise thereby may be to change the display position of the stripes 1400m imitating. As a result, the movement of the EL display substrates 1400a to 1400c can be made even less noticeable.

  Further, the above technical idea is such that a movable body (main EL display substrate 1400a, 1400a, by displaying a predetermined pattern (vertical stripe pattern 1400m simulating noise in the above example) on the light guide plate (rear light guide plate 2302 in the above example). The sub EL display substrate 1400b and the movable body mounted EL display substrate 1400c (EL mounted movable body 1401) are not easily noticed (concealed) that they are moving (moving or operating), and do not depart from the technical idea. The design can be changed within the range. For example, the movable body, which is normally placed in a standby position that is difficult for the player to see, is moved to the front of the display unit 1400d of the EL display unit 1400 that is visible to the player and to the exposed position on the back of the light guide plate. In this case, it is difficult to notice the movement of the movable body from the standby position to the exposed position, and the movable body placed at the position of the back of the light guide plate that is normally visible to the player can be moved to other positions ( It may be moved to a position visible from the player behind the light guide plate, or may be retracted to a position other than the position behind the light guide plate that is difficult to see from the player. It may be one that makes it difficult for the movable body to notice the movement when the movable body is moved.

  Further, in synchronization with the display of the noise 1400m on the rear light guide plate 2302, a lamp / LED provided on the game board 5 and / or the door frame 3 or the like is displayed in the same manner as the noise 1400m displayed on the rear light guide plate 2302. The noise 1400 m may be displayed over the entire game board 5 and / or the entire pachinko machine 1 including the game board 5 and the door frame 3 by lighting and blinking in a vertical strip shape so that Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the game board 5 and / or the door frame 3 are vertically divided into a plurality of areas (areas A to C in the examples of FIGS. 95 and 96), and The noise 1400 m may be displayed by lighting and blinking a lamp / LED arranged in an arbitrary area among a plurality of areas in synchronization with each other to cause the entire area to emit light in a strip shape in the vertical direction. Each area of the game board 5 (area A to area C) corresponds to each area of the door frame 3 (area A to area C). Then, for example, the lamps / LEDs arranged in the area A of the game board 5 and the lamps / LEDs arranged in the area A of the door frame 3 are lit and blinked in synchronism with each other so that the area A becomes integrated. The lighting is controlled in a strip shape. By performing these lighting controls in each area (area A to area C) in synchronization with the above-described display effect, the entire gaming board 5 and / or the entire pachinko machine 1 including the gaming board 5 and the door frame 3 are performed. The noise of 1400 m can be displayed, and the attention of the player is dispersed from the EL display unit 1400 to the entire game board 5 and the entire pachinko machine 1 including the game board 5 and the door frame 3, and the main EL display board 1400a. And the sub EL display substrate 1400b can be made hard to notice, and the boundary between the main EL display substrate 1400a and the sub EL display substrate 1400b can be made inconspicuous, so that the main EL display substrate 1400a is slid. It is possible to make it more difficult for the player to notice.

  Also, when each of the plurality of areas (area A to area C) of the game board 5 and / or the door frame 3 is lit / blinking, a big hit lottery (whether it is a big hit, a kind of big hit (after the big hit game state ends Depending on whether it is a big hit that activates the stochastic fluctuation function, or whether it is a big hit that activates the time saving function after the big hit game state ends))) 5 and / or the lamps / LEDs arranged in a plurality of areas (area A to area C) of the door frame 3 may be controlled to be turned on. For example, in the case of a big hit that activates both the probability variation function and the time saving function after the big hit game state is finished, the big hits are arranged in a plurality of areas (area A to area C) of the game board 5 and / or the door frame 3. If the ratio of controlling the lighting of the lamp / LED to red is increased, and if it is out of the range, the lamp / LED arranged in a plurality of areas (area A to area C) of the game board 5 and / or the door frame 3 is blue. The lighting / blinking pattern determination table set to increase the rate of lighting control, and in the case of a big hit, identify from a plurality of areas (area A to area C) of the game board 5 and / or the door frame 3 The ratio of controlling the lighting of only the lamps / LEDs arranged in the area (for example, area B) is increased, and when it is out of order, the area is arranged in an arbitrary area (for example, area C) different from the specific area. It is arranged in a plurality of areas (area A to area C) of the game board 5 and / or the door frame 3 by using a lighting / blinking table set so as to increase the ratio of controlling the lighting of only the lamps / LEDs. The lighting / blinking pattern of the existing lamp / LED may be determined. In this way, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation of a big hit by the lighting / flashing pattern of the plurality of areas (area A to area C) of the game board 5 and / or the door frame 3, so that the player's attention is given to the EL display unit. Since it is possible to shift from 1400 to the entire game board 5 or the entire pachinko machine 1 including the game board 5 and the door frame 3, it becomes difficult to notice the boundary between the main EL display substrate 1400a and the sub EL display substrate 1400b. The fact that the main EL display substrate 1400a is sliding can be made more difficult for the player to notice.

  In this way, the single EL plate-shaped main EL display substrate 1400a without a joint occupies the inside of the frame of the game panel 1100 and the center accessory (frame-shaped ornament) 2300, so that the back part of the main EL display substrate 1400a is closed. From the above, it is possible to execute the effect display without being aware of the EL mounted movable body 1401 being exposed, and further to display the noise 1400m on the rear light guide plate 2302 to prevent clear visibility of the main EL display substrate 1400a. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the main EL display substrate 1400a is sliding, the central portion of the display portion 1400d of the EL display unit 1400 is opened and the movable body mounted EL display substrate 1400c is projected. Display board that should not be broken by changing the appearance so that Substrate 1400a) can give a novel impression with give surprise and unexpected by causing recognize the player moving body mounted EL display substrate 1400c has been projected suddenly cracks in front of the eye. In this way, since the display content of the EL display unit 1400 is changed by changing the form of the display unit 1400d itself of the EL display unit 1400, it is possible to increase the authenticity as compared with a conventional gaming machine that simply changes an image. You can In addition, since the first display form is a seamless single plate and the third display form in which at least a part of the display unit 1400d is actually missing, the destruction state can be expressed more realistically and the realism can be improved. Increase.

  In the above example, the movable-body-mounted EL display substrate 1400c is exposed from the open central portion of the EL display unit 1400 and the movable-body-mounted EL display substrate 1400c is used to perform the effect display. You may make it appear the movable body which does not. In other words, the seamless single-plate-shaped main EL display substrate 1400a individually blocks the insides of the game panel 1100 and the center accessory (frame-shaped ornament) 2300, so that the main EL display substrate 1400a is exposed from the back of the EL. The appearance is changed so that the movable body-mounted EL display substrate 1400c is projected by opening the central portion of the display portion 1400d of the EL display unit 1400 without being aware of the mounted movable body 1401 being exposed, and there is no possibility of cracking. As long as the display substrate is capable of performing an effect as if the display substrate was cracked, a movable body on which the display substrate is not mounted may be exposed from the open central portion of the EL display unit 1400.

  Further, the pattern displayed on the rear light guide plate 2302 is not limited to the noise 1400m as long as the visibility of the operation of the rear movable body (including the operation of the EL display substrates 1400a to 1400c) can be obstructed. May be used as the design (character design, character design, pattern design, etc.). If these patterns are displayed not only on a part of the rear light guide plate 2302 but on substantially the entire surface, it is possible to further reduce the visibility of the movement of the rear movable body and to move the rear movable body. The player's consciousness can be further eliminated, and the various effects described above can be further enhanced.

  As described above, in this example, by opening the central portion of the display unit 1400d of the EL display unit 1400, a new effect space is created behind the display unit 1400d of the EL display unit 1400 (inside the EL display unit 1400). There is. Then, by exposing the EL mounted movable body 1401 (movable body mounted EL display substrate 1400c) in this effect space, it is possible to perform an effect with a sense of depth including the space behind the display section 1400d. Has become.

  Further, in the case of a big hit or a small hit that is controlled to a so-called latent latent change state in which the latent state is set without clearly indicating whether or not it is the probability variation state, the display effect is executed to change the display form of the EL display unit 1400. The first display mode is changed to the third display mode, and then the EL display unit 1400 is set to the first display mode regardless of the gaming state by returning to the first display mode before executing the variable display of the decorative symbol again. The decorative pattern may be variably displayed by controlling the display form, or after the EL display unit 1400 is changed to the third display form, the decoration is maintained in the state where the third display form is maintained for a predetermined period. The symbols may be variably displayed, and in this case, the display form of the EL display unit 1400 is returned to the first display form based on the fact that the probability change state is not clearly displayed or clarified. It may be so. Also, a plurality of types of effect modes in which the decorative pattern of the EL display unit 1400 and the background image other than the decorative pattern are different according to the game state (for example, a normal mode in which it is clear that there is a normal state (low-probability non-time saving state)) Whether or not it is a probabilistic mode or a stochastic fluctuation mode that is clearly a time-saving mode (low probability time-saving state) or a probability variation state (high-probability time-saving state or high-probability non-time-saving state) When it is controlled to the latent probability variation mode which is not clear, the EL display unit 1400 may be controlled to a predetermined display form so as to correspond to the effect mode. For example, the latency probability variation mode (normal state, time saving state, High-probability time-saving state and high-probability non-time-saving state, which is not clear whether or not it is a stochastic fluctuation state) and probability variation mode (high-probability time-saving state and high-probability non-time-saving state) (In the state that it is clear that it is a probability variation state), the EL display unit 1400 is controlled to the first display form to display the decorative pattern in a variable display, and it is clear that it is not a probability variation state in the normal mode (of the normal state). Of these, it is not clear that it is not a probability variation state) or the time saving mode (a state where it is not clear that it is not a probability variation state of the time saving states), the EL display unit 1400 is controlled to the third display form and the decorative pattern May be variably displayed. In this way, by changing the display form of the EL display unit 1400 according to the effect mode, it is possible to change the player's consciousness of the big hit, and by changing the display form of the EL display unit 1400, change the mood. The game can be continued.

  Also, the so-called times cut time short big hit or times cut probability to control to the above-mentioned time saving state or probability fluctuation state (high probability time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) over the fluctuation display of the special symbol for the predetermined number of times after the big hit game state ends In the case of a fluctuation jackpot, the EL display unit 1400 is controlled to the third display form to display the decorative symbol in a variable manner, and the variable display of the special symbol is ended a predetermined number of times to control the shift to the normal state. The EL display unit 1400 may be returned from the third display form to the first display form and the decorative symbols may be variably displayed. In this way, by changing the display form of the EL display unit 1400 in the case of a so-called short cut big hit in times of times or a large number of times of probability variation fluctuation big hit, it is possible to raise the player's consciousness for the big hit and expect the occurrence of the big hit.

  Further, although the one in which the EL display substrates 1400a to 1400c of the EL display unit 1400 are moved by the motor as the moving means is shown, the moving means is not limited to the motor, and the first display mode of the EL display unit 1400 described above, Other movable means such as a solenoid may be used as long as they can switch between the second display mode and the third display mode.

[Technical thought]
A gaming machine represented by the pachinko machine described in the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing a game using a game medium, and has a light incident surface on which light is incident and a light emitting surface different from the light incident surface. A light guide plate that is formed so that its back portion is visible, and that emits light that has entered from the light entrance surface toward the front of the gaming machine from the light exit surface, and that the light enters the light entrance surface of the light guide plate. A light source for entering, a movable body provided behind the light guide plate and operable in a predetermined manner, and an effect control means for performing light emission control of the light source and drive control of the movable body, Specific information is displayed on the light exit surface of the light guide plate by making light incident on the light entrance surface, and the effect control unit causes the light source to emit light before starting the operation of the movable body. The specific information is displayed on the light emitting surface of the light guide plate, and the movable body is maintained in that state. It is characterized in that the difficult recognize the operation start of the movable body from the outside by starting the operation. This allows light to enter the light-incident surface of the light guide plate prior to the start of operation of the movable body, making it difficult to visually recognize the start of operation of the movable body. It is possible to realize a new movable effect (a movable effect as if a movable object suddenly appeared) that renews the physical condition. As a result, the player can be surprised or surprised as compared with the conventional movable effect that merely shows the movement and deformation of the movable body, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the entertainment level of the game.

  In the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a gaming machine other than a pachinko machine, for example, a pachislot machine, a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused, or the like The invention can be applied. In consideration of application of the present invention to a pachi-slot machine, the "gaming ball" in each of the above-described configurations may be used as the "gaming medium".

  A pachinko machine is a gaming machine in which a loading medium such as a game ball, which is a medium that the player throws in the gaming machine, and a gaming medium, which is a medium used for a substantial game played by the player, are the same. It is a type of gaming machine in which a game is played using a medium such as a game ball that has been inserted. Specifically, "a launching device that launches a game ball in response to the operation of the operating handle, a large number of obstacle nails, a center accessory, an appropriate device such as a display means is incorporated, a start winning hole, a big prize. A game area provided with appropriate ball entrances for entering game balls such as mouths, passage openings, and arrival openings, a rail for guiding the game ball from the launching device to the game area, and a game ball guided to the game area. It is provided with a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls depending on whether the game balls enter the ball entrance or the mode in which the game balls enter the plurality of ball entrances. "

  In addition, there are various types of pachinko machines, which are typified by what is generally referred to as "digital pachis". "Entering state detecting means for detecting the entering state into the entrance (that is, the game state) (Detecting means), a lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when a ball is detected by the entering state detecting means, and a special symbol display means for varying and stopping the special symbol according to the lottery result of the lottery means. "In addition, while the special symbol is fluctuating, the decorative symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of decorative symbols is variably displayed, and further provided is an effect image display means for causing a character or the like to appear at a predetermined timing." , Equipped with a lottery means for performing a lottery by sorting game balls in a role and a lottery means for winning a prize at a starting opening, which is typified by what is generally called a "multifunction machine" "A game is played by a predetermined number of game balls, such as 16 game balls, which are generally typified by" alepachi ", and the game balls enter a plurality of entrances in one game. According to the present invention, a payout of a predetermined number of game balls can be made.

  On the other hand, with a pachi-slot machine, after inserting a medal which is a game medium, after inserting the medal, while displaying the symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in accordance with the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever), thereafter, This is a slot machine with a stop operation function, which is a substantial game in which the fluctuation of the symbol row is stopped according to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button). In addition, when the stop operation means is not operated even after the lapse of a predetermined time, the variation of the symbol row may be stopped in response to the lapse of the predetermined time. Then, when the combination of symbols at the time of stop of fluctuation of the symbol string satisfies a specific condition, a predetermined number of medals can be paid out or the player can obtain a large number of medals according to the satisfied condition. , A special advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is generated.

  Further, a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused is one in which a plurality of (for example, five) game balls are used as a loading medium, and after the loading medium is loaded, a starting operation means (for example, an operating lever). In accordance with the operation of (), the symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and thereafter, the variation of the symbol sequence is stopped in response to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button). In addition, when the stop operation means is not operated even after the lapse of a predetermined time, the variation of the symbol row may be stopped in response to the lapse of the predetermined time. Then, when the combination of symbols at the time of fluctuation stop of the symbol string satisfies a specific condition, a predetermined number of medals can be paid out or the player can obtain a large number of medals according to the satisfied condition. , A special advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is generated.

  In addition, a pachi-slot machine, or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused, such as a gaming machine in which a substantial game is not played depending on the medium to be inserted, may seem to have no game medium. However, even with such a game machine, it is possible to envisage that the game content as a whole includes a game played using a game ball or another appropriate article. Therefore, even such a gaming machine can be targeted for a gaming machine in which a game is played using the gaming medium.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Gaming board 5a Gaming area 200 Dish unit 201 Upper plate (storage part)
210 Dish Unit Base 212 Upper Dish Body (Reservoir)
212a Guide passage part 220 Performance operation unit 220A Mounting base unit 220B Touch unit 220C Button unit 244 Upper plate liquid crystal display device 246 Touch panel 257 Upper plate effect button (push button)
260 dish unit cover (bulging member)
261 Lower plate opening 262 Upper plate lower cover 6010 Gaming ball guideway unit 6010n Effective gate 6011 Direction gate

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that can execute a game using a game medium,
A light incident surface on which light is incident and a light emitting surface different from the light incident surface are formed so that the back portion can be visually recognized, and light incident from the light incident surface is forwarded from the light emitting surface to the gaming machine. A light guide plate that emits toward
A light source for making light incident on the light incident surface of the light guide plate;
A movable body provided behind the light guide plate and capable of changing between a pre-operation state and a post-operation state,
And a production control means for performing light emission control of the light source and drive control of the movable body,
Specific information is expressed on the light exit surface of the light guide plate by making light incident on the light entrance surface,
By the effect control means,
While changing the movable body from the pre-operation state to the post-operation state, light is incident on the light incident surface of the light guide plate from the light source to identify the light exit surface of the light guide plate. And a state in which the information is expressed, and a state in which the specific information is not expressed in the light emitting surface of the light guide plate by causing the light source to emit no light,
Depending on the state in which the specific information is displayed on the light emitting surface of the light guide plate, it is difficult to visually recognize a change from the pre-operation state of the movable body to the post-operation state,
Even when the movable body is being changed from the post-operation state to the pre-operation state, light is incident from the light source to the light incident surface of the light guide plate to identify the light exit surface of the light guide plate. And a state in which the information is expressed, and a state in which the specific information is not expressed in the light emitting surface of the light guide plate by causing the light source to emit no light,
There are a plurality of light sources in the light source, the specific information that is exposed on the light exit surface of the light guide plate is changeable by changing the light source that enters light into the light entrance surface, While changing the movable body from the pre-operation state to the post-operation state, changing the specific information displayed on the light emitting surface of the light guide plate while changing the pre-operation state of the movable body from the operation state. It is difficult to recognize the change to the rear state from the outside , and after the state is changed to the post-motion state, the movable body is in a state in which the effect by the movable body is being executed. The gaming machine is characterized in that the light source is made non-emissive in order to make clear, and the specific information is not displayed on the light emitting surface of the light guide plate .